CURRICULUM C-23

DEPARTMENT OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION &
TRAINING

DIPLOMA IN
ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS
ENGINEERING

1
 1. PREAMBLE

The world is constantly evolving, and so must our approach to education. Our curriculum has been
designed with this in mind, with a focus on practical skills, critical thinking, and problem-solving. We
believe that these skills are essential for success in both academic and professional spheres.

At the heart of our curriculum is the belief that education should be student-centered, empowering
learners to take ownership of their learning and pursue their passions. We aim to create a learning
environment that is safe, supportive, and nurturing, where every student has the opportunity to
reach his/her full potential. We acknowledge that learning is a lifelong journey, and our curriculum is
designed to provide a solid foundation for continued growth and development. We hope that our
students will not only leave with a diploma but with employability and passion for learning

The State Board of Technical Education and Training, (SBTET) AP, has been offering Diploma
programmes to meet the above said aspirations of the stake holders: students, parents, industries,
academia, and the society at large. As such, it has been the practice of SBTET, A.P., to keep the
curriculum abreast with the advances in technology through systematic and scientific analysis of
current curriculum and bring out an updated revised version at regular intervals. Accordingly the
SBTET, AP under the aegis of the Department of Technical Education, Andhra Pradesh in its 57th
Board Meeting held on 05-02-2019 (vide item no: 18) resolved to update the Polytechnic Curriculum
C-20, to be implemented with effect from the academic year 2023-24.

Analysis of Curriculum C-20 was started in the month of January-2023. Feedback was collected from
all stakeholders: Students, Lecturers, Senior Lecturers, Heads of Sections and Principals for all
programmes for this purpose.

A Meeting was convened on 15 th February 2023, from 10:00 A.M. onwards, by Smt. C. Naga Rani,
I.A.S, Director of Technical Education & Chairperson, SBTET to discuss on revamping of C-20
curriculum to meet the needs of industries and for improvement of placements.

The meeting was attended by Sri Saurab Gaur, I.A.S, Principal Secretary, Skill Development &
Training, Smt. Lavanya Veni, I.A.S, Director, Employment & Training. Thirteen Representatives from
Industries and 14 Academicians from Higher level institutions and Officials of ITI, Skill Development,
CTE and BTET attended the workshop.

Smt. C Naga Rani, I.A.S., Commissioner of Technical Education while addressing in the workshop, the
necessity of industrial training and on hand experience, emphasised that the students need to
undergo to support the industries. The gaps in the Curriculum need to be fixed to make the students
passionate to work in the industry in order to support economy of the country.

The committees of each branch constituted with experts from industry, higher level Institutions and
faculty of Polytechnics are informed to study the possibility of incorporating the following while
preparing the curriculum so as to improve employability.

 IOT for all branches

 Theoretical & Practical subjects 50 : 50 Ratio
 Industry 4.0 concepts

2
  5G Technology
 Critical Thinking (Quantitative Aptitude, Data Interpretation, Quantitative reasoning
etc) to face the written tests conducted by the industries during placements.
 Internships after 1st Year, 3rd Sem (2 to 3 weeks)

A series of workshops with subject experts followed in the subsequent weeks for thorough perusal
and critique of draft curricula; and the suggestions thus received from Industrialists and academia
have been recorded, validated by another set of experienced subject teachers from the Department
of Technical education for incorporation into the Curriculum C-23.

Finally, the draft curriculum was sent to academicians of higher-level institutions, industrial experts
and NITTTR (ECV) for wetting.

The design of new Curricula for the different diploma programmes has thus been finalised with the
active participation of the members of the faculty teaching in the Polytechnics of Andhra Pradesh,
and duly reviewed by Expert Committee constituted of academicians and representatives from
industries. Thus, the primary objective of the curriculum change is to produce employable diploma
holders in the country by correlating the growing needs of the industries with relevant academic
input.

The outcome-based approach as given by NBA guidelines has been followed throughout the
designing of this curriculum to meet the requirements of NBA Accreditation, too.

The revised New Curriculum i.e., Curriculum–2023 (C-23) is approved by Board of Governors of
SBTET for its implementation with effect from the academic year 2023-24.

2. HIGHLIGHTS OF CURRICULUM C-23:

1. Duration of course for regular Diploma is 3 years.

2. The Curriculum is prepared in Semester Pattern. However, First Year is maintained as Year-
wise pattern.
3. 6 Months Industrial training has been introduced for 3 years Diploma Courses in VI semester.
4. Updated subjects/topics relevant to the industry are introduced in all courses at appropriate
places.
5. The policy decisions taken at the State and Central level with regard to environmental science
are implemented by including relevant topics in Chemistry. This is also in accordance with the
Supreme Court guidelines issued in Sri Mehta’s case.
6. Keeping in view the increased need of communication skills which is playing a major role in
the success of Diploma Level students in the industries, emphasis is given for learning and
acquiring listening, speaking, reading and writing skills in English. Further as emphasized in
the meetings, Communication Skills lab and Life Skills lab are continuing for all the branches.
7. CAD specific to the branch has been given emphasis in the curriculum. Preparing drawings
using CAD software has been given more importance.
8. Upon reviewing the existing C-20 curriculum, it is found that the theory content is found to
have more weightage than the Practical content. In C-23 curriculum, more emphasis is given

3
 to the practical content in Laboratories and Workshops, thus strengthening the practical
skills. The ratio of Theory & Practicals is 50:50.
9. With increased emphasis for the student to acquire Practical skills, the course content in all
the subjects is thoroughly reviewed and structured as outcome based than the conventional
procedure based.
10. Curriculum of Laboratory and Workshops have been thoroughly revised based on the
suggestions received from the industry and faculty, for better utilization of the equipment
available in the Polytechnics. The experiments /exercises that are chosen for the practical
sessions are identified to confirm to the field requirements of industry.
11. The theory and practical subjects are restructured to find room for new theory and practical
subjects to meet the present the industrial needs.
12. As electric vehicles are the key technology to decarbonise road transport, it is important to
learn about EV Technology. Hence, to meet the need of present technology a new subject
titled “ELECTRIC VEHICLE TECHNOLOGY” is introduced in V semester.
13. A new laboratory titled “HYBRID POWER SYSTEMS LABORATORY” is introduced in IV
semester in which industrial visits are made compulsory to bridge the gap between classroom
learning and real-world circumstances and to aware the latest trends in industries which
facilitates the students for better understanding of power system concepts.
14. To make the students effective and efficient in all aspects, three periods per week are allotted
in every year/semester for STUDENT CENTRIC ACTIVITY in which student will be trained for
placements or make use of library or participate in sports & games/clean & green etc.

3. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

The Members of the working group are grateful to Smt C. Naga Rani I.A.S., Commissioner of
Technical Education & Chairman of SBTET, and Sri. Saurab Gaur,I.A.S, Principal Secretary, Skill
Development & Training for their guidance and valuable inputs during process of revising, modifying
and updating the Curriculum C-20 to Curriculum C-23.

It is pertinent to acknowledge the support of the following in the making of Curriculum C-23. A
series of workshops in different phases were conducted by SBTET, AP, Mangaglagiri involving faculty
from Polytechnics, Premier Engineering Colleges (List of Colleges) & Industries (List of Industries) to
analyse the Previous C-20 Curriculum and to design C-23 Curriculum is highly appreciated and
gratefully acknowledged.

The invaluable contribution of Sri K. Vijaya Bhaskar, Secretary, SBTET, Andhra Pradesh, Sri V. Padma
Rao, Joint Director of Technical Education, officials of Directorate of Technical Education and the
State Board of Technical Education, Andhra Pradesh and all teaching fraternity from the Polytechnics
who are directly or indirectly involved in preparation of the curriculum C-23 are much appreciable
and indebted.

4. RULES AND REGULATIONS OF C-23 CURRICULUM

4.1 Duration and pattern of the courses

4
All the Diploma programs run at various institutions are of AICTE approved 3 years or 3½ years
duration of academic instruction. All the Diploma courses are run on year wise pattern in the first
year, and the remaining two or two & half years are run in the semester pattern. In respect of few
courses like Diploma in Bio-Medical course, the training will be in the seventh semester. Run-
through system is adopted for all the Diploma Courses, subject to eligibility conditions.

4.2 Procedure for Admission into the Diploma Courses:

Selection of candidates is governed by the Rules and Regulations laid down in this regard from time
to time.

a. Candidates who wish to seek admission in any of the Diploma courses will have to
appear for the Common Entrance Test for admissions into Polytechnics (POLYCET)
conducted by the State Board of Technical Education and Training, Andhra Pradesh,
Mangalagiri. Only the candidates satisfying the following requirements will be
eligible to appear for the Common Entrance Test for admissions into Polytechnics
(POLYCET).
b. The candidates seeking admission should have appeared for S.S.C examination,
conducted by the Board of Secondary Education, Andhra Pradesh or equivalent
examination thereto, at the time of applying for the Common Entrance Test for
admissions into Polytechnics (POLYCET). In case of candidates whose results of their
Qualifying Examinations is pending, their selection shall be subject to production of
proof of their passing the qualifying examination in one attempt or compartmentally
at the time of admission.
c. Admissions are made based on the merit obtained in the Common Entrance Test
(POLYCET) and the reservation rules stipulated by the Government of Andhra
Pradesh from time to time.
d. For admission into the following Diploma Courses for which entry qualification is
10+2, candidates need not appear for POLYCET. A separate notification will be issued
for admission into these courses.
i) D.HMCT ii) D. Pharmacy

4.3 Medium of Instruction

The medium of instruction and examination shall be in English.

4.4 Permanent Identification Number (PIN)

A cumulative / academic record is to be maintained of the Marks secured in sessional work

and end examination of each year for determining the eligibility for promotion etc., A
Permanent Identification Number (PIN) will be allotted to each admitted candidate to
maintain academic records.

4.5 Number of Working Days per Semester / Year:

a) The Academic year for all the Courses shall be in accordance with the Academic
Calendar.
b) The Working days in a week shall be from Monday to Saturday

5
 c) There shall be 7 periods of 50 minutes duration each on all working days.
d) The minimum number of working days for each semester / year shall be 90 / 180
days excluding examination days. If this prescribed minimum is not achieved due to
any reason, special arrangements shall be made to conduct classes to complete the
syllabus.

6 Eligibility (Attendance to Appear for the End Examination)

a) A candidate shall be permitted to appear for the end examination in all subjects, if
he or she has attended a minimum of 75% of working days during the year/Semester.

b) Condonation of shortage of attendance in aggregate up to 10% (65% and above and

below 75%) in each semester or 1st year may be granted on medical grounds.

c) A stipulated fee shall be payable towards condonation for shortage of attendance.

d) Candidates having less than 65% attendance shall be detained.

e) Students whose shortage of attendance is not condoned in any semester / year and
not paid the condonation fee in time are not eligible to take their end examination of that
class and their admissions shall stand cancelled. They may seek re-admission for that
semester / year when offered in the next subsequent academic semester/year.

f) For INDUSTRIAL TRAINING:

i) During Industrial Training the candidate shall put in a minimum of 90% attendance.

ii) If the student fails to secure 90% attendance during industrial training, the student shall
reappear for 6 months industrial training at his own expenses.

4.7 Readmission
Readmission shall be granted to eligible candidates by the respective Principal/ Regional
Joint Director.

a) (i) Within 15 days after commencement of class work in any semester (Except Industrial
Training).

(ii) For Industrial Training: before commencement of the Industrial training.

b) Within 30 days after commencement of class work in any year (including D. Pharmacy
course or first year course in Engineering and Non-Engineering Diploma streams).
Otherwise, such cases shall not be considered for readmission for that semester / year
and are advised to seek readmission in the next subsequent eligible academic year.

c) The percentage of attendance of the readmitted candidates shall be calculated from the
first day of beginning of the regular class work for that year / Semester, as officially
announced by CTE/SBTET but not from the day on which he/she has actually reported
to the class work.

6
4.8 Scheme of Evaluation
a) First Year

Theory Courses:Each Course carries Maximum marks of 80 with examination of 3 hours

duration, along with internal assessment for Maximum of 20 marks. (Sessional marks).
However, there are no minimum marks prescribed for sessionals.

Laboratory Courses:There shall be 40 Marks for internal assessment i.e. sessional marks
for each practical Course with an end examination of 3 hours duration carrying 60
marks. However, there are no minimum marks prescribed for sessionals.

b) III, IV, V, VI and VII Semesters:

Theory Courses: End semester evaluation shall be of 3 hours duration and for a
maximum of 80 marks.

Laboratory Courses: Each Course carry 60/30 marks of 3 hours duration 40/20 sessional
marks.

4.9 Internal Assessment Scheme

a) Theory Courses: Internal assessment shall be conducted for awarding Sessional marks
on the dates specified. Three-unit tests shall be conducted for I year students and two
Unit Tests for semesters.

Internal Assessment shall be of 90 minutes duration and for a maximum of 40 marks for
each test.

S. Type of Assessment Weightage

No. Assigned

(i) Testing of knowledge through mid-examination for year/sem 40

as (Mid-1+Mid-2+Mid3) or (Mid-1 + Mid-2)

(ii) Assignments 05

(iii) Dynamic Learning activities : Project Work/ Seminar/Tech-

fest/Group Discussion, Quizzes etc./Extra-curricular
activities/NSS/NCC/ IPSGM/Cleaning & Greening of Campus 05
etc.

TOTAL 50

7
 At least one assignment should be completed for each unit which carries 10 marks. The total
assignment marks should be reduced to 5.

At least one dynamic learning activity is to be conducted which carries 10 marks. The total
marks should be reduced to 5.

The total 50 marks assigned to internal assignment is to be scaled down to 20 marks.

b) Practical Courses:

(i) Drawing Courses:

The award of Sessional marks for internal Assessment shall be as given in the following
table:

Distribution of Marks for the Internal Assessment Marks

First Year (Total:40 Marks) Semesters (Total:40 Marks)

Max:20 Marks Max:20 Marks Max:20 Marks Max:20 Marks

From the From the Average of From the Average From the Average of
Average of Assessment of Regular of TWO Unit Tests. Assessment of Regular
THREE Unit Class work Exercises. Class work Exercises.
Tests.

 For first year engineering drawing each unit test will be conducted for a duration of 2 hours
with maximum marks of 40.
 (Part - A : 4 questions x 5 marks = 20 Marks ; Part –B: 2 questions x 10 marks = 20 marks ).
 For the semester drawing examinations, Two Unit tests shall be conducted as per the Board
End Examination Question Paper Pattern.
 All Drawing exercises are to be filed in serial order and secured for further scrutiny by a
competent authority

(ii) Laboratory Courses:

(a) Student’s performance in Laboratories / Workshop shall be assessed during the year/
semester of study for 40 marks in each practical Course.
(b) Evaluation for Laboratory Courses, other than Drawing courses:

8
i. Instruction (teaching) in laboratory courses (except for the course on Drawing) here after shall
be task/competency based as delineated in the Laboratory sheets, prepared by SBTET, AP &
NITTTR- ECV and posted in SBTET website.
ii. Internal assessment for Laboratory shall be done on the basis of task/s performed by the
student as delineated in the laboratory sheets, prepared by SBTET, AP & NITTTR- ECV and
posted in AP, SBTET website.
iii. Question paper for End semester Evaluation shall also be task/s based and shall be prepared
and distributed by SBTET as done in case of theory courses be prepared as per SBTET rules in
vogue.
c) Internal assessment in Labs / workshops / Survey field work etc., during the course of study
shall be done and sessional marks shall be awarded by the concerned Teacher.

d) For practical examinations, except in drawing, there shall be two examiners.

External examiner shall be appointed by the Principal in consultation with respective Head of
Section, preferably choosing a qualified person from in the order of preference.

i) Nearby Industry

ii) Govt / Semi Govt organization like R & B, PWD, PR, Railways, BSNL, APSRTC, APSEB etc.

iii) Govt / University Engg College.

iv) HoDs from Govt. Polytechnic

Internal examiner shall be the person concerned with internal assessment as in (c) above. The
end examination shall be held along with all theory papers in respect of drawing.

e) Question Paper for Practicals: Question paper should cover ( the experiments / exercise
prescribed to test various) skills like handling, manipulating, testing, trouble shooting, repair,
assembling and dismantling etc., from more than one experiment / exercise

f) Records pertaining to internal assessment marks of both theory and practical Courses are to
be maintained for official inspection.

g) In case of Diploma programs having Industrial Training, Internal Assessment and Summative
Evaluation, shall be done as illustrated in the following table:

Upon
Assessment Max
completion By Based on
no Marks
of

Learning outcomes as given in

12 weeks the scheme of 120
1 1.The faculty assessment ,for Industrial
concerned (Guide) Training
22 weeks and 120

2. Training in charge

9
 2
(Mentor) of the
industry

1.The faculty 1.Demonstration of any one

member of the skills listed in learning
concerned, outcomes 30
3.Final
summative 24 week 2.HoD concerned
Evaluation and
2.Training Report 20
3.An external
examiner
3.Viva Voce 10

TOTAL 300

h) Each staff member including Head of Section shall be assigned a batch of students 10 to 15
for making assessment during industrial training.

GUIDELINES FOR INDUSTRIAL TRAINING OF DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

ENGINEERING PROGRAMME:

1. Duration of the training: 6 months (24 weeks).

2. Eligibility: As per SBTET norms
3. Training Area: Students can be trained in APGENCO/APTRANSCO/APDISCOM/Captive Power
plants/Wind power plants,/Solar power plants/Milk
factories/Railways/Roadways/Communication sectors/Television sectors/Public and private
Organizations or industries or companies etc., related to electrical & electronics fields.
4. The Industrial Training shall carry 300 marks and pass marks is 50% in assessment at industry
(first and second assessment put together) and also 50% in final summative assessment at
institution level.
5. Formative assessment at industry level shall be carried out by the representative of the
industry, where the student is undergoing training and the faculty from the concerned section
in the institution.
6. If the student fails to secure 50% marks in industrial assessments put together, the student
should reappear for 6 months industrial training at his/her own expenses.
7. If the student fails to secure 50% marks in final summative assessment at institution level, the
student should reappear for final summative assessment in the subsequent board

10
 examination.
8. Final Summative assessment at institution level is done by a committee including 1. Head of
the section (of concerned discipline ONLY), 2. External examiner from an industry and
3. Faculty member who assessed he student during industrial training as member.
9. During Industrial Training the candidate shall put a minimum of 90% attendance.
10. If the student fails to secure 90% attendance during industrial training, the student should
reappear for 6 months industrial training at his/her own expenses.

4.10 Minimum Pass Marks

a) Theory Examination:

For passing a theory Course, a candidate has to secure a minimum of 35% in end
examination and a combined minimum of 35% of both Sessional and end examination marks
put together.

b) Practical Examination:

For passing a practical Course, a candidate has to secure a minimum of 50% in end
examination and a combined minimum of 50% of both sessional and practical end
examination marks put together. In case of D.C.C.P., the pass mark for Typewriting and
Shorthand is 45% in the end examination. There are no sessional marks for typewriting and
Shorthand Coursesof D.C.C.P course.

C) Industrial Training:

I. Monitoring: Similar to project work each teacher may be assigned a batch of 10-15
students irrespective of the placement of the students to facilitate effective
monitoring of students learning during industrial training.
II. Assessment: The Industrial training shall carry 300 marks and pass marks is 50% in
assessments at industry (first and second assessment) and final summative
assessment at institution level put together i.e. 150 marks out of 300 marks. And
also student has to secure 50% marks in final summative assessment at institution
level.

4.11. Provision for Improvement

Improvement is allowed only after he / she has completed all the courses from First Year to
Final semester of the Diploma.
a) Improvement is allowed in any 4 (Four) Courses of the Diploma.
b) The student can avail of this improvement chance ONLY ONCE, that too within the
succeeding two examinations after the completion of Diploma. However, the duration
including Improvement examination shall not exceed FIVE years from the year of first
admission.

11
 c) No improvement is allowed in Practical / Lab Courses or Project work or Industrial Training
assessment. However, improvement in drawing Course(s) is allowed.
d) If improvement is not achieved, the marks obtained in the previous Examinations hold good.
e) Improvement is not allowed in respect of the candidates who are punished under Mal-
practice in any Examination.
f) Examination fee for improvement shall be paid as per the notification issued by State Board
of Technical Education and Training from time to time.
g) All the candidates who wish to appear for improvement of performance shall deposit the
original Marks Memos of all the years / Semesters and also original Diploma Certificate to
the Board. If there is improvement in performance of the current examination, the revised
Memorandum of marks and Original Diploma Certificate will be issued, else the submitted
originals will be returned.

4.12. Rules of Promotion From 1ST YEAR TO 3rd,4th,5th, 6th and 7th Semesters:

A) For Diploma Courses of 3 Years duration

i. A candidate shall be permitted to appear for first year examination provided he / she
puts in 75% attendance (which can be condoned on Medical grounds up to 10%) i.e.
attendance after condonation on Medical grounds should not be less than 65% and pay
the examination fee.

ii. A candidate shall be promoted to 3rd semester if he/she puts the required percentage
of attendance in the first year and pays the examination fee. A candidate who could not
pay the first year examination fee has to pay the promotion fee as prescribed by State
Board of Technical Education and Training, AP from time to time before
commencement of 3rd semester.

iii. A candidate shall be promoted to 4th semester provided he/she puts the required
percentage of attendance in the 3rd semester and pay the examination fee. A
candidate, who could not pay the 3rd semester exam fee, has to pay the promotion fee
as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training AP from time to time
before commencement of 4th semester.

A candidate is eligible to appear for the 4th semester examination if he/she

a) Puts the required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester

b) Should not have failed in more than four Courses in 1st year

For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry Students:

a) A candidate is eligible to appear for the 4 th semester examination if he/she puts the
required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester
b) A candidate is eligible to appear for the 4 th semester examination if he/she clears at
least two subjects in third semester.
iv) A candidate shall be promoted to 5 th semester provided he / she puts the required
percentage of attendance in the 4 th semester and pays the examination fee. A

12
 candidate, who could not pay the 4 th semester examination fee, has to pay the
promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training from
time to time before commencement of 5th semester.

A candidate is eligible to appear for the 5th semester examination if he/she

a) Puts the required percentage of attendance in the 5th semester

b) Should get eligibility to appear for 4th Semester examination.
The first backlog exam in 5 th semester will be conducted only in
instant/supplementary diploma examination.

For IVC& ITI Lateral Entry students:

a) Puts the required percentage of attendance in the 5th semester

v) A candidate shall be sent to Industrial training provided he/she puts in the required
percentage of attendance in the 4 th semester and pay the examination fee/ promotion
fee as prescribed by SBTET.

A candidate is eligible to appear for Industrial Training assessment (Seminar/Viva-voce)

a) Puts the required percentage of attendance, i.e., 90% in 6th semester Industrial
Training

For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:

a) Puts the required percentage of attendance, ie., 90% in 6 th semester Industrial

Training.
b) should get eligibility to appear for 5th Semester Examination.

B) For Diploma Courses of 3 ½ Years duration (MET/ CH/ CHPP/ CHPC/ CHOT/ TT ):

i. A candidate shall be permitted to appear for 1 st year examination provided he / she puts
in 75% attendance (which can be condoned on Medical grounds upto 10%) i.e.
attendance after condonation on Medical grounds should not be less than 65% and pay
the examination fee.
ii. A candidate shall be promoted to 3 rd semester if he/she puts the required percentage of
attendance in the 1st year and pays the examination fee. A candidate who could not pay
the 1st year examination fee has to pay the promotion fee as prescribed by State Board
of Technical Education and Training from time to time before commencement of 3 rd
semester.
iii. A candidate shall be promoted to 4 th semester provided he/she puts the required
percentage of attendance in the 3rd semester and pay the examination fee. A candidate,

13
 who could not pay the 3 rd semester exam fee, has to pay the promotion fee as
prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training from time to time before
commencement of 4th semester.
A candidate is eligible to appear for the 4th semester exam if he/she

a). Puts the required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester

b). Should not have failed in more than Four backlog Courses of 1st year.

For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:

a) Puts the required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester

iv. A candidate shall be promoted to 5th semester industrial training provided he / she puts
the required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester and pays the examination
fee. A candidate, who could not pay the 4th semester examination fee, has to pay the
promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training from
time to time before commencement of 5th semester.
v. Promotion from 5th to 6th semester is automatic (i.e., from 1st spell of Industrial
Training to 2nd spell) provided he/she puts the required percentage of attendance,
which in this case ie.,90 % of attendance and attends for the VIVA-VOCE examination at
the end of training.
vi. A candidate shall be promoted to 7th semester provided he / she puts the required
percentage of attendance in the 6th semester and pays the examination fee. A
candidate, who could not pay the 6th semester examination fee, has to pay the
promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training from
time to time before commencement of 7th semester.
vii. A candidate shall be promoted to 7th semester of the course provided he/she has
successfully completed both the spells of Industrial Training.

A candidate is eligible to appear for 7th semester examination if he/she

a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in the 7th semester

b) Should get eligibility to appear for 4th semester Examination.
For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:

a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in the 7th semester

b) Should not have failed more than four backlog Courses of 3rd Semester

C) For Diploma Courses of 3 ½ Years duration (BM):

The same rules which are applicable for conventional courses also apply for this course. The
industrial training in respect of this course is restricted to one semester (6 months) after the 6 th
semester (3 years) of the course.

14
 i. A candidate shall be permitted to appear for first year examination provided he /
she puts in 75% attendance (which can be condoned on Medical grounds upto 10%)
i.e. attendance after condonation on Medical grounds should not be less than 65%
and pay the examination fee.
ii. A candidate shall be promoted to 3rd semester if he/she puts the required
percentage of attendance in the first year and pays the examination fee. A
candidate who could not pay the first year examination fee has to pay the
promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training
from time to time before commencement of 3rd semester.
iii. A candidate shall be promoted to 4 th semester provided he/she puts the required
percentage of attendance in the 3 rd semester and pay the examination fee. A
candidate who could not pay the 3 rd semester examination fee, has to pay the
promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training
from time to time before commencement of 4th semester.
A candidate is eligible to appear for the 4th semester examination if he/she

a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester

b) Should not have failed in more than Four backlog Courses of 1st year

For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry Students:

A candidate is eligible to appear for the 4 th semester examination if he/she puts the
required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester

iv. A candidate shall be promoted to 5 th semester provided he / she puts the required
percentage of attendance in the 4 th semester and pays the examination fee. A
candidate, who could not pay the 4 th semester examination fee, has to pay the
promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training
from time to time before commencement of 5th semester.
A candidate is eligible to appear for the 5th semester exam if he/she

a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in the 5 th semester.

b) Should get eligibility to appear for 4th Semester examination.

For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:

a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in the 5th semester.

b) Should not have failed in more than Four backlog Courses of 3rd Semester.
v. A candidate shall be promoted to 6 th semester provided he/she puts in the required
percentage of attendance in the 5th semester and pays the examination fee.
A candidate who could not pay the 5 th semester examination fee, has to pay the
promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training
from time to time before commencement of 6th semester.

A candidate is eligible to appear for 6th semester examination

a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in 6th semester and

15
 b) should get eligibility to appear for 4th Semester Examination.

For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:

a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in 6th semester.

b) Should get eligibility to appear for 5th Semester Examination.
vi. A candidate shall be promoted to 7th semester provided he/she puts in the required
percentage of attendance in 6th semester and pay the examination fee. A candidate,
who could not pay the 6th semester examination fee, has to pay the promotion fee
prescribed by SBTET from time to time before commencement of the 7th semester
(Industrial Training).
A candidate is eligible to appear for 7th semester Industrial Training assessment
(Seminar/Viva-voce) if he/she --

a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance, ie., 90% in 7th semester

Industrial Training
b) Should get eligibility to appear for 4th Semester Examination.
For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:

Puts in the required percentage of attendance, ie., 90% in 7 th semester Industrial

a)
Training.
b) Should get eligibility to appear for 5th Semester Examination.
Important Note:

Seminar/Viva-voce should not be conducted for Not-Eligible Candidates, till the candidate
gets eligibility. However, the record of internal Assessment for Industrial Training for 260
marks shall be maintained at Institution Level for all candidates and the data is to be
uploaded only for eligible candidates. For not eligible candidates the data is to be uploaded
as and when the candidate gets eligibility.

Other Details

a) In case a candidate does not successfully complete the Industrial training, he / she
will have to repeat the training at his / her own cost.

b) The First spell of Industrial training shall commence 10 days after the completion of
the last theory examination of 4th Semester.

c) The Second spell of Industrial training shall commence within 10 days after the
completion of first spell of Industrial training.

4.13. Students Performance Evaluation

Successful candidates shall be awarded the Diploma under the following divisions of pass.

16
 a) First Class with Distinction shall be awarded to the candidates who secure an overall
aggregate of 75% marks and above.
b) First Class shall be awarded to candidates who secure overall aggregate of 60% marks and
above and below 75% marks.
c) Second Class shall be awarded to candidates who secure a pass with an overall aggregate of
below 60% and above 50% of marks.
i. The Weightage of marks for various year/Semesters which are taken for computing
overall aggregate shall be 25% of I year marks + 100% of 3 rd and subsequent
Semesters.
ii. In respect IVC & ITI Lateral Entry candidates who are admitted directly into diploma
course at the 3rd semester (i.e., second year) level the aggregate of (100%) marks
secured at the 3rd and subsequent semesters of study shall be taken into
consideration for determining the overall percentage of marks secured by the
candidates for award of class/division.
d) Second Class shall be awarded to all students, who fail to complete the Diploma in the
regular 3 years/ 3 ½ years and four subsequent examinations, from the year of first
admission.

14. EXAMINATION FEE SCHEDULE:

The examination fee should be as per the notification issued by State Board of Technical
Education and Training, AP from time to time.

15. Structure of Examination Question Paper:

I. Formative assessment (Internal examination)

a) For theory Courses:

Three unit tests for first year and two unit tests for semesters shall be conducted with a
duration of 90 minutes for each test for maximum marks of 40. It consists of part A and
Part B.

Part A contains five questions and carries 16 marks. Among these five questions first
question consists of four objective items like one word or phrase answer/filling-in the
blanks/true or false etc with one mark for each question. The other four questions are
short answer questions and carry three marks each.

Part B carries 24 marks and consists of three questions with internal choice i.e., Either/Or
type, and each question carries 8 marks.

The sum of marks of 3 tests for I year and 2 tests for semesters shall be reduced to 20
marks in each Course for arriving at final sessional marks.

b) For drawing Courses:

For I year:

17
 Three-unit tests with duration of 90 minutes and for maximum marks of 40 marks shall be
conducted for first year. It consists of part A and Part B.

Part A consists four questions for maximum marks of 16 and each question carries four
marks (4×4 marks=16 marks).

Part B carries maximum marks of 24 and consists of five questions while the student shall
answer any three questions out of these five questions. Each question in this part carries
a maximum mark of 8, (3×8 marks=24 marks).

The sum of marks obtained in 3-unit test marks shall be reduced to 20 marks for arriving
at final sessional marks. Remaining 20 marks are awarded by the Course teacher based
on the student’s performance during regular class exercise.

For semester:

Two-unit tests with duration of 90 minutes and for maximum marks of 40 marks shall be
conducted for EE-406. It consists of part A and Part B.

Part A consists two questions for maximum marks of 20 and each question carries ten
marks (2×10 marks=20 marks).

Part B carries maximum marks of 20 and consists of two questions while the student shall
answer any one questions out of these two questions. Each question in this part carries a
maximum mark of 20, (1×20 marks=20 marks).

The sum of marks obtained in 2-unit tests marks shall be reduced to 20 marks for arriving
at final sessional marks. Remaining 20 marks are awarded by the Course teacher based
on the student’s performance during regular class exercise.

c) For Laboratory /workshop: 50% of total marks for the Course shall be awarded based on
continuous assessment of the student in laboratory/workshop classes and the remaining
50% shall be based on the sum of the marks obtained by the students in two tests.

II. Summative assessment (End examination)

The question paper for theory examination is patterned in such a manner that the
Weightage of periods/marks allotted for each of the topics for a particular Course be
considered. End Examination paper is of 3 hours duration.

a) Each theory paper consists of Section ‘A’ and ‘B’ .

Section ‘A’ with Max marks of 30, contains 10 short answer questions. All questions are
to be answered and each carries 3 marks, i.e., 10 x 3 = 30.

Section ‘B’ with Max marks of 50 contains 8 essay type questions. Only 5 questions are
to be answered and each carries 10 marks. Max. Marks: 5 x 10 = 50.

Thus the total marks for theory examination shall be: 80.

b) For Engineering Drawing Course (107) consist of section ‘A’ and section ‘B’.

18
 Section ‘A’ with max marks of 20, contains four (4) questions. All questions in section
‘A’ are to be answered to the scale and each carries 5 marks, ie. 4 x 5=20.

Section ‘B’ with max marks of 40, contains six (6) questions. The student shall answer
any four (4) questions out of the above six questions and each question carries 10
Marks, i.e., 4 x 10 = 40.

For engineering drawing course (EE-406) consists of Section A and B.

Section ‘A’ with max marks of 20, contains four (4) questions. All questions in section
‘A’ are to be answered to the scale and each carries 5 marks, ie. 4 x 5=20.

Section ‘B’ with max marks of 40, contains three (3) questions. The student shall
answer any two (2) questions out of the above three questions and each question
carries 20 Marks, i.e., 2 x 20 = 40.

c) Practical Examinations
For Workshop practice and Laboratory Examinations, Each student has to pick up a
question paper distributed by Lottery System.

Max. Marks for an experiment / exercise : 50

Max. Marks for VIVA-VOCE : 10
Total Max. Marks : 60
In case of practical examinations with 50 marks, the marks shall be distributed as

Max. Marks for an experiment / exercise : 25

Max. Marks for VIVA-VOCE : 05
Total Max. Marks : 30
In case of any change in the pattern of question paper, the same shall be informed
sufficiently in advance to the candidates.

d) Note: Evaluation for Laboratory Courses, other than Drawing courses:

I. Instruction (teaching) in laboratory courses (except for the course on Drawing)

hereafter shall be task/competency based as delineated in the Laboratory
sheets, prepared by SBTET, AP and posted in its website.
II. Internal assessment for Laboratory shall be done on basis of task/s performed
by the student as delineated in the laboratory sheets, prepared by SBTET, AP
and posted in its website.
III. Question paper for End semester Evaluation shall be prepared as per SBTET
rules in vogue.

16. ISSUE OF MEMORONDUM OF MARKS

19
 All candidates who appear for the end examination will be issued memorandum of marks
without any payment of fee. However candidates who lose the original memorandum of
marks have to pay the prescribed fee to the Secretary, State Board of Technical Education
and Training, A.P. for each duplicate memo from time to time.

17. MAXIMUM PERIOD FOR COMPLETION OF DIPLOMA Programmes:

Maximum period for completion of the diploma courses is twice the duration of the course
from the date of First admission (includes the period of detention and discontinuation of
studies by student etc) failing which they will have to forfeit the claim for qualifying for the
award of Diploma (They will not be permitted to appear for examinations after that date).
This rule applies for all Diploma courses of 3 years and 3 ½ years of engineering and non-
engineering courses.

18. ELIGIBILITY FOR AWARD OF DIPLOMA

A candidate is eligible for award of Diploma Certificate if he / she fulfil the following
academic regulations.
i. He / She pursued a course of study for not less than 3 / 3 ½ academic years & not more
than 6 / 7 academic years.

ii. He / she has completed all the Courses.

Students who fail to fulfil all the academic requirements for the award of the Diploma
within 6 / 7 academic years from the year of admission shall forfeit their seat in the
course & their seat shall stand cancelled.

For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:

i. He / She pursued a course of study for not less than 2 / 2 ½ academic years & not more
than 4 / 5 academic years.

ii. He / she has completed all the Courses.

Students who fail to fulfil all the academic requirements for the award of the Diploma
within 4 / 5 academic years from the year of admission shall forfeit their seat in the
course & their seat shall stand cancelled.

19. ISSUE OF PHOTO COPY OF VALUED ANSWER SCRIPT, RECOUNTING& REVERIFICATION:

A) FOR ISSUE OF PHOTO COPIES OF VALUED ANSWER SCRIPTS

I. A candidate desirous of applying for Photo copy of valued answer script/s should
apply within prescribed date from the date of the declaration of the result.
II. Photo copies of valued answer scripts will be issued to all theory Courses and
Drawing Course(s).
III. The Photo copy of valued answer script will be dispatched to the concerned
candidate’s address as mentioned in the application form by post.
IV. No application can be entertained from third parties.

20
 B) FOR RE-COUNTING(RC) and RE-VERIFICATION(RV) OF THE VALUED ANSWER SCRIPT
i. A candidate desirous of applying for Re-verification of valued answer script should
apply within prescribed date from the date of the declaration of the result.
ii. Re-verification of valued answer script shall be done for all theory Courses and
Drawing Course(s).
iii. The Re-verification committee constituted by the Secretary, SBTETAP with Course
experts shall re-verify the answer scripts.
I. RE-COUNTING
The Officer of SBTET will verify the marks posted and recount them in the
already valued answer script. The variations if any will be recorded separately,
without making any changes on the already valued answer script. The marks
awarded in the original answer script are maintained (hidden).

II. RE-VERIFICATION
(i) The Committee has to verify the intactness and genuineness of the answer script(s)
placed for Re-verification.
(ii) Initially single member shall carry out the re-verification.
(iii) On re-verification by single member, if the variation is less than 12% of maximum
marks, and if there is no change in the STATUS in the result of the candidate, such
cases will not be referred to the next level ie., for 2-Tier evaluation.
(iv) On re-verification by a single member, if the variation is more than 12% of maximum
marks, it will be referred to 2-Tier evaluation.
(v) If the 2-Tier evaluation confirms variation in marks as more than 12% of maximum
marks, the variation is considered as follows:
a) If the candidate has already passed and obtains more than 12% of the
maximum marks on Re-verification, then the variation is considered.
b) If the candidate is failed and obtains more than 12% of the maximum marks on
Re-verification and secured pass marks on re-verification, then the status of the
candidate changes to PASS.
c) If a candidate is failed and obtains more than 12% of the maximum marks on
Re-verification and if the marks secured on re-verification are still less than the
minimum pass marks, the status of the candidate remain FAIL only.
(vii) After Re-verification of valued answer script the same or change if any therein on
Re-verification, will be communicated to the candidate.
(viii) On Re-verification of Valued Answer Script if the candidate’s marks are revised,
the fee paid by the candidate will be refunded or else the candidate has to forfeit
the fee amount.
Note: No request for Photo copies/ Recounting /Re-verification of valued answer script
would be entertained from a candidate who is reported to have resorted to
Malpractice in that examination.

IV.20. Mal Practice Cases:

If any candidate resorts to Mal Practice during examinations, he / she shall be booked and
the Punishment shall be awarded as per SBTETAP rules and regulations in vogue.

21
4.21. Discrepancies/ Pleas:

Any Discrepancy /Plea regarding results etc., shall be represented to the SBTETAP within one
month from the date of issue of results. Thereafter, no such cases shall be entertained in any
manner.

4.22. Issue of Duplicate Diploma

If a candidate loses his/her original Diploma Certificate and desires a duplicate to be issued
he/she should produce written evidence to this effect. He / she may obtain a duplicate from
the Secretary, State Board of Technical Education and Training, A.P., on payment of
prescribed fee and on production of an affidavit signed before a First Class Magistrate
(Judicial) and non-traceablecertificate from the Department of Police. In case of damage of
original Diploma Certificate, he / she may obtain a duplicate certificate by surrendering the
original damaged certificate on payment of prescribed fee to the State Board of Technical
Education and Training, A.P.

In case the candidate cannot collect the original Diploma within 1 year from the date of issue
of the certificate, the candidate has to pay the penalty prescribed by the SBTET AP from time
to time.

4.23. Issue of Migration Certificate and Transcripts:

The Board on payment of prescribed fee will issue these certificates for the candidates who
intend to prosecute Higher Studies in India or Abroad.

24.SPECIFIC CHANGES INCORPORATED IN PRESENT CURRICULUM C-23

ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING BRANCH:

a) The number of theory subjects in each semester is limited to 05 only by restructuring the

related subjects/topics and deleting repeated/higher order topics. Similarly, the relevant
laboratories are restructured to find room for new laboratories.
b) The duration of engineering drawing is made 03 periods by reducing the syllabus which
is not necessary for Electrical & Electronics Engineering students.
c) To boost the technical knowledge for better understanding of theory concepts the ratio
of Theory & Practical is made 50:50 in this C-23 curriculum.
d) The Electrical Engineering Drawing I & II are restructured and made into one single
electrical drawing subject by deleting the topics which cover in theory subjects to find
space for introducing new laboratories.
e) A new laboratory EE-410 is introduced in IV semester titled with HYBRID POWER SYSTEM
LABORATORY in which power systems practicals are introduced.
f) Industrial visits play a key role for technical students which help to bridge the gap
between classroom learning and real-world job circumstances. Keeping this in view, the
industrial visits are made compulsory in EE-410, HYBRID POWER SYSTEM LABORATORY
and proper weightage is given for industrial visits.
g) A new theory subject titled ELECTRIC VEHICLE TECHNOLOGY, EE-502 is introduced in V
semester in which EV technology and battery technology topics are introduced to meet
the present industrial needs.

22
 h) MATLAB practicals are introduced in MATLAB PRACTICE LABORATORY, EE-506 in V
semester in which simulation practicals are incorporated.
i) SCADA practicals have been incorporated in PLC & SCADA laboratory, EE-507 in V
semester to throw light on importance of SCADA in power system.

NOTE: REQUIRED SERVICES OF FACULTY FROM OTHER DISCIPLINES:

1. A faculty of Electronics & Communication Engineering shall invariably handle the

following courses for the best benefit of the students.

I. EE-304 – Electronics Engineering

II. EE-309 – Electronics Engineering Laboratory
III. EE-504 – Digital Electronics & Micro Controllers
IV. EE-509 – Digital Electronics & Micro Controllers Laboratory
2. A faculty of Mechanical Engineering shall invariably handle the following course for
the best benefit of the students.

I. EE-405 – General Mechanical Engineering

3. A faculty of Computer Engineering shall invariably handle the following course for the
best benefit of the students.

I. EE-305 – Programming in C
II. EE-310 – Programming in C Laboratory

4.The faculty of EEE to be trained in the fields of newly added topics such as SCADA, CAD, PLC
and MATLAB etc., in order to enable them to perform effectively.

4.25. General

i. The Board may change or amend the academic rules and regulations or syllabi at any time
and the changes or amendments made shall be applicable to all the students, for whom it
is intended, with effect from the dates notified by the competent authority.
ii. All legal matters pertaining to the State Board of Technical Education and Training, AP are
within the jurisdiction of Mangalagiri.
iii. In case of any ambiguity in the interpretation of the above rules, the decision of the
Secretary, SBTET, A.P., Mangalagiri is final.
--:o0o:--

23
 C-23 Curriculum for DEEE

With Industrial training (In-house) in Semester VI

VISION

To develop Electrical & Electronics Engineering professionals competent to face the global
challenges in a Edifying environment conducive to learn technical knowledge, skills blended with
ethics and values, to Coordinate and serve to the society for betterment and comfortable living.

MISSION

M1 To provide a competitive learning environment, through a need based curriculum designed

in collaboration with industry, conducive for high quality education emphasising on transfer
of knowledge and skill development essential for the profession and the society as well.

M2 To nurture higher order leadership qualities and ethics and values in students to enable
them to be leaders in their chosen professions while maintaining the highest level of ethics.

M3 To encourage the spirit of inquisition to promote innovation and entrepreneurship

strengthened with life skills to sustain the stress.

M4 To foster effective interactions and networking with all the stake holders so as to work
towards the growth and sustainability of the society and environment.

Programme Educational Objectives (PEOs)

On completion of the Diploma Electrical & Electronics Engineering programme, the students
should have acquired the following characteristics

PEO1 An ability to apply knowledge of mathematics, Science , engineering and management

principles in solving problems in the field of Electrical and Electronics Engineering.

PEO2 To be life-long learners with sprit of enquiry and zeal to acquire new knowledge and skills
so as to remain contemporary and posses required professional skills.

PEO3 To enhance entrepreneurial, communication and other soft skills, which will enable them
to work globally as leaders, team members and contribute to nation building for the

24
 betterment of the society.

PEO4 To make them strongly committed to the highest levels of professional ethics and focus
on ensuring quality, adherence to public policy and law, safety, reliability and
environmental sustainability in all their professional activities

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES(POs)

1. Basic and discipline specific knowledge: Apply knowledge of basic mathematics, science
and engineering fundamentals and engineering specialization to solve the engineering
problems.
2. Problem analysis: Identify and analyse well-defined engineering problems using
standard methods
3. Design/Development of solutions: Design solutions for well-defined technical problems
and assist with the design of systems components or processes to meet specified needs
4. Engineering tools, Experimentation and Testing: Apply modern engineering tools and
appropriate technique to conduct standard tests and measurements.
5. Engineering practices for society, sustainability and environment: Apply appropriate
technology in context of society, sustainability, environment and ethical practices.
6. Project Management: Use engineering management principles individually, as a team
member or a leader to manage projects and effectively communicate about well defined
engineering activities.
7. Life-Long learning: Ability to analyse individual needs and engaging updating in the
context of technological changes.

PROGRAMME SPECIFIC OUTCOMES (PSOs)

1. An ability to understand the basic concepts of Electrical & Electronics Engineering and to
apply them to various areas like Wiring Installations, Lighting Schemes , Static & Rotating
machinery, drawing layouts , Power System ( Generation, Transmission, Distribution&
utilisation), Digital electronics, power control devices, Computer programming ,managerial
skills and the use SMART technologies .

2. An ability to Repair, develop and trouble shooting of Various Electrical & Electronics
equipment’s by using suitable tools and techniques, to design Customized applications in
Electrical & Electronics Engineering at economic and efficient considerations, to develop
software & hardware solutions.

3. Wisdom of social and environmental awareness along with ethical responsibility to have a
successful career and to sustain passion and zeal in the field of Electrical & Electronics
Engineering for real-world applications in the field of Electronics using optimal resources as
an Entrepreneur.

25
 DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATIONS
(FIRST YEAR)

Instruction
Total Scheme of Examination
period /week
Perio
Subject End
Name of the Subject Practical/ d Duration Sessional Total
Code Theory Exam
Tutorial /year (hours) Marks Marks
Marks

THEORY
EE-101 English 3 - 90 3 20 80 100

Engineering
EE-102 5 - 150 3 20 80 100
Mathematics - I

EE-103 EngineeringPhysics 3 - 90 3 20 80 100

Engineering chemistry
EE-104 & Environmental 3 - 90 3 20 80 100
studies

Electrical Engineering
EE-105 4 120 3 20 80 100
Material Science -

Basic Electrical
EE-106 6 - 180 3 20 80 100
Technology

PRACTICAL
EE-107 EngineeringDrawing -. 3 90 3 40 60 100

ElectricalWiring
EE-108 - 6 180 3 40 60 100
Laboratory

Physics Laboratory
EE-109 - 1.5 45 1½ 20 30 50
Practice

Chemistry Laboratory
EE-110 - 1.5 45 1½ 20 30 50
Practice

26
 Comp. Fundamentals
EE-111 - 3 90 3 40 60 100
Laboratory

TOTAL 24 15 1170 30 280 720 1000

NOTE:03 periods per week are allotted to Student Centric Activity (Library, Sports& Games, Clean & Green,
Preparation for placements etc)

DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING

SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATIONS
(III SEMESTER)

Instruction
Scheme of Examination
period /week Total
Subject Period
Name of the Subject End
Code Practical/ /year Duration Sessiona Total
Theory Exam
Tutorial (hours) l Marks Marks
Marks

THEORY
Engineering
EE-301 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
Mathematics - II

EE-302 Electrical Machines- I 5 - 75 3 20 80 100

A.C. Circuits &

EE-303 6 - 90 3 20 80 100
Transformers

Electronics
EE-304 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
Engineering

EE-305 Programming in ‘’C’’ 5 _ 75 3 20 80 100

PRACTICAL
Electrical CAD
EE-306 - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Laboratory

Electrical Machines – I
EE-307 - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Laboratory

Circuits&Transformers
EE-308 - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Laboratory

Electronics
EE-309 Engineering - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Laboratory

Programming in ‘’C’’
EE-310 - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Laboratory

27
 TOTAL 24 15 585 30 300 700 1000

NOTE:03 periods per weekare allotted to Student Centric Activity (Library, Sports& Games, Clean & Green,
Preparation for placements etc)

DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING

SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATIONS
(IV SEMESTER)

Instruction
Scheme of Examination
period /week Total
Subject Period
Name of the Subject End
Code Practical/ /year Duration Sessional Total
Theory Exam
Tutorial (hours) Marks Marks
Marks

THEORY
Electrical Installation
EE-401 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
& Estimation

Electrical Machines-
EE-402 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
II

EE-403 Power Systems – I 4 - 60 3 20 80 100

Power Electronics &

EE-404 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
PLC

General Mechanical
EE-405 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
Engineering

PRACTICAL
Electrical
EE-406 - 6 90 3 40 60 100
EngineeringDrawing

Electrical Machines-
EE-407 - 3 45 3 40 60 100
II Laboratory

Communications
EE-408 - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Skills Laboratory

Power Electronics
EE-409 - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Laboratory

Hybrid Power
EE-410 - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Systems Laboratory

28
 TOTAL 21 18 585 30 300 700 1000

NOTE:03 periods per weekare allotted to Student Centric Activity (Library, Sports& Games, Clean & Green,
Preparation for placements etc)

DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING

SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATIONS
(V SEMESTER)

Instruction
Scheme of Examination
period /week Total
Subject Name of the Period
End
Code Subject Practical/ /year Duration Sessiona Total
Theory Exam
Tutorial (hours) l Marks Marks
Marks

THEORY
Industrial
Management
EE 501 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
&Smart
Technologies

Electric Vehicle
EE-502 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
Technology

EE-503 Power Systems - II 5 - 75 3 20 80 100

Digital Electronics &

EE-504 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
Micro Controllers

Electrical Utilisation
EE-505 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
& Traction

PRACTICAL
MATLAB Practice
EE-506 -
Laboratory 3 45 3 40 60 100

PLC & SCADA

EE-507 - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Laboratory

EE-508 Life Skills - 3 45 3 40 60 100

EE-509 Digital Electronics & - 3 45 3 40 60 100

Micro Controllers

29
 Laboratory

EE-510 Project Work - 3 45 3 40 60 100

TOTAL 24 15 585 30 300 700 1000

NOTE:03 periods per weekare allotted to Student Centric Activity (Library, Sports& Games, Clean & Green,
Preparation for placements etc)

DIPLOMA IN ELECTRIAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING

SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATIONS
VI SEMESTER
INDUSTRIAL TRAINING
Scheme of evaluation Remarks
SI. Course
Duration Max.
No. Title Item Nature
Marks

1 Industrial 6 1.First Assessment of

Training Assessment Learning
months outcomes by
at training
place/ both the
120 Pass marks is
Industry faculty and
training 50% in
(After 12 Mentor of the assessment at
Weeks) industry training
place/industry
Assessment of (first and
2.Second Learning second
Assessment outcomes by assessment
at training both the put together)
120
place/Industr faculty and
y (After 20 training
weeks) Mentor of the
industry

Final Training Report 20 Pass marks is

Summative 50% in final
assessment Demonstration 30 summative
at institution of any one of assessment
level after the skills listed
completion in learning
outcomes

30
 Viva Voce 10
of training.

TOTAL MARKS 300

31
FIRST YEAR

32
 DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATIONS
Instruction
Scheme of Examination
(FIRST period /week Total
YEAR) Perio End
Subject Name of the Subject Practical/ d Duration Sessional Exa Total
Code Theory /year
Tutorial (hours) Marks m Marks
Marks

THEORY
EE-101 English 3 - 90 3 20 80 100

Engineering
EE-102 5 - 150 3 20 80 100
Mathematics - I

EE-103 EngineeringPhysics 3 - 90 3 20 80 100

Engineering chemistry
EE-104 & Environmental 3 - 90 3 20 80 100
studies

Electrical Engineering
EE-105 4 120 3 20 80 100
Material Science -

Basic Electrical
EE-106 6 - 180 3 20 80 100
Technology

PRACTICAL
EE-107 EngineeringDrawing -. 3 90 3 40 60 100

ElectricalWiring
EE-108 - 6 180 3 40 60 100
Laboratory

Physics Laboratory
EE-109 - 1.5 45 1½ 20 30 50
Practice

Chemistry Laboratory
EE-110 - 1.5 45 1½ 20 30 50
Practice

Comp. Fundamentals
EE-111 - 3 90 3 40 60 100
Laboratory

TOTAL 24 15 1170 30 280 720 1000

NOTE:03 periods per weekare allotted to Student Centric Activity (Library, Sports& Games, Clean & Green,
Preparation for placements etc)

33
 ENGLISH
(COMMON)

No. of
Course Total No. of Marks Marks for
Course Code Periods/Wee
Title Periods for FA SA
k

EE-101 ENGLISH 3 90 20 80

No of COs Mapped
S. No. Unit Title Periods

1 English for Employability 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4,CO5

2 Living in Harmony 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4,CO5

3 Connect with Care 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4,CO5

4 Humour for Happiness 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5

5 Never Ever Give Up! 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5

6 Preserve or Perish 9 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5

7 The Rainbow of Diversity 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5

8 New Challenges- Newer Ideas 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5

9 The End Point First! 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5

10 The Equal Halves 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5

11 Dealing with Disaster 9 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5

Total Periods 90

- To improve grammatical knowledge and enrich vocabulary.

- To develop effective reading, writing and speaking skills.

Course Objectives
- To comprehend themes related to Personality, Society,
Environment to exhibit Universal Human Values.

34
 CO No. Course Outcomes

Apply and use various grammatical rules and concepts to communicate in

CO1
academic, professional and everyday situations

CO2 Use appropriate vocabulary in various contexts.

Read and comprehend different forms of academic, professional and everyday

CO3
texts.

Communicate effectively in speaking and writing in academic, professional and

CO4
everyday situations.
Display human values by applying the knowledge of themes related to Self,
CO5 Society, Science and Environment for holistic and harmonious living through
communication.

CO-PO Matrix

Course Code Course Title: English No. of Periods:

90
Common-101 Number of Course Outcomes: 4

POs Mapped CO Periods Addressing PO in Level of Remarks

with CO Column 1 Mapping
No.
Number Percentage (1,2,3)

PO1

PO2 Not directly Applicable for English course, however activities

that use content from science and technology relevant to the
PO3 Programme taken up by the student shall be exploited for
communication in the Course.
PO4

PO5 CO5 16 18% >50%: Level 3

PO6 CO1, CO2, 52 58% 21-50%: Level 2

CO3, CO4,
Up to 20%:
PO7 CO1, CO2, 22 24% Level 1
CO3,
CO4,CO5

35
Level 3 – Strongly Mapped, Level 2- Moderately Mapped; Level 1- Slightly Mapped
Learning Outcomes

1. English for Employability

1.1. Perceive the need for improving communication in English for employability
1.2. Use adjectives and articles effectively while speaking and in writing
1.3. Write simple sentences

2. Living in Harmony
2.1. Develop positive self-esteem for harmonious relationships
2.2. Use affixation to form new words
2.3. Use prepositions and use a few phrasal verbs contextually

3. Connect with Care

3.1. Use social media with discretion
3.2. Speak about abilities and possibilities
3.3. Make requests and express obligations
3.4. Use modal verbs and main verbs in appropriate form
3.5. Write short dialogues for everyday situations

4. Humour for Happiness

4.1. Realize the importance of humour for a healthy living
4.2. Improve vocabulary related to the theme
4.3. Acquire reading and speaking skills
4.4. Frame sentences with proper Subject – Verb agreement
4.5. Understand the features of a good paragraph and learn how to gather ideas as a preliminary step
for writing a good paragraph.

5. Never Ever Give Up!

5.1. Learn to deal with failures in life
5.2. Use the present tense form for various every day communicative functions such as speaking and
writing about routines, professions, scientific descriptions and sports commentary
5.3. Write paragraphs with coherence and other necessary skills
6. Preserve or Perish
6.1. Understand the ecological challenges that we face today and act to save the environment.
6.2. Narrate / Report past events
6.3. Develop vocabulary related to environment
6.4. Write e-mails

7. The Rainbow of Diversity

7.1. Appraise and value other cultures for a happy living in multi-cultural workspace
7.2. Understand the usage of different types of sentences
7.3. Ask for or give directions, information, instructions
7.4. Use language to express emotions in various situations
7.5. Write letters in various real life situations

8. New Challenges – Newer Ideas

8.1. Understand the functional difference between Active Voice and Passive Voice

36
8.2. Use Passive Voice to speak and write in various contexts
8.3. Understand the major parts and salient features of an essay
8.4. Learn about latest innovations and get motivated

9. The End Point First!

9.1. Understand the importance of setting a goal in life
9.2. Report about what others have said both in speaking and writing
9.3. Write an essay following the structure in a cohesive and comprehensive manner
9.4. Apply the words related to Goal Setting in conversations and in life

10. The Equal Halves

10.1. Value the other genders and develop a gender-balanced view towards life
10.2. Identify the use of different conjunctions in synthesising sentences
10.3. Write various types of sentences to compare and contrast the ideas
10.4. Apply the knowledge of sentence synthesis in revising and rewriting short essays
10.5. Develop discourses in speech and writing

11. Dealing with Disasters

11.1. Speak and write about different kinds of disasters and the concept of disaster management
11.2. Generate vocabulary relevant to disaster management and use it in sentences
11.3. Analyze an error in a sentence and correct it
11.4. Learn and write different kinds of reports

Textbook: ‘INTERACT’ (A Text book of English for I Year Engineering Diploma Courses) - by SBTET, AP
Reference Books:
Martin Hewings : Advanced Grammar in Use, Cambridge University Press
Murphy, Raymond : English Grammar in Use,Cambridge University Press
Sidney Greenbaum : Oxford English Grammar, Oxford University Press
Wren and Martin (Revised by N.D.V. Prasad Rao) : English Grammar and Composition, Blackie ELT
Books, S. Chand and Co.
Sarah Freeman : Strengthen Your Writing, Macmillan
___________________
End Exam = 80 Marks
PART-A: 10 Questions 3 marks each =30 Marks
PART-B: 5 out of 8 are to be answered : 10 marks each =50 Marks

Unit Tests 1,2,3 @ 40 Marks each

Part A: 16 marks: One question for 4 marks + 4 questions for 3 marks each ( 4+12 Marks=16 Marks)
Part B: 24 marks: 3 questions for 8 marks each with internal choice. ( 3X8 Marks= 24 Marks)

37
 Weightage Table : C23-COMMON-101: English
S. Name of Periods Weighta Weighta Marks Wise Distribution CO's
No the Unit Allocat ge of ge of Weightage ( Short Mapped
. ed Marks (Long answer questions)
(Total Allocate answer @3 Marks
90 d question R U Ap An
periods ( Short + s)
) Long @10
Answer Marks
question
)
1 English for 8 2 CO1,CO2,
Employabi 3+ 3 CO3, CO4,
lity 3 CO5
2 Living in 8 CO1, CO2,
Harmony CO3, CO4,
20+9 CO5
3 Connect 8 3 CO1, CO2,
with Care CO3, CO4,
CO5
4 Humour 8 2 CO1, CO2,
for CO3, CO4,
Happiness CO5
5 Never 8 3 CO1, CO2,
Ever Give CO3, CO4,
Up! 20+9 CO5
6 Preserve 9 CO1, CO2,
or Perish CO3, CO4,
CO5
7 The 8 3 CO1, CO2,
Rainbow CO3, CO4,
of CO5
Diversity
8 New 8 1 3 CO1, CO2,
Challenge 10+3 CO3, CO4,
s -Newer CO5
Ideas
9 The End 8 1 3 CO1, CO2,
Point CO3, CO4,
First! 10+3 CO5
10 The Equal 8 10+3 1 3 CO1, CO2,
Halves CO3, CO4,
CO5
11 Dealing 9 10+3 1 3 CO1, CO2,
with CO3, CO4,
Disasters CO5
Short Answer Questions 30 6 6 15 3
Long Answer Questions 80 8

38
 Total 110 (Integra
tion of
the
cognitiv
e skills
of
Underst
anding,
Applying
&
Analysin
g)

C23- COMMON-101: ENGLISH: END EXAM ( 80 Marks )

Question Paper Pattern (Division of Topics: Question wise)

S.No. Weightage of Language Skill / Sub aspects & Description

Marks grammatical Concept
of the of the question
Question

PART-A ; 10 questions X3 marks = 30 Marks

1 3 Articles & a) Definite, indefinite articles

( 6 Questions X ½ Prepositions b) prepositions of place, time,

Mark) directions

2 3 Vocabulary Synonyms, Antonyms, affixes,

words& phrases, Phrasal
( 6 Questions X ½ Verbs, words matching with
Mark) meanings, one word
substitutions,

3 3 Helping Verbs a) Primary helping verbs

( 6 Questions X ½ ( be/do/have)
Mark)
b) Modal verbs

4 3 Tenses Using appropriate Verb forms

( 3 questions 1
mark each )

39
5 3 Voice Conversion : Active & Passive
voice
( 3 questions 1
mark each )

6 3 Adjectives Using appropriate adjective

form/ conversion : Degrees of
( 3 questions 1 comparison
mark each )

7 3 Types of sentences & Conversion from one type of

positive, negative sentence to the other , making
( 3 questions 1 sentences negative sentence
mark each )

8 3 Syntheses of Transformation of sentences :

Sentences / Simple, complex & compound
( 3 questions 1 Conjunctions / linkers sentences / use of linkers/
mark each ) conjunctions

9 3 Direct& Indirect Conversion from Direct to

Speech Indirect & Vice versa
( 3 questions 1
mark each )

10 3 Correction of Remaining grammar aspects

Sentences
( 3 questions 1 ( concord & usage based…etc)
mark each )

PART –B ; 5 QX10 M = 50 Marks

11 10 Marks Paragraph Writing From Units 1,2,3

(theme based- focus on

importance English learning
and using)

12 10 Giving instructions or From Units 4,5,6,7

directions
Theme based / Situation
13 10 Dialogue writing based /role play/ general
topic

14 10 Essay writing From Units 8,9,10,11

40
 (theme based )

15 10 Letter writing Formal / informal letters

16 10 Report Writing Report on Mini projects/

industrial visits / camps/
events / celebrations

17 10 a) E-Mail writing a) E mail etiquette

( 2 questions X 5 b) Framing questions b) Wh & Yes-No questions

Marks)

18 10 (Ten questions 1 Reading An unseen piece of prose with

mark each ) Comprehension 10 questions for reading
comprehension check

C23-Common-101 :English : Bifurcation of Syllabus for UNIT TESTS 1,2,3

Unit Test Lessons / Grammar / Language aspects Writing Skills

Chapters
( Topics or Short Answer ( Topics for Long answer/
questions) Essay Questions)

U.T 1 Chapters a) articles & prepositions, a) Theme based Paragraph

1,2,3
b)Vocabulary: Affixes, ( focus on LSRW skills,
synonyms, Antonyms, importance of English, Self-
matching meanings, words & esteem, SWOC analysis, Social
phrases, one word media )
substitutes)
b) Dialogue on themes of
c)Adjectives ( degrees of lessons 2&3
comparison)
/ Dialogue on General topic /
d) Main& Auxiliary Verbs a situation

e) phrasal verbs/ word order c) Reading comprehension

U.T 2 Chapters a) concord a) Theme based paragraph

4,5,6,7

41
 b) Tenses ( Humour for happy living,
learning from failures,
c) Types of sentences Environmental protection,
d) Framing questions multi- culture /global culture )

e) words &phrases, linkers b) Letter writing ( formal&

informal),

c) instructions/ directions, E-
mail writing

U.T 3 Chapters a) Voice (active &passive) a) Theme based paragraph/

8,9,10,11 Essay writing ( Technical
b) Speech( direct& indirect) innovations, Goal setting,
c) Synthesis of sentences gender sensitivity, dealing
with disaster)
( simple, complex, compound
sentences) b) Essay writing, Report
writing
d) Error analysis
c) Reading Comprehension
e) words &phrases, linkers

Unit Test Total 40 Short Answer questions Long Answer Questions:

Question Marks ( Part-B)
Paper ( Part-A)
pattern ( Part A=16 Q. 6,7,8 @ 8 marks each ;
Q. 1 = 4 marks
(40 Marks Part B =24) Each question with Internal
) Q. 2 to 5 = 3 Marks each choice
Total=16 Marks Total: 8X3 = 24 Marks

C23- COMMON-101: ENGLISH:UNIT TEST Exams 1,2,3 ( 40 Marks each )

Question Paper Pattern (Division of Topics: Question wise)

S.No. Weightage of Language Skill / Sub aspects & Description

Marks grammatical
of the Concept of the
Question question

UNIT TEST-1 Marks : 40 ; Time 90 Mnts. ( Lessons 1,2,3 ) :

PART-A : 16 Marks

42
S.No. Marks allotted Grammatical Sub topics / concepts
concept/ aspect/ skill

1 4 Marks Vocabulary a) Affixes, b) Synonyms

( 8 Questions X c) antonyms
½ Mark)
d) one word substitutes

2 3 (6 Questions X Articles & a) Definite, indefinite articles

½ Mark) Prepositions
b) Prepositions of place, time
direction

3 3 ( 3 questions 1 Adjectives a) Using appropriate forms of

mark each ) adjectives

b) Conversion of Degrees of
comparison

4 3 Helping Verbs a) Primary helping verbs (

be/do/have)
( 6 questions ½
b)Modal verbs
mark each )

5 3 Marks Phrasal verbs Using phrasal verbs in sentences

of one’s own
( 3 questions 1
mark each )

Part – B : 8X3 = 24 Marks

6 8 Marks Paragraph question Theme based questions : Lesson

1:
A or B ( internal
choice) Focus on LSRW skills, problems
and solutions in using English,
Importance of English, English
for employability, SWOC
analysis

7 8 Dialogue making Conversation / Role play

between two people :
A or B ( internal
choice ) a) Dialogue on themes of
lessons 2&3

43
 b) Dialogue on General topic / a
situation

8 8 Reading Unseen prose passages with 8

Comprehension different questions ( F I V E
model questions+ Others)
A or B

( internal choice )

Unit Test -2: Marks : 40 ; Time 90 Mnts. ( Lessons 4,5,6,7)

Part – A: 16 Marks

1 4Marks Tenses Present, Past, Future tenses :

Filling in with proper verb
forms using the given base form

2 3 Concord Concord: agreement between

subject and verb

3 3 Framing questions Framing Wh & Yes-No questions

4 3 Types of sentences Conversion of sentences

( except questions) , Using of
proper linkers / discourse
markers

5 3 Marks Words& Phrases , linkers Using words& phrases, linkers

in sentences of one’s own

Part – B : 8X3 = 24 Marks

6 8 Marks Paragraph writing a) Themes on lessons 4/5

A or B ( internal choice ) b) Themes based on lessons

6/7

7 8 Letter Writing a) Letter writing : formal

( internal choice : A or B ) b) Letter writing: Informal

8 8 a) Paragraph: Tenses a) Paragraph on Routines/

Reinforcement past narration / Future plans

44
 b) Email & Instructions/ b) i) E- Mail writing ( formal or
directions informal)

ii ) Giving instructions/
directions

Unit Test -3: Marks : 40 ; Time 90 Mnts. ( Lessons 8,9,10,11)

Part – A ; 16 Marks

1 4 Marks Error Analysis Find errors and make

corrections

2 3 Voice Conversion: Active & Passive

voice

3 3 Synthesis of sentence Conversion: Simple, complex &

compound sentences

4 3 Reported speech Conversion: Direct & Indirect

speech

5 3 Words & phrases, linkers Matching words with their

meanings/

Using words& phrases, linkers in

sentences of one’s own

Part- B : 8X3 = 24 Marks

6 8 Marks Essay writing a) Theme based ( lessons 8 / 9 )

A or B ( internal choice ) b) Theme based ( Lessons

10/11)

7 8 Report writing a) Report on Mini projects/

industrial visits / camps/
A or B ( internal choice ) events /exhibitions /
celebrations

b) themes from lessons 8 to 11

…like disaster management /
technical inventions / gender
equality/ goal setting

8 8 Reading Comprehension Reading passages with 8

different questions ( FIVE
A or B ( internal choice ) model+ others)

45
 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS-I
(COMMON TO ALL BRANCHES)

Course Course Title No. of Total No. of Marks for FA Marks for SA

46
 Code Periods/week periods

Engineering
EE-102 5 150 20 80
Mathematics-I

S.No. Unit Title No. of periods COs mapped

1 Algebra 31 CO1

2 Trigonometry 44 CO2

3 Co-ordinate Geometry 23 CO3

4 Differential Calculus 34 CO4

5 Applications of Derivatives 18 CO5

Total Periods 150

(i) To apply the principles of Algebra, Trigonometry and Co-Ordinate

Geometry to real-time problems in engineering.
Course Objectives
(ii) To comprehend and apply the concept of Differential Calculus in
engineering applications.

CO1 Identify functions as special relations, resolve partial fractions and

solve problems on matrices and determinants.

CO2 Solve problems using the concept of trigonometric functions, their

inverses and complex numbers.

CO3 Find the equations and properties of straight lines, circles and conic
Course Outcomes
sections in coordinate system.

CO4 Evaluate the limits and derivatives of various functions

CO5 Find solutions for engineering problems using differentiation.

Learning Outcomes
UNIT - I

47
C.O. 1 Identify functions, resolve partial fractions and solve problems on matrices and
determinants.
L.O. 1.1 Define Set, ordered pair and Cartesian product of two sets - examples.
1.2 Explain Relations and functions – examples
1.3 Find Domain & Range of functions in finite sets – simple examples.
1.4 Define rational, proper and improper fractions of polynomials.
1.5 Explain the procedure of resolving proper fractions of the types mentioned
below into partial fractions

1.6 Define a matrix and order of a matrix.

1.7 State various types of matrices with examples (emphasis on 3 rd order square
matrices).
1.8 Compute sum, difference, scalar multiplication and product of matrices. Illustrate the
properties of these operations such as associative, distributive, commutative properties
with examples and counter examples.
1.9 Define the transpose of a matrix and state its properties – examples.
1.10 Define symmetric and skew-symmetric matrices with examples. Resolve a
square matrix into a sum of symmetric and skew-symmetric matrices and
provide examples.
1.11 Define determinant of a square matrix; minor, co-factor of an element of a
3x3 square matrix with examples. Expand the determinant of a 3 x 3 matrix
using Laplace expansion formula. State and apply the properties of
determinants to solve problems.
1.12 Distinguish singular and non-singular matrices. Define multiplicative inverse
of a matrix and list properties of adjoint and inverse. Compute adjoint and
multiplicative inverse of a square matrix.
1.13 Solve system of 3 linear equations in 3 unknowns using Cramer’s rule and
matrix inversion method.
UNIT - II
C.O. 2 Solve problems using the concept of trigonometric functions, their inverses and complex
numbers.
L.O. 2.1 Define trigonometric ratios of any angle - List the values of trigonometric ratios at specified
values.
2.2 Draw graphs of trigonometric functions - Explain periodicity of trigonometric functions.
2.3 Define compound angles and state the formulae of sin(A±B), cos(A±B),
tan(A±B) and cot(A±B).
2.4 Give simple examples on compound angles to derive the values of sin150,
cos150 , sin750 , cos750 , tan 150 , tan750 etc.
2.5 Derive identities like sin(A+B) sin(A-B) = sin 2 A –sin2 B etc.
2.6 Solve simple problems on compound angles.
2.7 Derive the formulae of multiple angles 2A, 3A etc and sub multiple angles
A/2 in terms of angle A of trigonometric functions.
2.8 Derive useful allied formulae like sin2A= (1- cos2A)/2 etc.
2.9 Solve simple problems using the above formulae

48
 Syllabus for Unit test-I

2.10 Derive the formulae on transforming sum or difference of two trigonometric ratiosinto a
product and vice versa, examples on these formulae.
2.11 Solve problems by applying these formulae to sum or difference or product of two terms.
2.12 Explain the concept of the inverse of a trigonometric function by selecting an
appropriate domain and range.
2.13 Define inverses of six trigonometric functions along with their domains and ranges.
2.14 Derive relations between inverse trigonometric functions so that the given inverse
trigonometric function can be expressed in terms of other inverse trigonometric functions
with examples.
2.15 State various properties of inverse trigonometric functions and identities like

sin-1x+cos-1 x = , etc.

2.16 Apply formulae like etc.,

to solve Simple problems.
2.17 Explain what is meant by solution of trigonometric equations and find the general solutions
of sin x=k, cos x =k and tan x=k with appropriate examples.
2.18 Solve models of the type a sin2 x + b sin x +c=0 and a cos x + b sin x=c.
2.19 State sine rule, cosine rule, tangent rule and projection rule and solve a triangle using these
formulae.
2.20 List various formulae for the area of a triangle with examples.
2.21 Define complex number, its modulus, conjugate, amplitude and list their properties.
2.22 Define the operations on complex numbers with examples.
2.23 Represent the complex number in various forms like modulus-amplitude
(polar) form, Exponential (Euler) form with examples.

UNIT - III
Coordinate Geometry

C.O. 3 Find the equations and properties of straight lines, circles and conic sections in coordinate
system.

L.O.3.1 Write the different forms of a straight line – general form, point-slope form, slope-
intercept form, two-point form, intercept form and normal form (or perpendicular
form).
3.2 Find distance of a point from a line, acute angle between two lines, intersection of two non-
parallel lines and distance between two parallel lines.
3.3 Define locus of a point and circle.
3.4 Write the general equation of a circle and find the centre and radius.
3.5 Find the equation of a circle given (i) centre and radius, (ii)two ends of the diameter(iii) three
non collinear points of type (0,0) (a,0), (0,b).
3.6 Define a conic section - Explain the terms focus, directrix, eccentricity, axes and latus-rectum
of a conic withillustrations.
3.7 Find the equation of a conic when focus, directrix and eccentricity are given.

49
 3.8 Describe the properties of Parabola, Ellipse and Hyperbola in standard forms
whose axes are along the co-ordinate axes and solve simple examples on these conics.
Syllabus for Unit test-II

C.O.4 Evaluate the limits and derivatives of various functions.

L.O. 4.1 Explain the concept of limit and meaning of and state the
properties of limits.

4.2 Evaluate the limits of the type and

1 1 1
i) , ,
a2 + x 2 a2 −x 2 x 2−a2
1 1 1
ii ) , ,
√ a 2 + x 2 √ a2 −x 2 √ x 2 −a 2
4.3 State the Standard limits iii ) √ x 2 −a 2 , √ x 2 + a2 , √ a2 −x 2

∫ u.vdx
1 1 1
i) , ,
a2 + x 2 a2 −x 2 x 2−a2
1 1 1
ii ) , ,
√ a 2+ x 2 √ a2−x 2 √ x 2 −a 2
iii) √ x −a , √ x + a , √ a2 −x 2
2 2 2 2
(without proof) and solve simple problems
using these standard limits.
4.4 Explain the concept of continuity of a function at a point and on an interval
4.5 State the concept of derivative of a function y = f(x) – definition, first principle

as and also provide standard notations to denote the

derivative of a function.
4.6 Explain the significance of derivative in scientific and engineering applications.
4.7 Find the derivative of the elementary functions x n, ax, ex, log x, sin x, cos x using the first
principle.
4.8 Find the derivatives of standard algebraic, logarithmic and exponential functions.
4.9 Find the derivatives of trigonometric, inverse trigonometric and hyperbolic functions.
4.10 State the rules of differentiation of sum, difference, scalar multiplication,
product and quotient of functions with simple illustrative examples.
4.11 Explain the method of differentiation of a function of a function (Chain rule)
with illustrative examples.
4.12 Explain the method of differentiation of parametric functions with examples.
4.13 Explain the procedure for finding the derivatives of implicit functions with examples.
4.14 Explain the need of taking logarithms for differentiating some functions of [f(x)] g(x) type –
examples on logarithmic differentiation.
4.15 Explain the concept of finding the second order derivatives with examples.
4.16 Explain the concept of functions of several variables, finding partial derivatives and
difference between the ordinary and partial derivatives with simple examples.
4.17 Explain the concept of finding second order partial derivatives with simple problems.

C.O. 5 Evaluate solutions for engineering problems using differentiation

L.O. 5.1 State the geometrical meaning of the derivative - Explain the concept of derivative to find
the slopes of tangent and normal to the curve y=f(x) at any point on it.
5.2 Find the equations of tangent and normal to the curve y=f(x) at any point on it – examples.
5.3 Explain the derivative as a rate of change in distance-time relations to find the velocity and
acceleration of a moving particle with examples.

50
 5.4 Explain the derivative as a rate measurer in the problems where the quantities like
volumes, areas vary with respect to time- illustrative examples.
5.5 Define the concept of increasing and decreasing functions - Explain the conditions to find
points where the given function is increasing or decreasing with illustrative examples.
5.6 Explain the procedure to find the extreme values (maxima or minima) of a function of single
variable- simple problemsfor quadratic and cubic polynomials.
5.7 Apply the concept of derivatives to find the errors and approximations in simple
problems.
Syllabus for Unit test-III

COURSE CONTENT
Unit-I
Algebra
1. Functions:

Definitions of Set, Ordered pair, Cartesian product of two sets, Relations, functions, domain &
range of functions in finite sets.

2. Partial Fractions:

Definitions of rational, proper and improper fractions of polynomials. Resolve rational fractions
(proper fractions) in to their partial fractions covering the types mentioned below.

3. Matrices:
Definition of a matrix, types of matrices-examples, algebra of matrices-equality of two matrices,
sum, difference, scalar multiplication and product of matrices. Transpose of a matrix-Symmetric,
skew symmetric matrices-Minor, cofactor of an element-Determinant of a square matrix-Laplace’s
expansion, properties of determinants. Singular and non-singular matrices-Adjoint and
multiplicative inverse of a square matrix- examples-System of linear equations in 3 variables-
Solutions by Cramer’s rule and Matrix inversion method-examples.

Unit-II
Trigonometry
4. Trigonometric ratios:
Definition of trigonometric ratios of any angle, values of trigonometric ratios at specified values,
draw graphs of trigonometric functions, periodicity of trigonometric functions.
5. Compound angles:
Formulas of sin(A±B), cos(A±B), tan(A±B),cot(A±B),and related identities with problems.
6. Multiple and sub multiple angles:
Formulae for trigonometric ratios of multiple angles 2A, 3A and sub multipleangles A/2
with problems.
7. Transformations: Transformationsof products into sums or differences and vice versa - simple
problems.

51
8. Inverse trigonometric functions:
Definition, domains and ranges-basic properties- problems.
9. Trigonometric equations:
Concept of a solution, principal value and general solution of trigonometric equations:
Sinx =k ,cosx= k, tanx =k, where k is a constant. Solutions of simple quadratic equations and
equations of type acosx+bsinx=c.
10. Properties of triangles:
Relation between sides and angles of a triangle- sine rule, cosine rule, tangent rule and projection
rule-area of a triangle- problems.
11. Complex Numbers:
Definition of a complex number, Modulus, conjugate and amplitude of a complex number,
Arithmetic operations on complex numbers, Modulus- Amplitude (polar) form ,
Exponential form (Euler form) of a complex number- Problems.

UNIT-III
Coordinate geometry

12 Straight lines: various forms of straight lines, angle between lines, perpendicular distance from a
point, intersection of non-parallel lines and distance between parallel lines-examples.
13. Circle: locus of a point, Circle, definition-Circle equation given (i) centre and radius, (ii)
two ends of a diameter (iii) three non collinear points of type (0,0), (a,0), (0,b) - general equation
of a circle – finding centre, radius.
14. Definition of a conic section, equation of a conic when focus directrix and eccentricity
are given. Properties of parabola, ellipse and hyperbola in standard forms.

UNIT-IV
Differential Calculus

15. Concept of Limit- Definition and Properties of Limits and Standard Limits -Simple Problems-
Continuity of a function at a point- Simple Examples only.

16. Concept of derivative- Definition (first principle)- different notations-derivatives of elementary

functions. Derivatives of algebraic, logarithmic, trigonometric, inverse trigonometric and
hyperbolic functions. Derivatives of sum, product, quotient, scalar multiplication of functions -
problems. Chain rule, derivatives of parametric functions, derivatives of implicit functions,
logarithmic differentiation – problems in each case. Second order derivatives – examples.
Functions of several variables –First and second order partial differentiation-simple problems.
UNIT-V
Applications of Derivatives

17.Geometrical meaning of the derivative, equations of tangent and normal to a curve atany point -
problems.
18.Physical applications of derivatives – velocity, acceleration, derivative as a rate
measure –Problems.
19. Applications of the derivative to find the extreme values – Increasing and decreasing functions,
finding the maxima and minima for quadratic and cubic polynomials.
20.Using the concept of derivative of a function of single variable, find the absolute error,relative and
percentage errors and approximate values due to errors in measuring.

Textbook:

52
 Engineering Mathematics-I, a textbook for first year diploma courses, prepared & prescribed by
SBTET, AP.

Reference Books:
1. Shanti Narayan, A Textbook of matrices, S.Chand&Co.
2. Robert E. Moyer & Frank Ayers Jr., Schaum’s Outline of Trigonometry, 4th Edition, Schaum’s Series.
3. M.Vygodsky, Mathematical Handbook, Mir Publishers, Moscow.
4. Frank Ayers & Elliott Mendelson, Schaum’s Outline of Calculus, Schaum’s Series.

53
 Blue print

Chapter/Unit No. of Weightage COs

S.No. Short type Essay type
title Periods Allotted mapped

R U Ap R U Ap

Unit - I : Algebra

1 Functions 5 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 CO1

2 Partial Fractions 6 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 CO1

Matrices and
3 20 16 2 0 0 0 0 1 CO1
Determinants

Unit - II : Trigonometry

Trigonometric
4 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CO2
Ratios

Compound
5 5 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 CO2
Angles

Multiple and
6 Submultiple 8 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 CO2
angles

7 Transformations 6 5 0 0 0 0 1/2 0 CO2

Inverse
8 Trigonometric 6 5 0 0 0 0 1/2 0 CO2
Functions

Trigonometric
9 6 5 0 0 0 0 1/2 0 CO2
Equations

Properties of
10 5 5 0 0 0 0 0 1/2 CO2
triangles

Complex
11 6 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 CO2
Numbers

Unit III : Co-ordinate Geometry

12 Straight Lines 6 5 0 0 0 0 1/2 0 CO3

13 Circles 5 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 CO3

54
14 Conic Sections 12 5 0 0 0 0 1/2 0 CO3

Unit – IV : Differential Calculus

Limits and
15 6 6 1 1 0 0 0 0 CO4
Continuity

16 Differentiation 28 20 0 0 0 1 1 0 CO4

Unit – V : Applications of Derivatives

Geometrical
17 4 5 0 0 0 0 0 1/2 CO5
Applications

Physical
18 6 5 0 0 0 0 0 1/2 CO5
Applications

Maxima and
19 4 5 0 0 0 0 0 1/2 CO5
Minima

Errors and
20 4 5 0 0 0 0 0 1/2 CO5
Approximations

3 3
Total 150 110 9 1 0 1
1/2 1/2

Marks 27 3 0 10 35 35

R: Remembering Type : 37 Marks

U: understanding Type : 38 Marks
Ap: Application Type : 35 Marks

C-23 Engineering Mathematics – I

Unit Test Syllabus

Unit Test Syllabus

Unit Test-I From L.O. 1.1 to L.O. 2.9

Unit Test-II From L.O. 2.10 to L.O. 3.8

Unit Test-III From L.O.4.1 to L.O. 5.7

ENGINEERINGPHYSICS

55
 Course Course Title No. of Periods Total No. of Marks for Marks for
code per week Periods FA SA

ENGINEERING
EE-103 3 90 20 80
PHYSICS

TIMESCHEDULE

S.No MajorTopics No.ofPeriods

1. Unitsand measurements 09

2. Statics 11

3. Gravitation 12

4. Concepts of energy 10

5. Thermal physics 10

6. Sound 12

7. Electricity & magnetism 13

8. Modern physics 13

Total: 90

CO - PO MAPPING

S.No MajorTopics No.ofPeriods COs

1. Unitsand measurements 09
2. Statics 11 CO
3. Gravitation 12
4. Concepts of energy 10 CO
5. Thermal physics 10
6. Sound 12 CO
7. Electricity & magnetism 13 3
8. Modern physics 13 CO
Total: 90 4

(1) To understand the basic concepts of physics for various

Engineering applications as required for industries.

(2) To equip the students with the scientific advances in

Course objectives technology and make the student suitable for any industrial
organization.

56
 Familiarize with various physical quantities, their
SI units and errors in measurements; understand
CO1 the concepts of vectors and various forces in
statics.

Understand the concepts of gravitation with

reference to applications in satellites, provides
CO2 the knowledge of various forms of energy and
their working principles.

Familiarize with the knowledge of conduction of

heat and gas laws; provides the knowledge on
COURSE OUTCOMES CO3 musical sound and noise as pollution and also the
concepts of echo and reverberation.

Provide basic knowledge of electricity and

concepts of magnetism and magnetic materials;
CO4 familiarize with the advances in Physics such as
photoelectric ell, optical fibers, semiconductors,
superconductors and nanotechnology.

OBJECTIVES
Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

1.0 Understand the concept of units and measurements

1.1 Explain the concept of Units
1.2 Define t h e t e r m s
a ) Physicalquantity, b ) F u n d a m e n t a l physicalquantitiesand
c ) D erived physicalquantities
1.3 Defineunit
1.4 Definefundamentalunitsandderivedunits
1.5 StateSIunitswithsymbols
1.6 StateMultiplesandSubmultiplesinSIsystem
1.7 State rulesofwritingS.I.units
1.8 StateadvantagesofSIunits
1.9 What are d i r e c t a n d i n d i r e c t m e a s u r e m e n t s .
1.10 Define accuracy and least count
1.11 Define error in measurement
1.12 Define absolute, relative and percentage errors with their formulae
1.13 Solve simple problems on absolute, relative and percentage errors

2.0 Understand the concepts of statics

2.1 Explain the concept ofVectors
2.2 Definescalarandvectorquantities with examples
2.3 Represent vectorsgeometrically

57
 2.4 Define the types of vectors (equal, negative, unit, co-initial, co-planar vectors,
Positionvector)
2.6 Resolve the vector into rectangular components
2.7 State and explain triangle law of addition of vectors
2.8 Define concurrent and co-planar forces
2.9 State and explain Lami’s theorem
2.10 Stateparallelogramlawof addition of forces with diagram
2.11 Write the expressions for magnitude and direction of resultant (no derivation)
2.12 Illustrate parallelogram law with examples (i) flying of bird and (ii) working of sling.
2.13 Define moment of force and couple.
2.14 Write the formulae and S.I units of moment of force and couple.
2.15 Solve s i m p l e p r o b l e m s o n ( i ) R e s o l u t i o n o f f o r c e a n d
(ii) Parallelogram law of forces (finding R,α and θ).

3.0 Understand the concepts of Gravitation

3.1 State and explain Newton’s universal law of gravitation.
3.2 Define G and mention its value.
3.3 Explain the accelerationduetogravity (g)
3.4 Explain the factors affecting the value of g
3.5 Derive the relationship between g and G.
3.6. State and explain the Kepler’s law of planetary motion
3.7 Define a satellite.
3.8 What are natural and artificial satellites? Give examples.
3.9 Define orbital velocity and write its formula.
3.10 Define escape velocity and write its formula.
3.11 Write a brief note on PSLV
3.12 Write a brief note on GSLV
3.13 Mention the applications of artificial satellites
3.14 Solve simple problems on (i) Newton’s law of gravitation and (ii) calculation of
orbitaland escape velocities.

4.0 Understand the concepts of Energy.

4.1 Definework done and energy. Mention their SI units.
4.2 List various types of energy.
4.3 Define P.E with examples. Write its equation.
4.4 Define K.E with examples. Write its equation.
4.5 Derive relationship between K.E and momentum.
4.6 State the law of conservation of energy. Give various examples.
4.7 Write a brief note on solar energy.
4.8 Explain the principle of solar thermal conversion.
4.9 Explain the principle of photo voltaic effect
4.10 Solve simple problems on (i) work done (ii) P.E & K.E and (iii) Relation between K.E
& momentum.

5.0 Understand the concepts of thermal physics

5.1 Define the concepts of heat and temperature
5.2 State the modes of transmission of heat
5.3 Define conduction, convection and radiation with two examples each.
5.4State and explainBoyle’s law
5.5Define absolute zero temperature

58
 5.6Explainabsolutescaleoftemperature
5.7 State the relationship between Degree Celcius, Kelvin and Fahrenheit temperatures
5.8StateCharleslaws and write its equation
5.9State Gay-Lussac’s law and write its equation
5.10 Define ideal gas
5.11 Derive i dealgasequation
5.12Explainwhyuniversalgasconstant (R) issameforallgases
5.13Calculate the valueof R for 1 gram mole of gas.
5.14 Solve s i m p l e p r o b l e m s o n ( i ) I n t e r c o n v e r s i o n o f t e m p e r a t u r e s
between °C, K and F (ii) Gas laws and (iii) Ideal gas equation.

6.0 Understand the concepts of Sound

6.1 Define the termsound
6.2 Define longitudinal and transverse waves with one example each
6.3 Explain the factors which affect the velocity of sound in air
6.4 Distinguishbetweenmusicalsoundandnoise
6.5 ExplainnoisepollutionandstateSIunitfor intensity of sound
6.6 Explain s o u r c e s ofnoisepollution
6.7 Explaineffectsofnoisepollution
6.8 Explainmethodsofminimizingnoisepollution
6.9 Define Dopplereffect
6.10 List the ApplicationsofDopplereffect
6.11 Definereverberationandreverberationtime
6.12 WriteSabine’sformula and name the parameters contained
6.13 Define echoes and explain the condition to hear an echo.
6.14 Mention the methods of reducing an echo
6.15 Mention the applications of an echo
6.16 What are ultrasonics
6.17 Mention the applications of ultrasonics, SONAR,
6.18 Solve simple problems on echo

7.0 Understand the concepts ofElectricity and Magnetism

7.1 Explain the concept of P.D and EMF
7.2 State Ohm’slaw a n d w r i t e t h e f o r m u l a
7 .3 E xplain Ohm’slaw
7.4 Define r e s i s t a n c e a n d specificresistance. Write their S.I units.
7.5 State and explain Kichoff’s first law.
7.6 State and explain Kirchoff’s second law.
7.7 Describe Wheatstone’sbridge with legible sketch.
7.8 Derive an expression for balancing condition of Wheatstone’sbridge
7.9 Describe MeterBridge experiment with necessary circuit diagram.
7.10 Write the formulae to find resistance and specific resistance in meter bridge
7 .11 Explain the concept of magnetism
7.12 What are natural and artificial magnets (mention some types)
7.13 Definemagneticfieldandmagneticlinesofforce and write the properties of
magneticlines of force
7.14 State and explain the Coulomb’sinversesquarelawofmagnetism
7.15 Define magnetic permeability
7.16 Define para, dia, ferro magnetic materials with examples
7.17 Solve simple problems on (i) Ohm’s law (ii) Kirchoff’s first law (iii) Wheatstone bridge (iv) meter bridge and

59
 (v) Coulomb’s inverse square law

8.0 Understand the concepts ofModern physics

8.1 State and ExplainPhoto-electriceffect
8.2 Statelawsofphotoelectriceffect
8.3 Explain the Workingofphotoelectriccell
8.4 List the Applicationsofphotoelectriceffect
8.5 Recapitulaterefractionoflightand its laws
8.6 Define criticalangle
8.7 Explain theTotalInternalReflection
8.8 ExplaintheprincipleandworkingofOpticalFiber
8.9 Listtheapplicationsof OpticalFiber
8.10 Explain the energy gap based on band structure
8.11 Distinguish between conductors, semiconductors and insulators base on energy gap
8.12 Define doping
8.13 Explain the concept of hole
8.14 Explain the types of semiconductors : Intrinsic and extrinsic
8.15 What are n-type and P-type semiconductors
8.16 Mention the applications of semiconductors
8.17 Definesuperconductorandsuperconductivity
8.18 List the applicationsofsuperconductors
8.19 Nanotechnology definition, nonmaterials and applications

COURSECONTENT

1. Units and measurements

Introduction – Physical quantity – Fundamental and Derived quantities – Fundamental and
derived units - SI units –Multiples and Sub multiples – Rules for writing S.I. units-Advantages
of SI units – Direct and indirect measurements – Accuracy and least count – Errors : Absolute,
relative and percentage errors –Problems.

2. Statics
ScalarsandVectors– Representation of a vector - Typesofvectors - Resolution of vector into
rectangular components – Triangle law of vectors – Concurrent forces - Lami’s theorem -
Parallelogram law of forces : Statement, equations for magnitude and direction of resultant,
examples – Moment of force and couple – Problems.

3.Gravitation
Newton’s law of gravitation and G – Conceptofaccelerationduetogravity (g) – Factors affecting
the value of g – Relation between g and G- Kepler’s laws – Satellites : Natural and
artificial – Orbital velocity and escape velocity – Polar and geostationary satellites –
Applications of artificial satellites – Problems.

4. Concepts of energy
Workdone & Energy-Definition and types of energy - potential energy - kinetic energy-- K.E and
Momentum relation – Law of Conservation of energy, examples - Solar energy, principle of
thermal and photo conversion – Problems.

5. Thermal physics

60
 Modes of transmission of heat - ExpansionofGases -Boyle’slaw -Absolutescale of temperature -
Thermometric scales and their inter conversion - Charle’s law - Gay-Lussac’s law - Ideal gas
equation - Universal gas constant (R) - Problems.

6. Sound
Sound - Nature of sound - Types of wave motion, Longitudinal and transverse – Factors affecting
the velocity of sound in air - musical sound and noise - Noise pollution – Causes &effects-
Methods of reducing noise pollution- Doppler effect- Echo- Reverberation-Reverberation
time-Sabine ‘s formula - Ultrasonics & applications – SONAR - Problems.

7. Electricity & Magnetism

Concept of P.D and EMF - Ohm’slawandexplanation-Specificresistance-Kirchoff’slaws -
Wheatstone’sbridge - Meter bridge.
Natural and artificial magnets – magnetic field and magnetic lines of force -
Coulomb’ sinversesquarelaw – Permeability – Magnetic materials – Para, dia, ferro –
Examples – Problems.

8. Modern Physics
Photoelectric effect – laws of photoelectric effect– photoelectric cell -
Applicationsofphotoelectric cell -Total internal reflection- Fiber optics - Principle and working of
an optical fiber-Applications of optical fibers – Semiconductors : Based on Energy gap – Doping
– Hole - Intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors (n-type & p-type) – Applications of
semiconductors - Superconductivity–applications – Nanotechnology definition, nano materials,
applications.

REFERENCES
1. Intermediate physics - Volume - I & 2 Telugu Academy (English version)
2. Unified physics Volume 1, 2, 3 and 4 Dr. S.L Guptha and Sanjeev Guptha
3. Concepts of Physics, Vol 1 & 2 H.C. Verma
4. Text book of physics Volume I Resnick & Holiday
5. Fundamentals of physics Brijlal & Subramanyam
6. Text book of applied physics Dhanpath Roy
7. NCERT Text Books of physics Class XI & XII Standard
8. e-books/e-tools/websites/Learning Physics software

Blue Print for setting question paper at different levels

61
 Short Answer Essay Type(Marks)
Type(Marks)
S.No Major Topics Weightage
of Marks R U A R U A

1 Units and 03 0 0 3 0 0 0
measurements

2 Statics 13 0 3 0 10 0

3 Gravitation 20 0 0 0 10 10 0

4 Concepts of 13 0 0 3 0 10 0
energy

5 Thermal physics 13 0 3 0 0 0 10

6 Sound 16 0 3 3 0 10 0

7 Electricity & 16 0 3 3 0 10 0
magnetism

8 Modern Physics 16 3 0 3 0 0 10

Total: 110 3 9 18 10 50 20

ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY AND ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES

62
 Course Course Title No. of Total No. of Marks for FA Marks for SA
code Periods per Periods
week

ENGINEERING
CHEMISTRY AND
EE-104 3 90 20 80
ENVIRONMENTAL
STUDIES

S.No Unit Title/Chapter No of Periods COs Mapped

1 Fundamentals of Chemistry 14 CO1

2 Solutions, Acids and Bases 16 CO1
3 Electrochemistry 12 CO2
4 Corrosion 8 CO2
5 Water Treatment 8 CO3
6 Polymers & Engineering materials 12 CO4
7 Fuels 6 CO4
8 Environmental Studies 14 CO5
Total 90

Course Objectives

Course Title: Engineering Chemistry & Environmental Studies

1. To familiarize with the concepts of chemistry involved in the

process of various Engineering Industrial Applications.
2. To know the various natural and man-made environmental
Course Objectives issues and concerns with an interdisciplinary approach that
include physical, chemical, biological and socio cultural
aspects of environment.
3. to reinforce theoretical concepts by conducting relevant
experiments/exercises

Course outcomes

Course CO1 Explain Bohr`s atomic model, chemical bonding, mole concept, acids and
Outcomes bases, PH and Buffer solutions

63
 CO2 Explain electrolysis, Galvanic cell, batteries and corrosion
CO3 Explain the chemistry involved in the treatment of hardness in water
Explain the methods of preparation of polymers and chemical
CO4 composition and applications of alloys, composite materials, liquid
crystals and Nano materials
Explain Global impacts due to air pollution, causes , effects and control
CO5 methods of water pollution and Understand the environment, forest
resources, E-Pollution and Green Chemistry Principles.

Course code Engineering. Chemistry and Environmental studies

No Of periods 90
C-104 No of Course Objectives:5

Mapped with CO periods ddressing Level

POs remarks
CO No PO in Col 1NO % 1,2,3

CO1,CO2,CO3,
PO1 42 46.7 % 3
CO4,CO5 >40% level 3 (highly
PO2 CO1,CO2 9 10.0% 1 addressed) 25% to 40%
PO3 CO2,CO3 8 8.9% 1 level2(moderately
PO4 CO1 10 11.1% 1 addressed 5% to 25%
PO5 CO4,CO5 13 14.4% 1 level1 (Low addressed < 5%
PO6 (not addressed)
PO7 CO4 8 8.9% 1

COs-POs mapping strength (as per given table)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CO1 3 2 1 1 1 1 1

CO2 3 2 2 1 1

CO3 3 2 3

CO4 3 2 2

CO5 3 3 1

AVERAGEE 3 2 1.6 2 2 2 1 1

3=strongly mapped 2= moderately mapped 1= slightly mapped

Note: The gaps in CO and PO mapping will be achieved by one or more appropriate activities from the
following:
i) Seminars ii) Tutorials iii) Guest Lectures iv) Assignments v) Quiz competitions vi) Industrial visit vii)
Tech Fest viii) Mini project ix) Group discussions x) Virtual classes xi) Library visit for e-books

Model Blue Print with Weightage for Blooms category and questions for each chapter and COs
mapped

64
 Marks wise Question wise
Weigh
No of distribution of distribution of
S.N Unit t age Mapped
Period Weightage Weightage
o Title/Chapter of with CO
s A A A A
marks R U R U
p n p n
Fundamentals 15 1½
1 14 21 3 3 1 1 CO1
of Chemistry * *
Solutions, Acids 1 1½
2 16 21 8* 0 3 1 1 CO1
and Bases 0 *
1
3 Electrochemistry 12 13 0 3 1 1 CO2
0
1
4 Corrosion 8 13 3 0 1 1 CO2
0
5 Water Treatment 8 13 10 0 0 3 1 1 CO3
Polymers &
1
6 Engineering 12 13 0 3 0 1 1 CO4
0
materials.
7 Fuels 6 3 0 0 3 0 1 CO4
Environmental 1
8 14 13 0 0 2 CO5
Studies 3
5
Total 90 110 36 12 6 5 7 4 2
6

*One question of 10 marks be given with 50% weightage from unit title 1and 2

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to learn out

ENGINEERINGCHEMISTRY AND ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES

1. Atomic structure

1.1 Explain the charge, mass of fundamental particles of an atom (electron, proton and neutron) and
the concept of atomic number and mass number.
1.2 State the Postulates of Bohr’s atomic theory and its limitations.
1.3 Explain t h e s i g n i f i c a n c e o f f o u r Quantum numbers and draw the atomic structures of Silicon
and Germanium.
1.4 Explain 1 . Aufbau principle, 2 Pauli’s exclusion principle 3 Hund’s principle.
1.5 Define Orbital of an atom and draw the shapes of s, p and d- Orbitals.
1.6 Write the electronic configuration of elements up to atomic number 30
1.7 Explain the significance of chemical bonding
1.8 Explain the Postulates of Electronic theory of valency

1.9 Define and explain Ionic and Covalent bonds with examples of NaCl , *H2,*O2 and *N2. (* Lewis
dot method)
1.10 List out the Properties of Ionic compounds and covalent compounds and distinguish between
their properties.

65
2. Solutions, Acids and Bases

2.1 Define the terms 1.Solution, 2.Solute and 3.Solvent

2.2 Classify solutions based on solubility.
2.3 Define mole and problems on mole concept.
2.4 Define the terms 1. Atomic weight, 2.Molecular weight and 3. Equivalent weight and
calculate Molecular weight and Equivalent weight of the given acids.(HCl,H 2SO4,H3PO4)Bases
(NaOH, Ca(OH)2, Al(OH)3 ) and Salts (NaCl, Na2CO3, CaCO3)
2.5 Define molarity and normality and numerical problems on molarity and normality
a) Calculate the Molarity or Normality if weight of solute and volume of solution are
given
b) Calculate the weight of solute if Molarity or normality with volume of solution are given
c) Problems on dilution to convert high concentrated solutions to low concentrated
Solutions
2.6 Explain Arrhenius theory of Acids and Bases and give the limitations of Arrhenius theory of Acids
and Bases.
2.7 Define ionic product of water and pH and numerical problems on pH (Strong Acids and Bases).
2.8 Define buffer solution and classify buffer solutions with examples. Give its applications.

3 . Electrochemistry

3.1 Define the terms1. Conductor 2. Semiconductor 3.Insulator, 4.Electrolyte5.Non–electrolyte.

Give two examples each.
3.2 Distinguish between metallic conduction and Electrolytic conduction
3.3 Explain electrolysis by taking example fused NaCl and list out the applications of electrolysis.
3.4 Define Galvanic cell and explain the construction and working of Galvanic cell.
3.5 Distinguish between electrolytic cell and galvanic cell.
3.6 Define battery and list the types of batteries with examples.
3.5 Explain the construction, working and applications of i) Dry cell (Leclanche cell, ii) Lead storage
battery iii) Lithium-Ion battery iii) Hydrogen-Oxygen fuel cell.

4. Corrosion
4.1 Define the term corrosion.
4.2 state the Factors influencing the rate of corrosion
4.3 Describe the formation of a) composition cell b) stress cell c) concentration cell during corrosion.
4.4 Define rusting of iron and explain the mechanism of rusting of iron.
4.5 Explain the methods of prevention of corrosion
a)Protective coatings (anodic and cathodic coatings)
b) Cathodic protection (Sacrificial anode process and Impressed–voltage process)

5. Water Treatment

66
5.1 Define soft water and hard water with respect to soap action.
5.2 Define and classify the hardness of water.
5.3 List out the salts that causing hardness of water(with Formulae)
5.4 State the disadvantages of using hard water in industries.
5.5 Define Degree of hardness and units of hardness(mg/L) or( ppm).
5.6 Numerical problems on hardness.
5.7 Explain the methods of softening of hard water by :a) Ion-exchange process, b) Reverse Osmosis.

6.Polymers & Engineering materials.

A) Polymers
6.1 Explain the concept of polymerisation
6.2 Describe the methods of polymerization a)addition polymerization of ethylene b)condensation
polymerization of Bakalite (Only flow chart)
6.3 Explain the methods of preparation and uses of the following plastics:
1. PVC 2.Teflon3. Polystyrene 4. Nylon 6,6
B) Engineering materials
6.4 Define an alloy. Write the composition and applications of the following.
1.Nichrome 2. Duraluminium 3. Stainless Steel.
6.5. Define elastomers: Write the compostion and applications of the following
1. Buna- S 2. Neoprene
6.6 Define Composite materials: Write the composition and applications of the following:
1.Glass Fibre Reinforcement composites(GFR) 2. Carbon Fibre Reinforcement Composites(CFR)
6.7 Define Liquid Crystals. Classify and give applications of the following:
1. Nematic 2. Smectic crystals
6.7 Define Nono materials. Write the composition and applications of the following:
1. nanotubes 2. Nano crystals.

7. Fuels
7.1 Define the term fuel
7.2 Classify the fuels based on occurrence.
7.3 Write the composition and uses of the following:
1. LPG 2. CNG 3. Biogas 4. Power alcohol
7.4 Write the commercial production of Hydrogen as future fuel. Give its advantages and
disadvantages.
8.ENVIRONMENTALSTUDIES
8.1 Define the term environment and explain the scope and importance of environmental studies.
8.2 Define the segments of environment 1).Lithosphere 2).Hydrosphere 3).Atmosphere
4).Biosphere
8.3 Define the following terms:
1)Pollutant 2).Pollution 3).Contaminant 4)receptor 5)sink 6) particulates 7)dissolved oxygen (DO)

67
 8)Threshold limit value (TLV) 9).BOD 10) COD 11) eco system 1 2 ) Producers 1 3 ) C onsumers
14) Decomposers with examples.
8.4 State the renewable and non- renewable energy sources with examples.
8.5 State the uses of forest resources.
8.6 Explain the causes and effects of deforestation
8.7 Define air pollution and give its Global impacts( 1) Greenhouse effect, 2) Ozone layer depletion
and 3) Acid rain)

8.8 Define Water pollution. Explain the causes, effects and control methods of Water pollution.
8.9 Define E-Pollution, State the sources of e-waste Explain its health effects and control methods.

8.10 Define green chemistry. Write the Principles and benefits of green chemistry.

COURSE CONTENT

ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY AND ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES

1. Fundamentals of Chemistry
Atomic Structure: Introduction - Fundamental particles – Bohr’s theory – Quantum numbers –Aufbau
principle - Hund’s rule - Pauli’s exclusion Principle- Orbitals, shapes of s, p and d orbitals - Electronic
configurations of elements
Chemical Bonding: significance–Electronic theory of valency- types of chemical bonds – Ionic and
covalent bond with examples–Properties of Ionic and Covalent compounds.

2. Solutions, Acids and Bases

Solutions: Terms and Types of solutions- mole concept –numerical problems on mole concept -
Methods of expressing concentration of a solution –molarity and normality – Numerical problems on
molarity and normality.

Acids and Bases: Arrhenius theory of acids and bases – Ionic product of water- pH – numerical problems
on pH–Buffer solutions- Classification- applications.

3. Electrochemistry
Conductors, semiconductors, insulators, electrolytes and non-electrolytes – electrolysis of fused
NaCl–-applications of electrolysis - Galvanic cell – Battery-Types- Dry Cell(Leclanche Cell),Lead Storage
battery- Hydrogen –Oxygen fuel cell.

4. Corrosion
Introduction - factors influencing corrosion - composition, stress and concentration cells–rusting of
iron and its mechanism – prevention of corrosion by coating methods, cathodic protection methods.

5. Water technology
Introduction–soft and hard water–causes of hardness–types of hardness–disadvantages of hard water
– degree of hardness (ppm and mg/lit) – Numerical problems on hardness - softening methods – Ion-
Exchange process– Reverse Osmosis.

68
 6. Polymers & Engineering materials
Polymers: concept ofpolymerization – types of polymerization – addition, condensation with
examples – Preparation and uses of the following plastics i).PVC ii) Teflon iii) Polystyrene iv) Nylon 6,6
Elastomers: Preparation and application of the following elastomers i)Buna-s ii) Neoprene
Engineering materials:
Alloys-composition and applications of i) Nichrome, ii)Duralluminium iii) Stainless Steel.
Composite materials- Composition and applications of i) GFR ii) CFR
Liquid Crystals-types- applications of i) Nematic Crystals ii) Smectic cyrstals
Nano meterials- Composition and applications of i) Nanotubes ii) Nano crystals.

7. Fuels
Definition and classification of fuels–-composition and uses of i) LPG ii) CNG iii) Biogas iv) Power alchol.

8. ENVIRONMENTALSTUDIES
Environment –scope and importance of environmental studies – important terms related to
environment–renewable and non-renewable energy sources–Forest resources – Deforestation -Air
pollution–Global impacts on environment –Water pollution – causes – effects – control measures-E-
Pollution- Sources-health effects-control methods. Green Chemistry- Principles-Benefits

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for Unit Test- 1, Unit Test- 2 and Unit Test -3

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered

Unit Test - 1 From 1.1 to 2.8

Unit Test - 2 From 3.1 to 5.7

Unit Test - 3 From 6.1 to 8.10

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Telugu Academy Intermediate chemistry Vol. 1&2

2. Jain & Jain Engineering Chemistry
3. O.P. Agarwal, Hi- Tech. Engineering Chemistry
4. Sharma Engineering Chemistry
5. A.K. De Engineering Chemistry
ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING MATERIAL SCIENCE

Coursecod Course title No. of Total Mark Marks for

e periods/wee s for SA
no. of
k period FA

69
 s

ELECTRICAL
EE-105 ENGINEERING 04 120 20 80
MATERIAL SCIENCE

No.of
S.no Unit Title CO’S Mapped
Periods
Conducting Materials and
1 25 CO1
Semiconducting Materials

Insulating Materials and Di-

2 30 CO2
electric Materials

3 Magnetic Materials 15 CO3

Magnetic effects of Electric

4 Current and 30 CO4
Electromagnetic Induction

Electrostatics and
5 20 CO5
Capacitance

TOTAL 120

1) To familiarise with the knowledge of different electrical

engineering materials.
Course objectives 2) To comprehend the magnetic effects of electric current.
3) To know the concept of electro-magnetic induction and
electrostatic field.

Course CO1 EE-105.1 Explain the properties of different conducting and

semi-conducting materials and their applications

70
 CO2 EE-105.2 Analyze Insulating materials and dielectric materials

CO3 EE-105.3 Describe Magnetic materials and their properties

outcomes Comprehend the principles of Magnetic effects of

CO4 EE-105.4
Electric Current and Electromagnetic Induction

Understand the concepts of Electrostatics and

CO5 EE-105.5
Capacitance

LEARNING OUTCOMES
1. ConductingMaterials and Semiconducting Materials

1.1 Define Conducting Materials

1.2 State the properties of conducting materials
1.3Define the terms (i) Hardening (ii)Annealing
1.4 State the main requirements of (i) Low Resistivity Materials (ii) High resistivity materials
1.5 List some examples of i)Low Resistivity Materials ii)High Resistivity materials
1.6 Mention the Properties & Applications of Copper and Aluminium
1.7 Distinguish between Copper and Aluminium
1.8 Mention the properties & applications of ACSR Conductors and AAAC.
1.9 List the properties & Applications of High Resistive Materials of (i) Nichrome (ii) Tungsten
(iii) Carbon
1.10 Define Semiconducting materials
1.11 Classify Semiconductingmaterials
1.12 Define (i)IntrinsicSemiconductors and(ii)ExtrinsicSemiconductors
1.13 Distinguish between Intrinsic and Extrinsic semiconductors.
1.14 Explain the formation of (i) P – type semiconductor and (ii) N – type semiconductor
1.15 Distinguish between P and N typeSemiconductors

2. InsulatingMaterials and Di-electricmaterials

2.1 Define Insulating Materials
2.2 Draw energy level diagrams of conductors, insulators and semi-Conductors
2.3 Distinguish between Conductors, Insulators and Semiconductors
2.4 Define Insulation resistance and explain factors affecting insulationresistance
2.5 Classify insulatingmaterials
2.6 State the properties and applications of (i) Impregnated paper(ii) Wood (iii)Asbestos(iv)Mica(v )
Ceramics (vi) Glass
2.7 Explain the properties and applications ofPVC
2.8 State the effects of the following onP.V.C.
(i)Filler (ii)Stabilizer(iii)Plasticizer (iv)Additives.
2.9 Know the Permittivity of commonly used di – electric materials
(i) Air (ii)Bakelite (iii)Glass (iv)Mica (v)Paper (vi) Porcelain (vii) Transformer oil
2.10 Explain Polarization

71
 2.11 Explain Di-electric Loss
2.12 List any four applications ofDi-electrics

3. MagneticMaterials
3.1 Classify the Magnetic Materials
(i)Ferro (ii) Para (iii) Dia-Magnetic materials withexamples

3.2 Explain (i) Soft Magnetic materials (ii) Hard Magnetic materials
3.3 Draw (i) B-H Curve (ii) Hysteresis loop
3.4 Explain Hysteresis loop
3.5 Explain Hysteresis loss and State Steinmetz equation(No-Problems)
3.6 Explain Eddy CurrentLosses
3.7 State Curie point
3.8 DefineMagnetostriction

4. Magnetic effects of ElectricCurrent and Electromagnetic Induction

4.1 State Coulombs laws ofMagnetism

4.2 Define the terms Absolute and Relative Permeability ofmedium and give relation between
them
4.3 Explain the concept of lines of force & magneticfield
4.4 State Right hand Thumbrule
4.5 Draw the field patterns dueto
(i) Straight currentcarryingconductor (ii) Solenoid
4.6 State and list the applications of (i) Work law (ii) Biot-Savart’sLaw(Laplacelaw)
4.7 Explain the Mechanical force on a current carrying Conductor placed inside a Magneticfield.
4.8 Derive an expression for the magnitude of the force on a current carrying conductor
inside a magneticfield.
4.9 StateFleming’sLeftHandrule
4.10 Understand the concept of the Magneticcircuit and Define the terms MMF, Flux and
Reluctance
4.11 Compare Magnetic circuit with Electric circuit in differentaspects
4.12 Explain the effect of air gap in a magneticcircuit
IV.13 Explain the terms leakage flux and leakage co-efficient
IV.14 State Faraday’s laws of Electro-Magnetic Induction
IV.15 Explain Dynamically and Statically induced E.M.Fs
IV.16 State Lenz’s law
IV.17 Explain Fleming’s Right Hand rule
IV.18 State the concept of Self and Mutual inductance and write their expressions
IV.19 State Co-efficient of coupling
IV.20 Develop an expression for the energy stored in a magnetic field
5. Electrostatics andCapacitance

5.1 StateCoulomb’slawsofElectrostaticsandsolve the problems

5.2 Define the following terms

72
 (i) Unit Charge (ii) Absolute permittivity (iii) Relativepermittivity (iv) Electric Flux
(v) Flux Density (vi) Field intensity

5.3 Draw the field patterns dueto

i) Isolated positivecharge
ii) Isolated negativecharge
iii) Unlike charges placed side byside
iv) Like charges placed side byside
5.4 Compare Electrostatic and Magnetic lines of force in differentaspects.
5.5 Define the concept of electric potential and potentialdifference
5.6 Define Di-electric strength and Di-electricconstant
5.7 Give the permittivity of commonly used Di-electricmaterials
5.8 Define Capacitance and state factors affecting the capacitance of a capacitor
5.9 Derive the formula for capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor
5.10 State different types ofcapacitors with its uses
5.11 Derive an expression for equivalent capacitance
i) When two Capacitors are connected inseries
ii) When two Capacitors are connected inparallel
5.12 Derive an expression for the Energy stored in acapacitor

HYPONATED COURSE CONTENTS

1. Conducting Materials and Semiconducting materials:

Conducting Materials – Properties -Hardening, Annealing - Low Resistivity Materials – Requirements
– Properties and applications of Copper and Aluminium - Comparison between Copper and
Aluminium - ACSR Conductors, AAAC - High Resistive Materials – Requirements- Properties and
applications of Nichrome, Tungsten and Carbon-Semiconducting materials-classification-comparison
between intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors –Formation of P-type and N-type semiconductors-
comparison of P-type and N-type semiconductors.

2. Insulating Materials and Di-electric materials

Insulating materials – Energy level diagrams of Conductors, Insulators and Semiconductors -
Distinguish between Conductors, Insulators and Semiconductors-Factors effecting Insulation
resistance - Classification of Insulating materials - Properties & Applications of Impregnated Paper,
Wood, Asbestos, Mica, Ceramics, Glass - properties and applications of PVC- effects of the (i)Filler
(ii) Stabilizer (iii) Plasticizer (iv) Additives on P.V.C. - Permittivity of differentDi - electric materials-
Polarization - Dielectric Loss – Applications of Dielectrics.

3. Magnetic Materials
Classification of magnetic materials - Soft & Hard magnetic materials- B-H Curves - Hysteresis loop -
Hysteresis loss - Steinmetz equation - Eddy Current Loss -- Curie Point – Magnetostriction.

4. Magnetic effects of Electric Current and Electromagnetic Induction

Coulombs laws- Permeability - Lines of force – Right Hand Thumb rule - Field pattern due to (i)

73
 long straight current carrying conductor (ii) solenoid -Work Law and its applications – Biot Savart’s
Law (Laplace Law)- Mechanical force on a current carrying conductor placed inside a magnetic field -
Direction of force - Fleming’s Left Hand rule- Magnetic circuit- mmf - Flux - Reluctance - Comparison
of Magnetic circuit With Electric circuit - Magnetic leakage flux and leakage Co-
efficient.Faraday’slaws-DynamicallyandStaticallyinducedE.M.F-Lenz’sLaw&Fleming’sRight Hand rule
-Self and Mutual inductance - Co-efficient of coupling - Energy stored in a magnetic field.

5. Electrostatics andCapacitance

Coulomb’s Laws of Electrostatics–Permittivity, Electric flux, Flux density, Field intensity -

Electrostatic field patterns due to (i) Isolated positive charge (ii) Isolated negative charge(iii)Unlike
charges placed side byside (iv) Like charges placed side byside -Comparison of Electrostatic and
Magnetic lines of force - Concept of Electric potentialand Potential difference –Di-electric strength –
Di-electric constant - Capacitance – Factors affecting the Capacitance of Capacitor– capacitance of a
parallel plate capacitor - Types of Capacitors- Equivalent capacitance when connected in series and
parallel - Uses- Energy stored in a Capacitor.

REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Dr. K.Padmanabham - Electronic Components – Laxmi publications (P) Ltd.
2 Electrical Engineering Materials – N.I T.T.T.RPublications
3 B.K.Agarwal - Introduction to Engineering materials – Tata McGraw Hill Publishers
4 Ian P.Jones - Material science for Electrical and Electronic Engineers – Oxford Publications
5 B.L.Theraja – Electrical Technology, Vol.-1 – S.Chand & Co. Publications

74
 Blue print:

Marks wise Question wise

distribution of distribution of
weightage weightage
No. of
S. Weightage
period CO’S
No Unit title allocated A
s
R U R U Ap mapped
. P

Conducting
Materials and
1. 26 3 23 0 1 3 0 CO1
Semiconducting
25
Materials

Insulating
Materials and Di-
2. 26 3 23 0 1 3 0 CO2
electric
30
Materials

Magnetic
3. 15 13 3 10 0 1 1 0 CO3
Materials

Magnetic effects
of Electric
Current and 29 CO4
4. Electromagnetic 30 6 23 0 2 3 0
Induction

Electrostatics
20 16 3 3 10 1 1 1 CO5
5. and Capacitance

Total 120 110 18 82 10 6 11 1

Syllabus to be Covered for Unit Tests

Unit Test Learning Outcomes to be Covered

Unit Test – I From 1.1 to 2.6

Unit Test – II From 2.7 to 4.6

Unit Test – III From 4.7 to 5.12

75
 BASIC ELECTRICAL TECHNOLOGY

Total
No. of no. of Marks Marks
Coursecode Course title
periods/week for FA for SA
Periods

BASIC ELECTRICAL
EE-106 06 180 20 80
TECHNOLOGY

No.of
S.no Unit Title CO’S Mapped
Periods
1 Basic Principles of Electricity 35 CO1

2 Resistive Circuits 40 CO2

Work, Power, Energy and

3 Heating effects of Electric
Current 40 CO3

4 Conversion Techniques 25 CO4

5 Network Theorems 40 CO5

TOTAL 180

i. To understand the basic principles of Electricity and analysing resistive

circuits.
Course Objectives ii. To comprehend the heating effects of electriccurrent
iii. To analyse various DC network theorems.

CO1 EE-106.1 Understand basic principles of electricity

Familiarise with various laws and analysis of resistive

CO2 EE-106.2
circuits

Understand work, power, energy concepts and heating

Course CO3 EE-106.3
effects of Electric current
outcomes
Analyse various electric circuit source conversion
CO4 EE-106.4
techniques

CO5 EE-106.5 Analyse various DC network theorems

76
 LEARNING OUTCOMES

1. Basic Principles of Electricity

1.1 Define Electric Current, Potential difference, Voltage and EMF
1.2 State Ohm’s Law and solve problems
1.3 List the limitations of Ohm’s Law
1.4 Define the terms
i) Specific resistance ii)Conductance iii)Conductivity

1.5 Derive the relation R = ρl /a and solve the problems

1.6 Explain the effects of temperature on resistance
1.7 Develop the expression for resistance at any temperature as R t = Ro (1+αot)
1.8 Define temperature Co-efficient of resistance and give its unit
α0
1.9 Write the formula for Co-efficient of resistance at any temperaturesα t =
1+α 0 t

2. Resistive Circuits

II.1 Develop the expressions for equivalent Resistance with simple SERIES and
PARALLELconnections
II.2 Solve problems on equivalent resistance in case of Series- Parallel networks
II.3 State the concept of division of current when two Resistors are connected in parallel and
solve the problems
II.4 Differentiate between active and passive circuits.
II.5Define junction, branch and loop in circuits
II.6State (i) Kirchhoff’s current law (KCL) ( ii) Kirchhoff’s voltage law (KVL)
II.7Solve problems by applying branch current method only

3. Work, Power, Energy and Heating effects of Electric Current

3.1State and explain electric Work, Power and Energy

3.2Solve problems on Work, Power and Energy
3.3Mention the typical power ratings of home appliances like Electric lamps(Incandescent,
fluorescent, CFL & LED), Water heater, Electric Iron, Fans, Refrigerators, Air and Water
coolers, Television sets, Air Conditioners, Water Pumps, Computers, Printers etc.
3.4Calculate Electricity bill of domestic consumers as per the Electricity Tariff
3.5Define Joule’s law and state its expression.
3.6Define Thermal efficiency
3.7Solve problems on Electric heating
3.8Explain the applications of heat produced due to Electric current in
(i) Metal Filament lamp (ii) Electric kettle (iii) Electric Cooker (iv) Geyser

4. Conversion Techniques

4.1Explain star and delta circuits

4.2Explain the concept of circuit transformation and equivalent circuits

77
 4.3Develop transformation formulae for star- delta transformations and vice-versa
4.4Solve problems on Star Delta Transformation.
4.5Explain ideal voltage source & ideal current source
4.6Explain Source transformation technique
4.7Solve simple problems on Source transformation technique

5. NetworkTheorems

5.1 State the need for network theorems

5.2 list different types of theorems applied to DC circuits
5.3 State Super positiontheorem.
5.4 State Thevenin’stheorem.
5.5 State Norton’stheorem
5.6 State Maximum power transfer theorem.
5.7 Solve problems on the above theorems (All the theorems with reference to D.Conly)

HYPONATED COURSE CONTENTS

1. Basic Principles ofElectricity

Electric current – Electric Potential, Potential difference, voltage and EMF - Ohm’slaw and its
limitations –Resistance– Specific Resistance –Conductance- Conductivity – effects of
temperature on resistance- Temperature coefficient of Resistance.

2. Resistive Circuits
Resistances in series, parallel and series-parallelcombinations -concept of division of current
when two Resistors are connected in parallel - active and passive circuits-junction, branch, loop
– KCL& KVL.

3. Work, Power &Energy and Magnetic Effects of Electric Current

Units of electric Work, Power and Energy.– Ratings of different Domestic Appliances -Calculation
of Electricity bill of Domestic Consumer – Mechanical Equivalent of Heat (Joules Law) -Thermal
Efficiency - Heat produced due to flow of Current in Metal Filament lamps, Electrical Kettle,
Electric Cooker, Geyser

4. Conversion Techniques
Star and delta circuits-ideal voltage source & ideal currentsource -source transformation- Star-
Delta& Delta-Star Transformations.

5. NetworkTheorems
Need for network theorems-superposition theorem-Thevenin’s Theorem- Norton’s theorem-
Maximum transfer theorem.

78
 REFERENCE BOOKS
1) B.L.Theraja – Electrical Technology, Vol.-1 – S.Chand & Co. Publications
2) V. K .Mehta-Introduction to ElectricalEngg
3) J.B.Gupta –A course in Electrical Technology – KATSON BOOKS
4) G.B.Bharadhwajan & A. SubbaRao -Elements of Electrical Engineering.
5) William H. Hayt – Engineering Circuit Analysis–Tata McGraw - Hill

Blue print:

Question
wise
Marks wise
distribution
distribution of
of
No. weightage CO’S
Weightag mapped
S.No of weightage
Unit title e
. perio
allocated A A
d R U R U
p p

Basic
Principles of 35 19 1 CO1
1. 6 3 2 1 1
Electricity 0

Resistive 2
2. 40 23 3 0 1 0 2 CO2
Circuits 0

Work, Power,
Energy and
Heating effects 2
3. of Electric 40 29 6 3 2 1 2
Current 0 CO3

Conversion 1
4. 25 13 3 0 1 0 1 CO4
Techniques 0

Network 2
5. 40 3 3 1 1 2
Theorems 0 CO5
26

2 8
Total 180 110 9 7 3 8
1 0

Syllabus to be Covered for Unit Tests

Unit Test Learning Outcomes to be Covered

Unit Test – I From 1.1 to 2.4

79
 Unit Test – II From 2.5 to 4.2

Unit Test – III From 4.3 to 5.7

ENGINEERING DRAWING

No. of
Total No. of
Course code Course Title periods Marks for FA Marks for SA
periods
/week

ENGINEERING
EE-107 3 90 40 60
DRAWING

S.No Unit Title No. of periods CO’s Mapped

Use of Drawing Instruments, Free Hand

1 10 CO1
Lettering and Dimensioning Practice

2 Principles of Geometric Constructions 15 CO2

Projections of points, lines, planes and

3 20 CO3
solids

4 Sectional Views 20 CO4

5 Orthographic projection 25 CO5

Total 90

Course Objectives and Course Outcomes

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to understand

Course
the basic graphic skills and use them in preparation, reading and
Objectives
interpretation of engineering drawings.

80
 Practice the use of engineering drawing instruments and
CO1 EE-107.1 Familiarise with the conventions to be followed in engineering
drawing as per BIS

Construct the i) basic geometrical constructions ii) engineering

Course CO2 EE-107.2
curves
Outcomes
Visualise and draw the projections of i) Points ii) Lines iii)
CO3 EE-107.3
Regular Planes iv) Regular Solids

CO4 EE-107.4 Visualise and draw the sectional views of components

CO5 EE-107.5 Visualise and draw the orthographic projections of components

LEARNING OUTCOMES
Upon completion of the course the student shall able to

1.0 Use of Drawing Instruments, Free Hand Lettering and Dimensioning Practice

1.1 State the importance of drawing as an engineering communication medium

1.2 Select the correct instruments to draw the different lines / curves.
1.3 Use correct grade of pencil and other instruments to draw different types of lines and for
different purposes
1.4 Identify the steps to be taken to keep the drawing clean and tidy.
1.5 Write titles using vertical and slopping (inclined) lettering and numerals of 7mm, 10mm and
14mm height.
1.6 Acquaint with the conventions, notations, rules and methods of dimensioning in
engineering drawing as per the B.I.S.
1.7 Dimension a given drawing using standard notations and desired system of dimensioning.

2.0 Principles of Geometric Constructions

2.1 Practice the basic geometric constructions like i) dividing a line into equal parts
i) Exterior and interior tangents to the given two circles
ii) Tangent arcs to two given lines and arcs
2.2 Draw any regular polygon using general method when i) side length is given
i) Inscribing circle radius is given ii) describing circle radius is given
2.3 Draw the engineering curves like i) involute ii) cycloid

3.0 Projections of points, lines, planes and solids (All in first quadrant only)

81
 3.1 Explain the basic principles of the orthographic projections
3.2 Visualise and draw the projection of a point with respect to reference planes (HP&VP)
3.3 Visualise and draw the projections of straight lines with respect to two reference
Planes (up to lines parallel to one plane and inclined to other plane)
3.4 Visualise and draw the projections of planes (up to planes perpendicular to one plane and
inclined to other plane)
3.5 Visualise and draw the projections of regular solids like Prisms, Pyramids, Cylinder,
Cone(up to axis of solids parallel to one plane and inclined to other plane)

4.0 Sectional Views

4.1 Identify the need to draw sectional views.

4.2 Draw sectional views of regular solids by applying the principles of hatching.

5.0 Orthographic projection

5.1 Draw the orthographic views of an object from its pictorial drawing.
5.2 Draw the minimum number of views needed to represent a given object fully.

Competencies and Key competencies to be achieved by the student

S.No Major topic Key Competency

 Explain the linkages between Engineering

drawing and other subjects of study in
Diploma course.
 Select the correct instruments to draw
1. Use of Drawing Instruments, Free various entities in different orientation
Hand Lettering and Dimensioning
 Write titles using sloping and vertical
Practice
lettering and numerals as per B.I.S (Bureau of
Indian standards)
 Dimension a given drawing using standard
notations and desired system of
dimensioning
 Dividing a line into equal parts, tangents to
2. Geometrical construction circles, Construct involute, cycloid from the
given data.

Projection of points, Lines,  Draw the projections of points, straight lines,

3.
Planes & Solids planes & solids with respect to reference
planes (HP& VP)
 Differentiate between true shape and
4. Sectional Views apparent shape of section
 Apply principles of hatching.
 Draw simple sections of regular solids
5. Orthographic Projection  Draw the minimum number of views needed
to represent a given object fully.

82
 COURSE CONTENTS:

NOTES:1. B.I.S Specification should invariably be followed in all the topics.

2. A-3 Size Drawing Sheets are to be used for all Drawing Practice Exercises.

1.0 Use of Drawing Instruments, Free Hand Lettering and Dimensioning Practice

Explanation of the scope and objectives of the subject of Engineering Drawing . Its importance as
a graphic communication -Need for preparing drawing as per standards – SP-46 –1988 –
Mention B.I.S - Role of drawing in -engineering education - Basic Tools, tools for drawing–
Mentioning of names under each classification and their brief description -Scales: Recommended
scales reduced & enlarged -Lines: Types of lines, selection of line thickness - Selection of Pencils -
Sheet Sizes: A0, A1, A2, A3, A4, A5, Layout of drawing sheets in respect of A0, A1, A3 sizes, Sizes
of the Title block and its contents - Care and maintenance of Drawing Sheet,

Importance of lettering – Types of lettering -Guide Lines for LetteringPracticing of letters &
numbers of given sizes (7mm, 10mm and 14mm)-Advantages of single stroke or simple style of
lettering - Use of lettering stencils- Purpose of engineering Drawing, Need of B.I.S code in
dimensioning -Shape description of an Engineering object -Definition of Dimensioning size
description -Location of features, surface finish, fully dimensioned Drawing -Notations or tools of
dimensioning, dimension line extension line, leader line, arrows, symbols, number and notes,
rules to be observed in the use of above tools -Placing dimensions: Aligned system and
unidirectional system ( SP-46-1988)-Arrangement of dimensions Chain, parallel, combined
progressive, and dimensioning by co-ordinate methods-The rules for dimensioning standard,
features “Circles (holes) arcs, angles, tapers, chamfers, and dimension of narrow spaces.

2.0 Geometric Constructions

Division of a straight line into given number of equal parts –Drawing interior and exterior
tangents to two circles of given radii and centre distance-Drawing tangent arc of given radius to
touch two lines inclined at given angle (acute, right and obtuse angles), Tangent arc of given
radius touching a circle or an arc and a given line, Tangent arcs of radius R, touching two given
circles internally and externally-Construction of any regular polygon by general method for given
side length, inscribing circle radius and describing/superscripting circle radius - Involute, Cycloid,
explanations as locus of a moving point, their engineering application, viz., Gear tooth profile,
screw threads, springs etc. – their construction

3.0 Projection of points, lines and planes and Solids (All in first quadrant only)

Classification of projections, Observer, Object, Projectors, Projection, Reference Planes,

Reference Line, Various angles of projections –Differences between first angle and third angle
projections

83
 Projections of points -Projections of straight line –(a) Parallel to both the planes,
(b)Perpendicular to one of the planes and (c) Inclined to one plane and parallel to other planes-
Projections of regular planes-(a) Plane parallel to one of the reference planes, (b) Plane
perpendicular to HP and inclined to VP and vice versa- Projections of regular solids- (a) Axis
perpendicular to one of the planes, (b) Axis parallel to VP and inclined to HP and vice versa.

4.0 Sectional Views

Need for drawing sectional views – what is a sectional view - Hatching – Section of regular solids
inclined to one plane and parallel to other plane

5.0 Orthographic Projections

Meaning of orthographic projection - Using a viewing box and a model – Number of views
obtained on the six faces of the box, - Legible sketches of only 3 views for describing object -
Concept of front view, top view, and side view sketching these views for a number of
engineering objects - Explanation of first angle projection. – Positioning of three views in First
angle projection -Projection of points as a means of locating the corners of the surfaces of an
object – Use of meter line in drawing a third view when other two views are given -Method of
representing hidden lines -Selection of minimum number of views to describe an object fully.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 Engineering Graphics by P I Varghese – ( McGraw-hill)

2 Engineering Drawing by Basant Agarwal & C.M Agarwal - ( McGraw-hill)
3 Engineering Drawing by N.D.Bhatt.
4 T.S.M. & S.S.M on “ Technical Drawing” prepared by T.T.T.I., Madras.
5 SP-46-1998 – Bureau of Indian Standards.

84
Blue Print

Question
Marks wise
wise CO’S
No. of Weightage distribution
S.No Unit Title distribution of Mapped
Periods Allocated of weightage
weightage

R U AP R U AP

Use of Drawing
Instruments, Free
1 10 10 05 05 00 01 01 00 CO1
Hand Lettering and
Dimensioning Practice

Principles of Geometric
2 15 15 00 00 15 00 00 02 CO2
Constructions

Projections of points,
3 20 25 00 00 25 00 00 03 CO3
lines, planes and solids

4 Sectional Views 20 10 00 00 10 00 00 01 CO4

Orthographic
5 25 20 00 00 20 00 00 02 CO5
projection

Total 90 80 05 05 70 01 01 08

Table specifying syllabus to be covered for UNIT TEST I, II and III.

Unit Test Learning Outcomes to be Covered

Unit Test – I From 1.1 to 2.3

Unit Test – II From 3.1 to 3.5

Unit Test – III From 4.1 to 5.2

85
 ELECTRICAL WIRING LABORATORY

Course Course title No. of Total Marks Marks for

code periods/ no.of for FA SA

week periods

ELECTRICAL WIRING
EE-108 06 180 40 60
LABORATORY

S.no Chapter Title No.of CO’S Mapped

Periods

1 Wiring tools and

20 CO1
Accessories

2 Electrical Wiring Joints and Soldering

30 CO2
Practice

3 Lamp Circuits 50 CO3

4 DC and AC circuits 40 CO4

5 Test and repair of domestic appliances 40 CO5

TOTAL 180

1) To familiarise with the knowledge of different wiring tools used in

electricalwiring
Course objectives 2) To know the etiquette of working in the domesticwiring
3) To identify and rectify the simple faults that can occur in domestic
appliances

86
 CO1 EE-108.1 Understanding various tools and know their usage

Perform different joints, Soldering practice and

CO2 EE-108.2
execute different wiring circuits

Course outcomes CO3 EE-108.3 Perform various lamp control methods

CO4 EE-108.4 Identify the difference between DC and AC

CO5 EE-108.5 Testing and repairing of domestic applications.

LEARNING OUTCOMES

1. Wiring Tools andAccessories

1.1 Identify the following electrical wiring tools with respect to i)Size ii)Shape iii)Purpose

iv)Speed v) Use

a) Screw drivers
b) Pliers
c) Drilling machines & DrillingBits.
d) Rawl plug jumper, andpoker
e) Voltage/linetester
f) Splicers (insulationremover)
g) Standard Wiregauge

1.2 Identify different types of Electrical Wiring accessories with respect to i)Size ii)Shape

iii)Purpose iv)Use.

a) Switches
b) Ceilingroses
c) Lamp Holders andAdopters
d) Sockets
e) Plug
f) Fuses

1.3 Identify different types of main switches with respect to i)Ratingii)Purpose iii)Use.

SP,DP mains, TP,ICDP, ICTP, SPDT, DPDT, TPDT, Changeover-Knife type, Rotary, Micro, Modular
switches, 2-pole and 3-pole MCBs

1.4 Study different types of wires and cables (1/18,3/20,7/20) with respect to sizes rating, purpose
and useetc
2. Electrical WiringJoints and Soldering Practice

87
2.1 Prepare Straight joint/ Marriedjoint
2.2 Prepare Tjoint
2.3 Prepare Western unionjoint
2.4 Prepare Pigtailjoint
2.5 Familiarisation to use soldering tools and components
2.6 Soldering simple electronic circuits on PCB

3. LampCircuits

3.1 Make a circuit with One lamp controlled by one switch using PVC surface conduitsystem
3.2 Make a circuit with Two lamps controlled by two switches using PVC surface conduitsystem
3.3 Make a circuit with One lamp controlled by one switch and provision of 2/3-pinsocket.
3.4 Make a circuit for Stair-casewiring
3.5 Make a circuit for Go-downwiring
3.6 Control two Lamps by Series - Parallel connection using one 1-way switch & two 2-way
switches with PVC surface conduitsystem
3.7 Controltwosub-circuitsthroughEnergymeter,MCB’sandtwo1-wayswitches.
3.8 Prepare switch board with star delta starter, MCB, Pilot lamps for 3 phasemotor
3.9 Control and practice the wiring for FluorescentLamp
3.10 Connect Computer by main switch board with a miniature circuitbreaker.

4. DC and ACcircuits

4.1 Demonstrate unidirectional current flow with 12 Vbattery

4.2 Determine polarity using a Voltmeter/LED
4.3 Demonstrate AC using a Low voltageTransformer
4.4 Practice Series and Parallel connection ofLamps
4.5 Practice Bright and Dim light arrangement

5. Test and repair of the Domesticappliances

5.1 Testing and repair of electricheater

5.2 Testing and repair of iron box
5.3 Testing and repair of electric kettle
5.4 Testing and repair of electric cocker
5.5 Testing and repair of electric geyser

88
Competencies to be achieved by the Student:

S.No Competencies Key Competencies

Handle the differentwiringtools Identify the size and specifications of various

andaccessories tools used for electricalwiring.
1  Understand the usage of the standard
a) selectswitches,andMCB’s wiregauge.
b) Identify wiresandcables as Identify the type, size and specifications of DP
per the requirements of mains,
theload.

To prepare a Straight  Identify the size of thecable

joint/Married joint using a 7/20  Perform splicing of Insulationproperly.
2.1  Perform Straight joint/Marriedjoint
Al. Cable

To prepare a T joint using a 7/20 Insert the leads of the wires properly as per the
2.2 sketches.
Al. Cable
 Twist the wiresproperly.
To prepare a Western union  Overlap the two wiresproperly
2.3
joint using a single strand Al.  Twist the binding wiresproperly
Cable

To prepare a Pig tail joint using a  Place the wires inV-shape.

2.4
single strand Copper Cable  Twist the wires in clock wisedirection.

To Familiarise various soldering  Identifying Soldering gun, flux, lead

2.5
tools and components

To solder simple electronic  Draw the layout of circuit

2.6
circuits on PCB  Carefully Soldering the circuit on PCB.

To control one lamp by one 1-  Draw wiringdiagram

way switch with PVC surface  Identify the size of cable, PVC pipe, type of1-way
3.1 conduit wiring system switch and lampholder.
 Make Connections as per WiringDiagram
To control two lamps by two 1-  Draw wiringdiagram
way switches w\ith PVC surface  Handle the screw driver, electrician Knife, line
conduit wiring system tester to fix the PVC pipe using saddles and
junctionboxes.
3.2  Select colour and length of wire for phase and
neutral
 Switch on the supply after making of the
connections
 Disconnect the circuit aftertesting.
3.3 To control one lamp and 2/3 pin  Connect 2/3 pin socket properly with respect to

89
 socket by two1-way switches phase, neutral andearth.
with PVC surface conduit wiring  Connect phase wire throughswitches.
system

 Select two 2-wayswitches

 Connect 2- way switches as per circuitdiagram.
3.4 Stair-case wiring  Test with 1-phase, 230V, 50 Hz supply to the
circuit connected through ICDPswitch.
 Draw wiringdiagram
 Connect the circuit as per thediagram.
 Observe sequence of operation ofswitches
 Test with 1-phase,230 V,50 Hz supply to the
3.5 Go-down wiring scheme circuit, neutral wire to the bottom point of the
1- way switch and phase to the first point of
lamp holder
Select colour and length of wire for phase and
neutral.
Series-Parallel connection Make connections as per wiringdiagram.
Draw wire through PVC pipeproperly
3.6 Observe glow intensity of lamps for series and
parallelconnections
 Draw wiringdiagram.
 Identify the size of cable,1-way switch, PVC pipe,
Control two sub circuits through MCB, capacity of Inverter andSocket
Energymeter,MCB’sandtwo1- way  Read the specifications of MCB, capacity of
3.7 switches Inverter andSocket
 Make connections as per wiringdiagram.
 Draw wire through PVC pipeproperly.
 Connect supply to Inverter through MCBproperly.
 Select appropriate socket with switchcontrol.
 Make earth wire connections for requiredpoints.

 Select the size of cable, PVC pipe, star-delta

starter, MCB and lampholder
 Make connections as per wiringdiagram.
 Draw wire through PVC pipeproperly.
Prepare switch board with star  Draw wire of the 3-phase to the motor through
delta starter, MCB, Pilot lamps star-delta starter.
3.8 for 3 phase motor  Test with 3-phase, 415 V, 50 Hz supply to the
circuit connected through ICDPswitch.
 Test by changing any two phases of inputsupply

Make connections as per wiringdiagram.

Connect top point and bottom point of the
3.9 Wiring practice of fluorescent choke to tube lightproperly.
lamp Note the importance and working ofstarter.

90
 Draw wiringdiagram.
Identify the size of cable, 1-way switch, PVC
Connect computer by main pipe, MCB andSockets
switch board with a miniature Read the specifications of MCB andSockets
3.10 circuit breaker. Make connections as per wiringdiagram.
Connect supply to Computer through MCB
properly.
Select appropriate sockets with 1-way switch
control.
Make earth wire connections for requirepoints.
Demonstrate difference  Connect DC source and measure V &I
4.1
between DC and AC  Connect proper AC source and measure V&I
 Makeinferences.
 Inspect the appliancevisually.
 Check for anydiscrepancies.
Testing and repair of domestic  Perform the disassemblingoperation
appliances  Test the inner parts for anyfaults
5.1  Rectify the faults if any.
 Replace the parts ifnecessary.
 Perform theassembling.
 Test theDomestic appliance for proper
functioning.

Note:
1. Every student has to bring insulated tool kit and follow the general safety precautions
throughout the labsessions
2. Should not touch the live terminals.

91
 PHYSICS LABORATORY

No. of
Course Total No. Marks Marks
Course Title Periods/Week
code of periods for FA for SA
s

EE-109 PHYSICS LABORATORY 3 45 40 60

TIMESCHEDULE

S.No List of experiments No.of

Periods
1. Vernier calipers 03

2. Micrometer (Screw gauge) 03

3. Verification of Lami’s theorem using concurrent forces 03

4. Determination of g using simple pendulum 03

5. Focal length and power of convex lens 03

6. Refractive index of solid using travelling microscope 03

7. Verification of Boyle’s law using Quill tube 03

8 Determination of pole strength of the bar magnet through magnetic field lines 03

9 Resonance apparatus – Determination of velocity of sound in air 03

Experiments for demonstration

10 Meter bridge – Determination of resistance and specific resistance of a wire 03

11 Verification of Newton’s law of cooling 03

12 Photo electric cell – Study of its characteristics 03

Revision 06
Test 03
Total: 45

(1) To provide strong practical knowledge of Physics to serve as a tool

for various device applications in Engineering.
Course
objectives (2) To enhance scientific skills of the students by incorporating new
experiments so as to enrich the technical expertise of the students as
required for industries.

92
 Improving accuracy in various measurements;
understanding the nature of the forces keeping the
CO1 body in equilibrium.

Estimating the acceleration caused by the gravity of

earth; Practical study of the concepts of refraction of
CO2 light at curved/plane surface

COURSE Understanding the pressure of the gas as function of its

OUTCOMES volume; study of the combined magnetic field of the
CO3 earth and an artificial magnet to estimate its pole
strength; Estimating the velocity of sound in air through
resonance phenomenon.

Applying Kirchoff’s laws to evaluate the specific

resistance of a wire; Study of exchange of heat from
CO4 system to surrounding by graphical analysis;
Conversion of light to micro currents as potential
engineering application.

Objectives:

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

1.0 Practise with Vernier calipers to determine the volumes of a cylinder and sphere..

2.0 Practise with Screw gauge to determine thickness of a glass plate and cross sectional
area of a wire.

3.0 Verify the Lami’s theorem using concurrent forces.

4.0 Determine the value of acceleration due to gravity using Simple Pendulum. To verify the
result from l-T2 graph.

5.0 Calculate the Focal length and focal power of convex lens using distant object method,
U-V method , U-V graph and 1 / U – 1 / V graph methods.

6.0 Determine the refractive index of a solid using travelling microscope

7.0 Verify the Boyle’s law using Quill tube. To draw a graph between P and 1/l.

8.0 Determination of magnetic pole strength of a bar magnet by drawing magnetic lines of
93
 force and locating null points (either N-N or N-S method)

9.0 Determine the velocity of sound in air at room temperature and its value at zero degree
centigrade.

10.0 Determine the resistance and specific resistance of material of a wire using Meter Bridge

11.0 To verify the Newton’s law of cooling.

12..0 To study the characteristics of photo electric cell.

S.No List of experiments No.of COs

Periods
1. Vernier calipers 03
CO1
2. Micrometer (Screw gauge) 03

3. Verification of Lami’s theorem using concurrent forces 03

4. Determination of g using simple pendulum 03

CO2
5. Focal length and power of convex lens 03

6. Refractive index of solid using travelling microscope 03

7. Verification of Boyle’s law using Quill tube 03

CO3
8 Determination of pole strength of the bar magnet through magnetic 03
field lines
9 Resonance apparatus – Determination of velocity of sound in air 03

10 Meter bridge – Determination of resistance and specific resistance of a 03

wire CO4
11 Verification of Newton’s law of cooling 03

12 Photo electric cell – Study of its characteristics 03

94
Competencies and Key competencies to be achieved by the student

Name of the
Competencies Key competencies
Experiment
(No of Periods)  Find the Least count  Read the scales
1. Hands on practice on
 Fix the specimen in posit  Calculate the
Vernier Calipers(03)
 Read the scales requisite physical
 Calculate the physical quantities of quantities of given
given object
objects
 Find the Least count  Read the scales
 Fix the specimen in posit  Calculate thickness of
 Read the scales given glass plate
2. Hands on practice on
 Calculate thickness of glass place
Screw gauge(03)  Calculate cross section
and cross section of wire and
other quantities of wire and other
quantities

 Fix suitable weights

 Note the positions of threads on  Find the angle at
drawing sheet equilibrium point
3. Verification of  Find the angle at equilibrium point  Constructing
Parallelogram law of  Construct parallelogram parallelogram
forces and Triangle law of  Compare the measured diagonal  Construct triangle
forces(03)
 Construct triangle  Compare the ratios of
 Find the length of sides force and length
 Compare the ratios

 Find the time for

 Fix the simple pendulum to the number of oscillations
stand  Find the time period
 Adjust the length of pendulum  Calculate the
 Find the time for number of acceleration due to
4. Simple pendulum(03) oscillations gravity
 Find the time period  Draw l-T and l-T2 graph
 Calculate the acceleration due to
gravity
 Draw l-T and l-T2 graph

95
 CHEMISTRY LABORATORY

No. of
Course Total No. Marks Marks
Course Title Periods/Week
code of periods for FA for SA
s

Chemistry
EE-110 3 45 40 60
Laboratory

CO1 Operate and practice volumetric apparatus and preparation

of standard solution
CO2 Evaluate and judge the neutralization point in acid base
titration
CO3 Evaluate the end point of reduction and oxidation reaction
CO4 Judge the stable end point of complex formation, stable
precipitation
CO5 Judge operate and demonstrate and perform precise
operations with instrument for investigation of water
pollution parameters

PO- CO mapping

Course
code Chemistry Laboratory
No Of periods 45
Common- No of Cos:5
110
POs Mapped with CO CO periods addressing Leve remarks
No PO in Col 1NO % l
1,2,3
PO1 CO1,CO2,CO3, 12 26.66 2 >40% level 3 (highly
CO4,CO5 addressed) 25% to
PO2 CO1,CO2,CO3, 9 20 1 40%
CO4,CO5 level2(moderately
PO3 addressed 5% to 25%
PO4 CO1,CO2,CO3, 12 26.66 2 level1 (Low addressed
CO4,CO5 < 5%(not addressed)
PO5 CO2,CO3, 12 26.66 2
CO4,CO5
PO6
PO7

96
 TIMESCHEDULE

No. of Mapped
S.No Name of the Experiment with
Periods
COs
a) 1.
Recognition of chemical substances and solutions used in the
laboratory by senses. CO1
03
b) Familiarization of methods for Volumetricanalysis
Preparation
2. of Std Na2CO3 and making solutions of different dilution solution. 03 CO1
3. Estimation of HCl solution using Std.Na2CO3 solution 03 CO2
4. Estimation of NaOH using Std.HCl solution 03 CO2
Determination
5 of acidity of water sample 03 CO2
Determination
6 of alkalinity of water sample 03 CO2
Estimation
7. of Mohr’s Salt using Std.KMnO4 03 CO3
Estimation
8. of Ferrous ion by using Std. K2Cr2O7 03 CO3
Determination
9. of total hardness of water using Std. EDTA solution 03 CO4
Estimation
10. of Chlorides present in water sample 03 CO4
Estimation
11. of Dissolved Oxygen(D.O )in water sample 03 CO5
12. Determination of pH using pH meter 03 CO5
13 Determination of conductivity of water and adjusting ionic strength 03 CO5
. 03 CO5
14. Determination of turbidity of water
15. Estimation of total solids present in water sample 03 CO5
Total: 45

Objectives:
Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

1.0 Practice volumetric measurements (using pipettes, measuring jars, volumetric flask, burettes) and
gravimetric measurements (using different types of balances), making dilutions, etc. To identify the
chemical compounds and solutions by senses.
2.0 Practice making standard solutions with pre weighed salts and to make solutions of desired
dilutions using appropriate techniques.
3.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures and using Std. Na2CO3solutionfor estimation of HCl
4.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures and using Std. HCl solution for estimation of NaOH
5.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures to determine the acidity of given samples of water
(One ground water and one surface / tap water, and rain water if available)
6.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures to determine the alkalinity of given samples of
97
 water (One ground water and one surface / tap water)
7.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures and using Std.KMnO4 solution for estimation of
Mohr’sSalt
8.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures and using Std.K2Cr2O7 solution for estimation of
Ferrous ion.

9.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures to determine the total hardness of given samples
of water (One ground water and one surface / tap water) using Std. EDTA solution
10.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures to determine the chlorides present in the given
samples of water and wastewater (One ground water and one surface / tap water)
11.0 Conduct the test using titrometric / electrometric method to determine Dissolved Oxygen (D.O) in
given water samples (One sample from closed container and one from open container / tap water)
12.0 Conduct the test on given samples of water / solutions (like soft drinks, sewage, etc.) to determine
their pH using standard pH meter
13.0 Conduct the test on given samples of water / solutions
a) To determine conductivity
b) To adjust the ionic strength of the sample to the desired value
14.0 Conduct the test on given samples of solutions (coloured and non- coloured) to determine their
turbidity in NTU
15.0 To determine the total solids present in given samples of water (One ground water and one
surface / tap water)

98
Competencies and Key competencies to be achieved by the student

Name of the Experiment

Competencies Key competencies
(No of Periods)
Familiarization of methods
for Volumetric
-
analysis.Recognition of
--
chemical substances And
solutions(03)

 Weighing the salt to the

 Weighing the salt to the accuracy of .01 mg
accuracy of .01 mg  Measuring the water
Preparation of Std Na2CO3  Measuring the water with with volumetric flask,
and making solutions of volumetric flask, measuring jar, measuring jar, volumetric
different dilution(03) volumetric pipetteand graduated pipette and graduated
pipette pipette
 Making appropriate dilutions  Making appropriate
dilutions

Estimation of HCl solution  Cleaning the glassware and  Making standard

using Std. Na2CO3solution rinsing with appropriate solutions
(03)
solutions  Measuring accurately the
Estimation of NaOH using
 Making standard solutions standard solutions and
Std.HCl solution (03)
 Measuring accurately the titrants
Determination of acidity of
water sample (03) standard solutions and titrants  Effectively Controlling the
 Filling the burette with titrant flow of the titrant
Determination of alkalinity
of water sample (03)  Fixing the burette to the stand  Identifying the end point
Estimation of Mohr’s Salt  Effectively Controlling the  Making accurate
using Std.KMnO4 (03)
flow of the titrant observations
Estimation of Ferrous ion by  Identifying the end point
using Std.K2Cr2O7 (03)
 Making accurate observations
Determination of total
hardness of water using  Calculating the results
Std.EDTA solution (03)

99
 Estimation of Chlorides
present in water sample
(03)
Estimation of Dissolved
Oxygen(D.O) in water
sample (By titration
method) (03)
 Familiarize with
Determination of pH using
instrument
pH meter (03)
 Choose appropriate  Prepare standard
Determination of ‘Mode’ / ‘Unit’ solutions / buffers, etc.
conductivity of water and  Prepare standard  Standardize the
adjusting ionic strength to solutions / buffers, etc. instrument with
required level (03)  Standardize the appropriate standard
instrument with appropriate solutions
standard solutions  Plot the standard
 Plot the standard curve curve
Determination of turbidity  Make measurements  Make measurements
of water (03) accurately accurately
 Follow Safety precautions

 Measuring the accurate

volume and weight of  Measuring the
sample accurate volume and
 Filtering and air drying weight of sample
Estimation of total solids without losing any filtrate  Filtering and air
present in water sample  Accurately weighing the drying without losing
(03) filter paper, crucible and any filtrate
filtrate  Accurately weighing
 Drying the crucible in an the filter paper, crucible
oven and filtrate

SCHEME OF VALUATION

A) Writing Chemicals, apparatus ,principle and procedure 5M

B) Demonstrated competencies 20M
Making standard solutions
Measuring accurately the standard solutions and titrants
Effectively controlling the flow of the titrant
Identifying the end point
Making accurate observations
C) Viva-voce 5M
Total 30M

100
 COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS LABORATORY

No. of
Course Total No. of Marks for Marks for
Course Title Periods/Week
code periods FA SA
s

COMPUTER
EE-111 FUNDAMENTALS 3 90 40 60
LABORATORY

Time schedule:
No.of sessions
S.No. Chapter/Unit Title each of 3 periods No. of Periods
duration
1. Computer hardware Basics 2 6

2. Windows Operating System 2 6

3. MS Word 8 24

4. MS Excel 7 21

5. MS PowerPoint 5 15

6 Adobe Photoshop 6 18

Total periods 30 90

S.No. Chapter/Unit Title No.of Periods CO’s Mapped

1. Computer hardware Basics 6 CO1

2. Windows Operating System 6 CO1

3. MS Word 24 CO2

4. MS Excel 21 CO3

5. MS PowerPoint 15 CO4

101
 6 Adobe Photoshop 18 CO5

Total periods 90

i)To know Hardware Basics

ii)To familiarize operating systems
Course iii)To use MS Office effectively to enable to students use these skills in future
Objectives courses
iv) To use Adobe Photoshop in image editing.

At the end of the course students will be able to

CO1 CM-111.1 Identify hardware and software components

CO2 CM-111.2 Prepare documents with given specifications using

word processing software

Course CO3 CM-111.3 Use Spread sheet software to make calculation and to
Outcomes draw various graphs / charts.

CO4 CM-111.4 Use Power point software to develop effective

presentation for a given theme or topic.

CO5 CM-111.5 Edit digital or scanned images using Photoshop

Learning Outcomes:

I. Computer Hardware Basics

1. a).To Familiarize with Computer system and hardware connections

b).To Start and Shut down Computer correctly
c).To check the software details of the computer
2. To check the hardware present in your computer

II. Windows’s operating system

3. To Explore Windows Desktop

4. Working with Files and Folders
5. Windows Accessories: Calculator – Notepad – WordPad – MS Paint
102
III. Practice with MS-WORD

6. To familiarize with Ribbon layout of MS Word

Home – Insert - Page layout – References – Review- View.
7. To practice Word Processing Basics
8. To practice Formatting techniques
9. To insert a table of required number of rows and columns
10. To insert Objects, Clipart and Hyperlinks
11. To use Mail Merge feature of MS Word
12. To use Equations and symbols features

IV. Practice with MS-EXCEL

13. To familiarize with MS-EXCEL layout
14. To access and enter data in the cells
15. To edit a spread sheet- Copy, Cut, Paste, and selecting Cells
16. To use built in functions and Formatting Data
17. To create Excel Functions, Filling Cells
18. To enter a Formula for automatic calculations
19. To sort and filter data in table.
20. To present data using Excel Graphs and Charts.
21. To develop lab reports of respective discipline.
22. To format a Worksheet in Excel, Page Setup and Print

V. Practice with MS-POWERPOINT

23. To familiarize with Ribbon layout features of PowerPoint 2007.
24. To create a simple PowerPoint Presentation
25. To set up a Master Slide in PowerPoint
26. To insert Text and Objects
27. To insert a Flow Charts
28. To insert a Table
29. To insert a Charts/Graphs
30. To insert video and audio
31. To practice Animating text and objects
32. To Review presentation

VI. Practice with Adobe Photoshop

33. To familiarize withstandard toolbox

34. To edit a photograph.
35. To insert Borders around photograph.
36. To change Background of a Photograph.
37. To change colors of Photograph.
38. To prepare a cover page for the book in your subject area.
39. To adjust the brightness and contrast of the picture so that it gives an elegant look.
40. To type a word and apply the shadow emboss effects.

103
Key competencies:

Expt No Name of Experiment Competencies Key competencies

1 (a). To familiarize with a. Identify the parts of a Connect cables to

Computer system and Computer system: i). CPU ii). external hardware and
hardware connections Mother Board iii) Monitor iv) operate the computer
CD/DVD Drive v) Power Switch
vi) Start Button vii) Reset
Button
b. Identify and connect various
peripherals
c. Identify and connect the
cables used with computer
system
d. Identify various ports on CPU
and connect Keyboard &
Mouse
1 (b). To Start and Shut down a. Log in using the password a. Login and logout as
Computer correctly b. Start and shut down the per the standard
computer procedure
c. Use Mouse and Key Board b. Operate mouse
&Key Board
1 (c). To Explore Windows a. Familiarize with Start Menu, a. Access application
Desktop Taskbar, Icons and Shortcuts programs using Start
b. Access application programs menu
using Start menu, Task b. Use taskbar and Task
manager manager
c. Use Help support

2. To check the software a. Find the details of Operating Access the

details of the computer System being used properties of
b. Find the details of Service computer and find
Pack installed the details

3. To check the hardware a. Find the CPU name and clock a. Access device
present in your speed manager and find
computer b. Find the details of RAM and the details
Hard disk present b. Type /Navigate the
c. Access Device manager using correct path and
Control Panel and check the Select icon related to
status of devices like mouse the details required
and key board
d. Use My Computer to check
the details of Hard drives and
partitions

104
 e. Use the Taskbar
4. Working with Files and a. Create folders and organizing a. Create files and
Folders files in different folders folders Rename ,
b. Use copy / paste move arrange and search
commands to organize files for the required
and folders folder/file

c. Arrange icons – name wise, b. Restore deleted files

size, type, Modified from Recycle bin
Working with Files and d. Search a file or folder and find
Folders its path
Continued.... e. Create shortcut to files and
folders (in other folders) on
Desktop
f. Familiarize with the use of
My Documents
g. Familiarize with the use of
Recycle Bin
To use Windows a. Familiarize with the use of a. Use windows
5. Accessories: Calculator accessories and
b. Access Calculator using Run select correct text
Calculator – Notepad – command editor based on the
WordPad – MS Paint c. Create Text Files using situation.
Notepad and WordPad and
observe the difference in file b. Use MS pain to
size create /Edit pictures
d. Use MS paint and and save in the
create .jpeg, .bmp files using required format.
MS Paint
6. To familiarize with a. Create/Open a document a. Create a Document
Ribbon layout of MS b. Use Save and Save as features and name
word. – Home – Insert- c. Work on two Word appropriately and
page layout- documents simultaneously save
References-Review-View d. Choose correct Paper size and b. Set paper size and
Printing options print options

7. To practice Word a. Typing text a. Use key board and

Processing Basics b. Keyboard usage mouse to enter/edit
c. Use mouse (Left click / Right text in the
click / Scroll) document.
d. Use Keyboard shortcuts b. Use shortcuts
e. Use Find and Replace c. Use spell check/
features in MS- word Grammar features
f. Use Undo and Redo Features for auto corrections.
g. Use spell check to correct
105
 Spellings and Grammar

8. To practice Formatting a. Formatting Text a. Format Text and

techniques b. Formatting Paragraphs paragraphs and use
c. Setting Tabs various text styles.
d. Formatting Pages b. Use bullets and
e. The Styles of Word numbers to create
f. Insert bullets and numbers lists
g. Themes and Templates c. Use Templates
h. Insert page numbers, header /Themes
and footer d. Insert page numbers
date, headers and
footers
9. To insert a table of a. Edit the table by adding the a. Insert table in the
required number of fields – Deleting rows and word document and
rows and columns columns –inserting sub table – edit
marking borders. Merging and b. Use sort option for
splitting of cells in a Table arranging data.
b. Changing the background
colour of the table
c. Use table design tools
d. Use auto fit – fixed row/
column height/length – Even
distribution of rows / columns
features
e. Convert Text to table and
Table to Text
f. Use Sort feature of the Table
to arrange data in
ascending/descending order

10. To Insert objects, clipart a. Create a 2-page document. a. Insert hyperlinks

and Hyperlinks &Insert hyperlinks and t &Bookmarks
Bookmarks. b. Create organization
b. Create an organization chart charts/flow charts
c. Practice examples like
preparing an Examination
schedule notice with a
hyperlink to Exam schedule
table.

11. To Use Mail merge a. Use mail merge to prepare Use Mail merge
feature of MS Word individually addressed letters feature
b. Use mail merge to print
envelopes.

106
12. To use Equations and a. Explore various symbols Enter Mathematical
symbols features. available in MS Word symbols and Equations
b. Insert a symbol in the text in the word document
c. Insert mathematical equations
in the document
13. To Practice with MS- a. Open /create an MS Excel a. Familiarize with
EXCEL spread sheet and familiarize excel layout and
with MS Excel 2007 layout like use
MS office Button- b. Use various features
b. Use Quick Access Toolbar- available in toolbar
Title Bar- Ribbon-Worksheets-
Formula Bar-Status Bar
14. To access and Enter data a. Move Around a Worksheets- a. Access and select
in the cells Quick access -Select Cells the required cells by
b. Enter Data-Edit a Cell-Wrap various addressing
Text-Delete a Cell Entry-Save a methods
File-Close Excel b. Enter data and edit

15. To edit spread sheet a. Insert and Delete Columns Format the excel sheet
Copy, Cut, Paste, and and Rows-Create Borders-
selecting cells Merge and Center
b. Add Background Color-Change
the Font, Font Size, and Font
Color
c. Format text with Bold,
Italicize, and Underline-Work
with Long Text-Change a
Column's Width
16. To use built in functions a. Perform Mathematical Use built in functions
and Formatting Data Calculations verify -AutoSum in Excel
b. Perform Automatic
Calculations-Align Cell Entries
17. To enter a Formula for a. Enter formula
automatic calculations b. Use Cell References in
Formulae Enter formula for
c. Use Automatic updating automatic calculations
function of Excel Formulae
d. Use Mathematical Operators
in Formulae
e. Use Excel Error Message and
Help
18. To Create Excel a. Use Reference Operators a. Create Excel sheets
Functions, Filling Cells b. Work with sum, Sum if , involving cross
Count and Count If Functions references and
c. Fill Cells Automatically equations

107
 b. Use the advanced
functions for
conditional
calculations
19. To sort and filter data in a. Sort data in multiple columns a. Refine the data in a
table b. Sort data in a row worksheet and
c. Sort data using Custom order keep it organized
d. Filter data in work sheet b. Narrow a worksheet
by selecting specific
choice
20. To Practice Excel Graphs a. Produce an Excel Pie Chart a. Use data in Excel
and Charts b. Produce sheet to Create
c. Excel Column Chart technical charts and
graphs Produce Excel
Line Graph
b. Produce a Pictograph
in Excel
21. To develop lab reports Create Lab reports using MS Word and a. Insert Practical
of respective discipline Excel subject name in
Header and page
numbers in Footer
22. To format a Worksheet a. Shade alternate rows of data a. Format Excel sheet
in Excel, page setup and b. Add currency and percentage b. Insert headers
print symbols &footers and print
c. Change height of a row and
width of a column
d. Change data alignment
e. Insert Headers and Footers
f. Set Print Options and Print
23. To familiarize with Use various options in Access required
Ribbon layout &features PowerPoint options in the tool bar
of PowerPoint 2007. a. Home
b. Insert
c. Design
d. Animation
e. Slideshow
f. View
g. Review
24. To create a simple a. Insert a New Slide into a. Create simple
PowerPoint PowerPoint PowerPoint
Presentation b. Change the Title of a presentation with
PowerPoint Slide photographs/ClipArt
c. PowerPoint Bullets and text boxes
d. Add an Image to a PowerPoint b. Use bullets option
Slide

108
 e. Add a Textbox to a
PowerPoint slide
25. To Set up a Master Slide a. Create a PowerPoint Design a. Setup Master slide
in PowerPoint and add Template and format
notes b. Modify themes b. Add notes
c. Switch between Slide master
view and Normal view
d. Format a Design Template
Master Slide
e. Add a Title Slide to a Design
Template
f. The Slide Show Footer in
PowerPoint
f. Add Notes to a PowerPoint
Presentation
26. To Insert Text and a. Insert Text and objects Insert Text and Objects
Objects b. Set Indents and line spacing
c. Insert pictures/ clipart Use 3d features
d. Format pictures
e. Insert shapes and word art
f. Use 3d features
g. Arrange objects
27. To insert a Flow Chart / a. Create a Flow Chart in Create organizational
Organizational Charts PowerPoint charts and flow charts
b. Group and Ungroup Shapes using smart art
c. Use smart art
28. To insert a Table a. PowerPoint Tables Insert tables and
b. Format the Table Data format
c. Change Table Background
d. Format Series Legend
29. To insert a a. Create 3D Bar Graphs in Create charts and Bar
Charts/Graphs PowerPoint graphs, Pie Charts and
b. Work with the PowerPoint format.
Datasheet
c. Format a PowerPoint Chart
Axis
d. Format the Bars of a Chart
e. Create PowerPoint Pie Charts
f. Use Pie Chart Segments
g. Create 2D Bar Charts in
PowerPoint
h. Format the 2D Chart
e. Format a Chart Background
30. To Insert audio & video, a. Insert sounds in the slide and a. Insert Sounds and
Hyperlinks in a slide hide the audio symbol Video in

109
 Add narration to the b. Adjust the volume in the appropriate
slide settings format.
c. Insert video file in the format b. Add narration to
supported by PowerPoint in a the slide
slide c. Use hyperlinks to
d. Use automatic and on click switch to different
options slides and files
e. Add narration to the slide
f. Insert Hyperlinks
31. To Practice Animation a. Apply transitions to slides Add animation effects
effects b. To explore and practice
special animation effects like
Entrance, Emphasis, Motion
Paths &Exit
32. Reviewing presentation a. Checking spelling and a. Use Spell check
grammar and Grammar
b. Previewing presentation feature
c. Set up slide show b. Setup slide show
d. Set up resolution c. Add timing to the
e. Exercise with Rehearse slides
Timings feature in PowerPoint d. Setup automatic
f. Use PowerPoint Pen Tool slide show
during slide show
g. Saving
h. Printing presentation
(a) Slides
(b) Hand-out
33 To familiarize a. Open Adobe Photoshop Open a photograph and save it
withstandard toolbox b. Use various tools such as in Photoshop
i. The Layer Tool
ii. The Color& Swatches Tool
iii. Custom Fonts & The Text
Tool
iv. Brush Tool
v. The Select Tool
vi. The Move Tool
vii. The Zoom Tool
viii. The Eraser
ix. The Crop Tool
x. The Fill Tool
34 To edit a photograph a. Use the Crop tool a. Able to edit image by using
b. Trim edges corresponding tools.
c. Change the shape and size of a
photo
d. Remove the part of

110
 photograph including graphics
and text
35 To insert Borders a. Start with a single background
Able to create a border or
around photograph layer frame around an
b. Bring the background forward image to add visual
c. Enlarge the canvas interest to a photo
d. Create a border color
e. Send the border color to the
back
f. Experiment with different
colors
36 To change Background a. open the foreground and Able to swap background
of a Photograph background image elements using the
b. Use different selection tools to Select and Mask tool
paint over the image and layers.
c. Copy background image and
paste it on the foreground.
d. Resize and/or drag the
background image to
reposition.
e. In the Layers panel, drag the
background layer below the
foreground image layer.
37 To change colors of a. Change colors using:
Photograph i) Color Replacement tool Able to control color
ii) Hue/Saturation adjustment layer saturation
tool
38 To prepare a cover page a. open a file with height 500 and
for the book in subject width 400 for the cover page. Able to prepare cover
area page for the book
b. apply two different colors to
work area by dividing it into
two parts using Rectangle tool.
c. Copy any picture and place it
on work area→ resize it using
free transform tool.
d. Type text and apply color and
style
e. Apply effects using blended
options
39 To adjust the brightness a. open a file
and contrast of picture b. Go to image→ adjustments→ Able to control
to give an elegant look Brightness/Contrast. brightness/contrast.

f. adjust the brightness and

contrast
111
 g. save the image
40 To type a word and a. open a file Able to apply shadow
apply the shadow b. Select the text tool and type emboss effects
emboss effects text.
c. Select the typed text go to
layer→ layer style→ blended
option→ drop shadow, inner
shadow, bevel and emboss→
contour→ satin→ gradient
overlay
d. Save the image.

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for unit tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered

Unit test-1 From 1 to 8
Unit test-2 From 9 to 22
Unit test-3 From 23 to 40

112
III SEMESTER

113
 DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATIONS
(III SEMESTER)

Instruction
Scheme of Examination
period /week Total
Subject Period
Name of the Subject End
Code Practical/ /year Duration Sessiona Total
Theory Exam
Tutorial (hours) l Marks Marks
Marks

THEORY
Engineering
EE-301 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
Mathematics - II

EE-302 Electrical Machines- I 5 - 75 3 20 80 100

A.C. Circuits &

EE-303 6 - 90 3 20 80 100
Transformers

Electronics
EE-304 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
Engineering

EE-305 Programming in ‘’C’’ 5 _ 75 3 20 80 100

PRACTICAL
Electrical CAD
EE-306 - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Laboratory

Electrical Machines – I
EE-307 - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Laboratory

Circuits &
EE-308 Transformers - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Laboratory

Electronics
EE-309 Engineering - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Laboratory

Programming in ‘’C’’
EE-310 - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Laboratory

TOTAL 24 15 585 30 300 700 1000

NOTE:03 periods per weekare allotted to Student Centric Activity (Library, Sports& Games, Clean & Green,
Preparation for placements etc)

114
 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS-II

(COMMON TO C/M/EE/A/MET/MNG/AA/CER/TT)

No. of Total No. of Marks for Marks for

Course Course Title Periods/week periods FA SA
Code

ENGINEERING
EE-301 4 60 20 80
MATHEMATICS-II

S.No. Unit Title No. of periods COs mapped

1 Indefinite Integration 20 CO1

2 Definite Integration 10 CO2

3 Applications of Definite Integrals 10 CO3

4 Differential Equations 20 CO4

Total Periods 60

Course Objectives (i) To understand the concepts of indefinite integrals and

definite integrals with applications to engineering
problems.
(ii) To understand the formation of differential equations and learn
various methods of solving first order differential equations.
(iii) To learn the principles of solving homogeneous and non-
homogeneous differential equations of second order.

CO1 Integrate various functions using different methods.

Course Outcomes CO2 Evaluate definite integrals.

CO3 Solve engineering problems by applying definite integrals.

CO4 Obtain differential equations and solve differential equations of

first order and first degree. Solve homogeneous and non-

115
homogeneous differential equations of second order.

116
 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – II

Learning Outcomes
Unit-I

C.O. 1 Integrate various functions using different methods.

L.O.1.1. Explain the concept of Indefinite integral as an anti-derivative.

1.2. State the indefinite integral of standard functions and properties of and where
u, v are functions of x and k is constant.

1.3. Solve problems involving standard functions using the above rules.

1.4. Evaluate integrals involving simple functions of the following type by the method of substitution.

i) ,where f(x)is in standard form.

ii)

iii)

iv)

1.5. Find the integrals of tan x, cot x, sec x and cosec x using the above.

1.6. Evaluate the Standard integrals of the functions of the type

1 1 1
i) , ,
a2 + x 2 a2 −x 2 x 2−a2
1 1 1
ii ) 2 2 , 2 2 , 2 2
√ a + x √ a −x √ x −a
iii ) √ x 2 −a 2 , √ x 2 + a2 , √ a2 −x 2
1.7. Evaluate integrals using decomposition method.

1.8. Solve problems using integration by parts.

1.9 Use Bernoulli’s rule for evaluating the integrals of the form ∫ u.vdx .

1.10. Evaluate the integrals of the form

117
 Unit-II

C.O.2 Evaluate definite integrals.

L.O.2.1. State the fundamental theorem of integral calculus

2.2. Explain the concept of definite integral.

2.3. Solve simple problems on definite integrals over an interval using the above concept.

2.4. State various properties of definite integrals.

2.5. Evaluate simple problems on definite integrals using the above properties.

Syllabus for Unit test-I completed

Unit -III

C.O.3Solve engineering problems by applying definite integrals.

L.O. 3.1. Find the area bounded by a curve and axes.

3.2. Obtain the mean and R.M.S values of the simple functions.

3.3. Solve some simple problems using Trapezoidal rule and Simpson’s 1/3 rule for the approximation of
definite integrals.

Unit -IV

C.O. 4 Form differential equations and solve differential equations of first order and first degree and
Solve homogeneous and non-homogeneous differential equations of second order

L.O.4.1. Define a Differential equation, its order and degree

4.2 Find order and degree of a given differential equation.

4.3 Form a differential equation by eliminating arbitrary constants.

4.4 Solve the first order and first degree differential equations by variables separable method.

4.5 Solve linear differential equation of first order of the form , where P and Q are functions
of or constants.

4.6 Solve homogeneous second order linear differential equations of the type (aD 2 +bD + c) y = 0 where a,
b, c are real numbers and provide examples.

4.7 Define complementary function, particular integral and general solution of a non-homogeneous linear
differential equation of second order with constant coefficients.

4.8 Describe the methods of solving f(D) = X, where f(D) is a polynomial of second order and X is a function
of the forms k, e ax , sinax , cosax and x and their linear combinations.

118
 Syllabus for Unit test-II completed

ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – II
COURSE CONTENTS
Unit-I

Indefinite Integration:

1. Integration regarded as anti-derivative – Indefinite integrals of standard functions. Properties of

indefinite integrals. Integration by substitution or change of variable. Integrals of tan x, cot x, sec x, cosec x.

Evaluation of integrals which are of the following forms:

1 1 1
i) 2 2
, 2 2, 2 2
a + x a −x x −a
1 1 1
ii ) , ,
√ a 2+ x 2 √ a2−x 2 √ x 2 −a 2
iii ) √ x 2 −a 2 , √ x 2 + a2 , √ a2 −x 2

Integration by decomposition of the integrand into simple rational algebraic functions.

Integration by parts, Bernoulli’s rule and integrals of the form òex [f(x) + f ¢(x)] dx.
Unit-II
Definite Integration

2. Definite integral-fundamental theorem of integral calculus, properties of definite integrals,

evaluation of simple definite integrals.
Unit-III
Applications of Definite Integrals

3. Area bounded by a curve and axes. Mean and RMS values of a function on a given interval. Trapezoidal
rule, Simpson’s 1/3 rule to evaluate an approximate value of a define integral. Simple examples.
Unit -IV

Differential Equations

4. Definition of a differential equation-order and degree of a differential equation- formation of differential

equations-solutions of differential equations of first order and first degree using methods, variables

separable, linear differential equation of the type Solutions of homogenous and non-
homogeneous linear differential equations of second order with constant coefficients.

Reference Books:

119
1. B. S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers.

2. Schaum’s Outlines Differential Equations, Richard Bronson & Gabriel B. Costa

4. M.Vygodsky, Mathematical Handbook: Higher Mathematics, Mir Publishers, Moscow.

120
 BLUE PRINT

S.No. Chapter/Unit title No. of Weightage Short type Essay type COs
Periods Allotted mapped

R U Ap R U Ap

Unit – I: Indefinite integration

1 Indefinite 20 34 1 2 0 1/2 2 0 CO1

integration

Unit – II: Definite integration

2 Definite Integrals 10 16 0 2 0 0 1 0 CO2

Unit – III: Applications of Definite Integrals

3 Area of curves 3 3 0 0 1 0 0 0 CO3

4 Mean and RMS 3 8 0 0 1 0 0 1/2 CO3

values

5 Numerical 4 10 0 0 0 0 0 1 CO3
Integration

Unit – IV : Differential Equations

6 Introduction to 5 6 2 0 0 0 0 0 CO4
Differential
Equations

7 Solutions of first 4 13 0 0 1 0 0 1 CO4

order differential
equations

8 Solutions of second 4 10 0 0 0 0 0 1 CO4

order
homogeneous
differential
equations

9 Solutions of second 7 10 0 0 0 0 0 1 CO4

order non-
homogeneous
differential
equations

Total 60 110 3 4 3 1/2 3 4

1/2

121
 Marks 9 12 9 5 30 45

R: Remembering Type :14 Marks

U: understanding Type :42 Marks
Ap: Application Type : 54 Marks

Engineering Mathematics – II
Unit Test Syllabus
Unit Test Syllabus

Unit Test-I
From L.O 1.1 to L.O 2.5
Unit Test-II
From L.O 3.1 to L.O 4.8

122
 ELECTRICAL MACHINES-I

Course No. of Total no. Marks Marks

code Course title periods/week of periods for FA for SA

EE-302 ELECTRICAL MACHINES-I 5 75 20 80

No. of
S. Unit Title CO’S Mapped
No. Periods

1. Fundamentals of D.C Generators, Armature 18 CO1

reaction and Characteristics

Fundamentals of DC motors
2. 12 CO2

3. Speed Control and Testing of D.C Motors 12 CO3

4. Basics of Electrical Measuring Instruments 18 CO4

5. Transducers, Sensors and Electronic & Digital 15 CO5

Instruments

Total 75

Course Objectives:

i. To Familiarise knowledge on construction, working principle and characteristics

of DC machines and Armature reaction.
Course ii. To know different methods of speed control and testing of motors.
Objectives Iii. To use different generators and motors for specific applications.
iv.To know the performance of different electrical and electronic measuring
instruments.
v. To know the working principle of Transducers and sensors.

123
 Course outcomes:

Describe the parts of a DC machine, its usages and analyse

CO1 EE-302.1
armature reaction and commutation for its effects.

Describe the working of a D.C motor and analyse the

CO2 EE-302.2
characteristics for its performance

Familiarise the usage of starter for different DC motors and

CO3 EE-302.3 selecting specific methods of speed control for D.C motor
and to analyse various tests on D.C motors.
Course
outcomes Describe the construction and working of different electrical
CO4 EE-302.4 and electronic measuring instruments and to explain the
measurement of resistance.

Choosing appropriate Transducer for a specific application

and to describe the basic principle of electronic digital
CO5 EE-302.5 measuring instruments.

Learning Outcomes:

1. Fundamentals of D.C Generators, Armature reaction and Characteristics

1.1Explain electromechanical energyconversion.

1.2 Describe the constructional features of a D.C generator with a legible sketchand list the various
materials used for each part.

1.3 Explain the working principle of D.C generator.

1.4 State the types of armature windings.

1.5 Derive the E.M.F equation of D.C generator in terms of Φ,Z, N, P &A and solve problems.

1.6Classify D.C Generators based on excitation and draw its equivalent circuit by givingtheir voltage
and
current equations and solve problems.

1.7 State the various losses incurred in a D.CGenerator and draw power flow diagram.

1.8 Define the mechanical, electrical and overall efficiencies of DC Generator.

1.9Define Armature reaction and state its effects.

1.10 State Commutationand list the different methods of improving commutation.
1.11Plot Open Circuit Characteristics, Internal characteristics and external characteristics of the

124
following
types of D.C.Generators:
(i) Separately excited(ii) Shunt(iii)Series

1.12List the applications of above D.C generators.

2. Fundamentals of D.CMotors
2.1 Define DC motor
2.2Explain the working of D.Cmotor.
2.3Explain the significance of back E.M.F.
2.4Classify DCmotors.
2.5Write the formula for Back E. M. F for different D.C Motors with equivalent circuits.
2.6Solve Problems on BackE.M.F.
2.7Define Torque and derive Torque equation of a D.Cmotor.
2.8 Plot thei) Electricalcharacteristicsandii)Mechanical characteristics of (a) Shunt b) SeriesD. C. Motors

2.9 List the applications of the various D.C motors.

3. Speed Control and testing of D.C Motors

-
3.1Explain the three different methods of speed Control (Flux, Armature and voltage) for D.C
shuntmotors.
3.2Explain the different methods of speed control of series motor.
3.3State the necessity of astarter and List different types of Starters for DCmotors.
3.4 Explain the working of 3-point starter with legiblesketch.
3.5 List different tests of D.C Motors.

3.6 Describe the direct and indirect methods of testing of the DC motors.
3.7 Explain the method of conducting brake test on D.C Series and Shunt motors.

4. Basics of Electrical measuring instruments.

4.1 Classify the instruments on the basis of(i) construction and output(ii) principle of working
(iii) method of measuring the value

4.2 State the purpose of obtaining deflecting, controlling and damping torques in Indicating
instruments.

4.3 Explain the working of Permanent Magnet Moving Coil.

4.4 State the advantages, disadvantages and applications of M.CInstruments.

4.5 Describe working of Moving Iron (M.I) Instrument i)Attractiontype Instrumentii)Repulsion type
4.6 State the advantages and disadvantages of M.I.Instruments.

4.7 Explain the working of a dynamometer type instrument

125
 4.8 State the need for instrument transformers (CT and PT).

4.10 Classify the resistance into Low, Medium and High Values giving examples foreach.

4.11 Describe the construction and working ofMegger

5. Transducers, Sensors and Electronic & Digital Instruments

5.1 Define Transducer

5.2 Classify Transducers (i)based on the principle of transduction formused(ii) as PrimaryandSecondary
(iii) as Passive andActive (iv) as AnalogandDigital (v) as Transducers and Inverse Transducers

5.3 State the applications of Transducers.

5.4 Describe the construction of Linear Variable Differential transformer(LVDT).
5.5 Explain the working ofLVDT.
5.6 Define Sensor and list its types.
5.7 List the applications ofsensors.
5.8List the basic components of analog electronic instruments.
5.9 List the basic components of Digital instruments.
5.10 List the advantages of Digital Instruments over Analog Instruments.
5.11 Explain the Working of Digital Multi meter with block diagram.
5.12 Explain the Working of Single Phase Digital Energy meter with block diagram.

HYPONATED COURSE CONTENT

1. Fundamentals of D.C Generators, Armature reaction and Characteristics

Electromechanical energy conversion – constructional features of D.C generator with legible sketches-
principle of D.C generator - windings (i) Lap (ii) Wave- E.M.F equation -Classification of DC generators
based on excitation-Voltage and Current equations for different types of D.C Generators-simple
problems -losses incurred in the D.C Generators-mechanical, electrical and overall efficiencies of DC
Generators- Armature reaction —Commutation and list of methods for improving commutation –Open
circuit, internal and external characteristics of Separately excited, Shunt and Series DC Generators-
Applications of D.C generators.

2. Fundamentals of D.C Motors

Definition of DC motor-Working of D.C motors-classification - significance of back E.M.F- Formula for

back E.M.F for different D.C motors- Problems on E.M.F equation -Torque equation of DC motor -
electrical and mechanical characteristics of D.C Shunt and Series motors-Applications of D.C motors.

3. Speed Control and testing of D.C Motors

Methods of speed control (Flux, Armature and Voltage) for D.C shunt motors-different methods of
speed control for series motors -necessity of starter-Types of starters- 3-point starter-direct and
indirect methods of testing of DC motors-list of different tests-Brake test test on DC series and shunt

126
 motors.

4. Basics of electrical measuring instruments:

Classification of instruments - Deflection, Controlling and Damping torques in the indicating

Instruments-working of Permanent magnet moving coil-advantages, disadvantages andapplications-
working moving iron instruments –advantages and disadvantages – Dynamometertype instrument–
working - instrument transformers- Classification of resistance-
Construction and working of megger.

5. Transducers, Sensors and Electronic & Digital Instruments

Definition of transducer - Classification of Transducers - Applications of Transducers - construction and

working of LVDT- Basic Concept of Sensors,types and its applications- Basic components of analog
electronic Instruments - basic components of Digital instruments- advantages of Digital Instruments
over Analog Instruments- working of digital multi meter with block diagram- working of single phase
digital energy meter with block diagram.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. B.L. Theraja -Electrical Technology - Vol - I –S.Chand&co.

2. B.L. Theraja -Electrical Technology - Vol –II -S.Chand&co.
3. P.S. Bhimbhra –Electrical machines
4. E.W. Golding and F.C. Widdis,Electrical Measurements and measuring instruments–Wheele
publishers.
5. A. K.SAWHNEY - Electrical and Electronic measuring instruments –- Dhanpat Rai &Sons.

Unit Test Learning Outcomes to be Covered

Unit Test – I From 1.1 to 3.5

Unit Test – II From 3.6 to 5.12

Model Papers: Syllabus to be Covered for Unit Tests

127
Blue print:

Question wise distribution

No. Weighta of weightage

of ge
S.N Unit Title CO’S
perio allocated
o
ds mappe
. d

U AP A
R R U
p
1. Fundamentals
of D.C
Generators, 18 20 CO1
3 3 1 1 2
Armature 26
reaction and
Characteristics

2. Fundamentals 12 19
of DC motors 6 3 10 2 1 1 CO2

3. Speed Control
and Testing of 12 13 10 - -
3 1 1
D.C Motors CO3

Basics of
Electrical
26 3 23 - 1 3 CO4
4. Measuring 18 -
Instruments

Transducers,
Sensors and
5. Electronic & 15 26 6 20 - 2 CO5
Digital -
Instruments

128
 Total 75 110 21 59 30 7 8 3

A.C. CIRCUITS AND TRANSFORMERS

No. of Total no.

Course Marks Marks
Course title periods/ of
code for FA for SA
week periods
A.C. CIRCUITS AND
EE-303 6 90 20 80
TRANSFORMERS

No. of CO’S Mapped

S. No. Unit Title
Periods
1. Fundamental of A.C. 13 CO1

2 Single phase A.C Circuits 23 CO2

3 Poly phase circuits 13 C03

4 Single phase transformers 28 CO4

5 Three phase transformers and Auto 13 CO5

Transformers

Total 90

Course objectives:

i. To understand basics of alternating quantities

ii. To acquire knowledge on A.C circuits and its components and to solvethem.
Course iii. To understand poly phasecircuits and solve problems
Objectives iv. To familiarise with the knowledge of single phase and three phase
transformers

Course outcomes:

EE-303.1 Understand the fundamental concepts of AC quantities

CO1
and solving problems in j-notation

129
 CO2 Comprehending the knowledge of resonance in series and
EE-303.2
parallel R, L, C circuits
Course
outcomes Describe poly phase circuits and solving problems
CO3 EE-303.3

Explain the working of single transformers and understand

CO4 EE-303.4
equivalent circuit parameters, efficiency and regulation.

Analyse the three phase transformers, types and cooling

CO5 EE-303.5
methods.

Learning outcomes:

1. Fundamentals ofA.C

1.1 State the relation between poles, speed andfrequency

1.2 Define the instantaneous value, maximum value, frequency, time period, Averagevalue,
R.M.S value, Form factor and Peak factor of an A.C quantity.

1.3 Derive the above for different alternating waveforms viz. half wave and full wave
rectified sine wave.
1.4 Explain the terms phase and phase difference of an A.Cquantity.

1.5 Understand joperator

1.6 Convert polar quantities into rectangular quantities andVice-versa.

2. Single-phase A.C circuits

2.1 Derive relationship between voltage and current ina

(i) Pureresistivecircuit ii) Pureinductive circuit iii) Pure capacitivecircuit.

2.2 Calculate the impedance, current, phase angle, power and power factor in R-L

series circuits, R-C series circuits, L-C series circuits, R-L-C seriescircuits.

2.3 Solve Problems on SeriesCircuits

2.4 Define Resonance and Derive a formula for resonant frequency of a R-L-C seriescircuit.

2.5 Define Q-factor and state its importance,

2.6 Solve problems on SeriesResonance.

2.7 State the concept of conductance, susceptance and admittance.

130
 2.8 Explain the method of solving two branch parallel A.C circuits by using J- notationmethod

2.9 Solve Problems on j-notation method for two branch parallel A.C circuits.

3. Poly PhaseCircuits

3.1 Definetheterm`PolyPhase’.
3.2 List advantages of 3 phase system over single phasesystem.

3.3 Write the expressions for three-phase emfs and represent them by phasordiagram.

3.4 State the concept of phasesequence.

3.5 Derive the relation between line and phase values of current and voltage in 3phase

(i)Starcircuits and(ii)delta circuits.

3.6 Derive the equation for power in 3 phasecircuit.

3.7 Solve numerical examples in balancedloads.
3.8 Derive the formulae for measurement of 3 phase power and power factor by using two
wattmeters.
3.9 Solve simple problems on two wattmeter method.

4. Single phasetransformer
4.1 Define Transformer and Explain its working principle.

4.2 Classify the transformers basedon

(i) numberofphases (ii)construction (iii)function.

4.3 Explain the constructional details oftransformers with legible Sketch..

4.4 Distinguish between shell type and core typetransformers.
4.5 Derive the E.M.F equation of a single phasetransformer and solve problems.
4.6 Define ‘transformation’ratio.
4.7 Draw Vector diagram for a transformer working on noload.
4.8 Develop the vector diagram of a transformer on loadfor
(i) Unity powerfactor (ii) Lagging powerfactor (iii) Leading powerfactor

4.9 Draw the equivalent circuit of a transformer byapproximation.

4.10 Determine the equivalent circuit constants from no-load test and short circuit testdata
and solve problems.
4.11 Derive the approximate equation for regulation fortransformer.
4.12 List the losses taking place in atransformer and derive the condition for maximum
efficiency of atransformer.
4.13 Solve simple problems on regulation and efficiency.
4.14 State the reason for transformer rating inKVA.

4.15 Define all-day efficiency.

131
 4.16 Differentiate between distribution transformer and powertransformer.

5. Three Phase Transformers and Autotransformers

5.1 State the advantages of 3 phase transformer over single phasetransformer.

5.2 List the different types of three phase transformers by giving theirsymbolic representation

and voltagerelationships.
5.3 State theapplicationsof (i)star-star (ii)delta-star (iii)star-delta
(iv)delta- delta connected transformers.

5.4 State the need for parallel operation of three phase transformers.

5.5 State the conditions for parallel operation of 3 phasetransformers.

5.6 List the specialtransformers.

5.7 State the advantages and disadvantages ofautotransformers

5.8 State the necessity of cooling of powertransformers.

5.9List different methods of cooling of powertransformer.

5.10 Draw a legible sketch of a powertransformer and explain the function of each part.

5.11 State the need for Tap changing in power transformer and explainthe`onload’and`off
load’ tapchanging.

COURSE CONTENT

Fundamentals ofA.C.

Relation between poles, speed and frequency- Definition of Alternating quantity, cycle, period,
frequency, amplitude, instantaneous value and angular velocity - Average value - effective value/R.M.S
value definitions and derivations - calculations of these values for half wave rectified sine wave, full
wave rectified Sine wave forms-form factor- peak factor - Representation of alternating quantities by
equation, graphs and phasor diagrams - Phase and phase difference – Understanding of `J’ notation for
alternating quantities ,transformation from polar to rectangular notations andVice-versa

Single phase A.C. Circuits

Concept of reactance, purely inductive and purely capacitive circuits - Derivation of voltage , current,
power relations including phase relationships, wave forms and phasor diagrams - R-L, R-C , L-C & R-L-C
series circuits - Derivation of relation between voltage, current, impedance, power including wave
forms and phasor diagrams. Impedance triangle, phase angle, power factor, active and reactive
components of current and power in above circuits – Definition of Resonance in series circuits and
expression for resonant frequency- Q-factor-Importance of Q- factor- Problems on series circuits and
seriesresonance-Concept of conductance, susceptance and admittance - Simple Parallel circuits -
solution by `J’ notation – problems.

132
 Poly phasecircuits

Definition of Poly phase - Advantages of poly-phase systems over single-phasesystems - Location of

coils for obtaining required phase difference - Representation of 2 phase,3 phase EMF by equations,
graphs and phasors - phase sequence - Current in neutral in 2 phase and 3 phase system - Method
ofconnection of star and delta - phasor diagram showing relation between phase and line quantities,
Relation between phase and Line values of voltages and currents -power equation - Problems on 3
phase balanced circuits – Measurement of 3 phase power by two wattmeter and power factor in
balanced circuits - Effect of Load power factor on wattmeter readings – Problems.

Single PhaseTransformers

Introduction to Transformer, Classification of transformers, Construction of transformers, Theory of an

ideal transformer - emf equation derivation – Transformation ratio and turns ratio and relation
between them - Voltage ratio and current ratio – Transformer on no load - No load current components
and no load power factor -Transformer on load – Equivalent circuit of transformer - Equivalent circuit
constants by transformation, Short circuit test - Regulation of transformer - definition and derivation of
approximate equation for regulation - determination of regulation from S.C. Test data , determination
of losses in transformer from O.C. and S.C. tests data- efficiency, condition for maximum efficiency-
simple problems on efficiency and regulation – rating of transformer- all-day efficiency definition-
Differentiation between distribution transformer and powertransformer.

Three- phase transformer & Autotransformer

Advantages of 3 phase transformer over single phase transformer. Descriptive treatment of star-star,
delta-delta, star-delta and delta-star, voltage current and phase relation for the above groups- Need
and conditions to be fulfilled for paralleling 3 phase transformer, open delta working of 3 phase
transformers, Auto-transformers – applications, Necessity of cooling - Methods of cooling - Sketch of
power transformer indicating parts and explain their functions - Tap changing gear - on load and off
load tap changing in power transformer.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. B.L. Theraja -Electrical Technology - Vol - I S. Chand&co.

2. V. K .Mehta-Introduction to ElectricalEngg.
3. A.Chakrabarthy -Electrical Circuits - Dhanapat Rai andSons
4. B.L. Theraja –A.K.Theraja-Electrical Technology - Vol - II S. Chand&co.
5. J.B.Gupta-Theory and performance of electrical machines-KATSON BOOKS

133
 Blue print:

Marks wise Question wise

distribution distribution of
S.N No. of Weig CO’S
ofweightage
o. perio htage weightage
Unit title Mapped
ds alloca
R U Ap An R U Ap An
ted

1. Fundamental of 10 CO1
9 3 3 3 - 1 1 1 -
A.C.

2 Single phase A.C CO2

Circuits 20
26 3 10 1 2 1
13

3 Poly phase circuits 26 C03

10 6 10 10 2 1 1

4 Single phase CO4

25 26 6 10 10 2 1 1
transformers

5 Three phase CO5

transformers and 10 23 20 2
3 0 1 0
Auto Transformers

Total 75 110 21 56 33 0 7 7 4 0

Syllabus to be Covered for Unit Tests

Unit Test Learning Outcomes to be Covered

134
 Unit Test-I From 1.1 to 3.9

Unit Test-II From 4.1 to 5.11

ELECTRONICSENGINEERING

Course CourseTitle No. Total Marks Marks

Code ofperiods No.of for FA forSA
/ Periods
Week
ELECTRONICSENG
EE-304 INEERING 4 60 20 80

CO’s
S.No UnitTitle No.ofperiods
Mapped
s
1. Semiconductordevices 16 CO1
2. PowerSupplies 08 CO2
3. Amplifiers 16 CO3
4 Oscillators 08 CO4
5. LinearIntegratedCircuits 12 CO5
Total 60

i).Tointroducestudentstothebasictheoryofsemiconductordevicesand
theirpractical applicationsinelectronics.
COURSEOBJE
ii).Tofamiliarizestudentstotheprincipleofoperation,designandsynthesis
CTIVES ofdifferentelectroniccircuitandintegratedcircuits,andtheirapplications.
iii).Toprovidestrongfoundationforfurtherstudyofelectroniccircuitsand
integratedcircuits.

Analyze
CO1 EE304.1
COURSEOU theformationandworkingofvarioussemiconduc
tordevices.
135
 TCOMES CO2 EE304.2 Explaintherectifiersandvoltageregulators.
Analyzetheconcept of
CO3 EE304.3
amplifier,smallsignalamplifier,
largesignalamplifierandfeedbackamplifier.
CO4 EE304.4 Analyzevariousoscillators.
CO5 EE304.5 Analyzetheop-ampapplicationcircuits.

LEARNINGOUTCOMES

1. SemiconductorDevices
1.1 DefinePNJunctionDiodeandexplainthe formationofit.
1.2 ExplaintheworkingofPNJunctiondiodewithnobias,forwardbiasandreverse bias.
1.3 DrawtheVIcharacteristicsofPNJunctionDiode.
1.4 ExplaintheworkingofZenerdiode.
1.5 Drawthe VIcharacteristicsof Zener diode.
1.6 ExplainformationofPNPandNPNtransistors
1.7 Statethedifferentconfigurationsoftransistors.
1.8 PlottheInput/OutputcharacteristicsofatransistorinCEconfiguration.
1.9 ExplaintheworkingandVIcharacteristicsof
(a) FET (b) MOSFET (c) IGBT

2. PowerSupplies

2.1 DefineRectifier.
2.2 Explaintheworkingand,drawthecircuitdiagramsandwaveforms of:
(a) HalfWaveRectifier (b)FullWave Rectifier (c) BridgeRectifier
2.3 Statetheneedoffilterinpowersupplies.
2.4 Listthe differenttypesoffiltersusedinpowersupplies.
2.5 ExplaintheworkingofZenerdiodeasaVoltage regulatorina powersupply.
2.6 Explaintheworkingofvoltageregulatedpowersupply.

3. Amplifiers

3.1 DefineAmplifier
3.2 Explaintheoperationoftransistorasanamplifier.
3.3 Listtheapplicationsofamplifiers.
3.4 Listthe differenttypesofcouplingmethods inamplifiers
3.5 Explaintheworkingand,drawthecircuitdiagramsandfrequencyresponsecurves of
RCcoupledamplifier
3.6 Explain the need for power amplifier.
3.7 Distinguishbetweenvoltageamplifierandpoweramplifier.
3.8 Definetheterms(a)feedback (b)feedbackfactor
3.9 Explaintheeffectoffeedbackongain, bandwidth andnoise

136
4. Oscillators

4.1 DefineOscillatorandclassifydifferenttypesofoscillators
4.2 Statetheconditionsrequiredforsustainedoscillations
4.3 Statetheneed of(a) AFOscillator(b)RF Oscillator(c) SquareWaveOscillator
4.4 Drawthe circuit diagram andexplaintheworkingof
(a) RCPhaseShiftOscillator(b)HartleyOscillator(c)Colpitt’sOscillator
4.5 Listtheapplicationsofoscillators.

5. LinearIntegratedCircuits

5.1 DefineIntegratedCircuit.
5.2 Listthe advantagesofIntegratedCircuitsoverDiscrete Circuits.
5.3 ExplaintheoperationofDifferentialAmplifier.
5.4 ListthecharacteristicsofanIdealOperationalAmplifier.
5.5 ExplaintheworkingofOperationalAmplifier.
5.6 ExplaintheworkingofOpAmpInvertingAmplifier.
5.7 Statethe conceptofvirtualground.
5.8 ExplaintheOperationalAmplifieras
(a) summer (b)integrator (c)differentiator (d)inverter.
5.9 Draw the Pin Diagram of 741 IC and state its important specifications and function of eachpin.

HYPONATEDCOURSECONTENTS

1. Semi-conductorDevices
PNJunctionDiode,forwardandreversebias-Zenerdiode,Zenerdiodecharacteristics-formation of PNP and NPN
transistors- Transistor configurations - CB, CE and CC - Input andoutput characteristics of CE - FET,MOSFET,
IGBT-characteristicsandtheir applications.

2. Powersupplies
Half wave, Full wave and Bridge rectifiers, Types of Filters, Voltage regulated power supply
usingZenerDiode.

3. Amplifiers
Principles ofOperation- ClassificationofAmplifiers,Couplingmethods,FrequencyResponseofR.Ccoupled
amplifier – applications - Power amplifier – feedback amplifier.

4. Oscillators
Oscillator- types of oscillators -AF Oscillator- RF Oscillator -Square waveOscillator -RC phaseshiftOscillator -
Hartley oscillator-Colpitt’soscillator -applicationsofoscillators.

137
5. LinearIntegratedcircuits.
DifferentialAmplifier-advantagesofICs-OperationalAmplifier–Gain–summer–integrator–differentiator-
scalechanger – inverter -741IC.

Note:1.Thissubjectistobe taughtbyElectronics&CommunicationEngg.Faculty
2.Papersettingandpaperevaluationisalso to be done by Electronics &Communication
EnggFaculty.

REFERENCEBOOKS
1. NN Bhargava – Basic Electroncis and linear circuits – TTTI, chandigarh
2. V.K.Mehta,Rohitmehta-PrinciplesofElectronics,SChand& Co.
3. G.K.Mithal-AppliedElectronics-Khannapublishers
4. G.K.Mithal-Electronicdevicesandcircuits-Khannapublishers
5. J.B.Gupta-AtextbookofElectronicsEngineering-KATSONBOOKS

BLUEPRINT

Weightage Questionwise
MarkswiseDistr CO’
No. Allocated Distribution
S. ibutionofWeigh sM
ofp ofWeightage
N UnitTitle tage app
erio
o ed
ds A A A A
R U R U
p n p n
Semicondu 16
1 ctor 26 3 23 1 3
CO1
devices
CO2
2 PowerS 8 16 3 13 1 2
upplies

CO3
3 Amplifiers 16 21 3 18 1 2.5

CO4
4 Oscillators 8 21 3 18 1 2.5

CO5
LinearInte
5 12 26 3 23 1 3
gratedCirc
uits
60 15 95
Total 110 5 13

138
 ModelPapers:SyllabustobeCoveredforUnitTests

UnitTest LearningOutcomestobeCovered
UnitTest-I From1.1to3.5
UnitTest-II From3.6to5.9

139
 PROGRAMMINGINC

No.of Total
Course CourseTitle Marks Marks
periods / No.of
Code forFA forSA
Week Periods

EE-305 PROGRAMMINGINC 5 75 20 80

COURSEOUTCOMESMAPPING

No. CO’s
S.No UnitTitle
ofperio Mapped
ds
1. Basicsof‘C’Programming 10 C01

2. Decision& LoopControlStatements 15 CO2

3. Arrays&Strings 18 C03
4 UserdefinedFunctions 15 C04
5. Structures,Unions&Pointers 17 CO5
Total 75

i.To impartadequateknowledgeontheneedof programminglanguages

andproblemsolvingtechniques.
COURSEOBJ ii.To developprogrammingskills usingthefundamentalsandbasicsofC-
ECTIVES Language.
iii.Toenableeffectiveusageofarrays,structures,functions,pointersandtoimpl
ementthememorymanagementconcepts.

DevelopCprogramsusingoperatorswith proper
EE-305.1
CO1 flowchartandalgorithm.
Apply conditionalanditerativestatementsto
CO2 EE-305.2 writeC programs.
COURSEOU CO3 EE-305.3 Develop Cprogramsonarraysandstrings.
TCOMES Developmodularprogrammingusingfunctions.
CO4 EE-305.4
Write programmes using structures, unions
EE-305.5
CO5 andpointers.

140
LEARNINGOUTCOMES

1. Basicsof‘C’Programming
1.1 State the Importance of ‘C’
1.2 Explain the basic structure of ‘C’ Programming
1.3 KnowtheProgrammingstylewithsample program
1.4 Executea‘C’ Program
1.5 Knowaboutthecharacter set
1.6 Knowaboutconstants,variables, keywords&identifiers
1.7 Listvariousdatatypeswith examples
1.8 Explain different arithmetic operators, relational operators and logical
operatorswith theirprecedence
1.9 Explaintheassignment statements
1.10 Explainthe increment& decrement operators
1.11 IdentifythecompoundAssignment operators
1.12 ExplaintheI/Pfunctionsprintfand scanf
1.13 Knowvarioustypeconversion techniques

2. Decision&LoopControl Statements
2.1 StatetheImportanceofconditional expressions
2.2 List andexplainthevariousconditional statements
2.3 Explaintheswitch statement
2.4 Listthe differentiterativeloopsandexplainthem(for,do,while statements)
2.5 Definenestingandimplementwithsimple programs
2.6 Differentiate ‘break’ and ‘continue’ statements with programs
2.7 Mentionaboutthenullstatementsandcomma operator

3. Arrays& Strings
3.1 Define1-D and2-D Arrays.
3.2 Knowhow to initializeabove arraysandaccessarray elements
3.3 Explainsimpleprogramsusing arrays
3.4 Define ‘string’
3.5 Knowhow todeclareandinitialize string variables
3.6 Understandvariousstringhandling functions
3.7 Implementprogramsusingstring functions

4. Userdefinedfunctions
4.1 Define ‘function’
4.2 Understandtheneedfor Userdefined function
4.3 Knowthe returnvaluesandtheir types
4.4 Listthe fourstorageclassessupportedby C
4.5 Discusstheimportanceoffunctionprototypes in programming
4.6 Differentiatelocalandexternal variables
4.7 Identifyautomatic and static variablesanddiscussthemin detail

141
 5. Structures,Unions&Pointers
5.1 Definea structure
5.2 Describeaboutstructure variable
5.3 Explaininitializationof structures
5.4 Knowtheaccessingofmembersofa structure.
5.5 Illustrateconceptofstructure assignment
5.6 Explainhowtofindsizeofa structure.
5.7 Knowpassingofindividualmembersofa structuretoa function
5.8 DefineUnionandIllustrateuseof union
5.9 Declarepointer,assignpointer,andinitialize pointer
5.10 Discusspointer arithmetic.
5.11 Illustrate with example how pointer can be used to realize the effect ofparameterpassing by
reference.
5.12 Illustratewithexamplestherelationshipbetweenarraysand pointers.
5.13 Listvariousconditional andunconditionalpreprocessor directives

Note:1.ThisSubjectistobe taughtbyComputerEngg.faculty
2.Paper setting and paper evaluation is also to be done by Computer Engg Faculty.

HYPONATEDCOURSECONTENTS

1. Basicsof‘C’ Programming
Structure of a C program, Programming rules, Character Set, Keywords, Constants,
Variables,Data types, Type conversion, Arithmetic, Logical, Relational operators and
precedences –Assignment,Increment,Decrementoperators,evaluationofexpressions. I/P
functions

2. DecisionandLoopcontrol Statements
If, If-else, Nested If else, Break, Continue and Switch statements Loops:- For, While, Do-
while,NestingofLoops- Nullstatement..

3. Arraysand Strings
1 D Array declaration, Initialization, 2 D Array declaration, Initialization, Accessing of
Arrayelements,CharacterArraysdeclarationandInitializationofStrings,stringhandlingfunctions
4. Userdefined Functions
Function-Definition,Declaration,Returnstatement,passingparameterstofunction-
Functioncalls,Storageclassesofvariables, Scopeandvisibility.

5. Structures,Unions&Pointers
Structurefeatures,DeclarationandInitialization,AccessingofStructuremembers,Unions.Pointerdecl
aration,Arithmeticoperationsandpointers,PointersandArrays,VariousPreprocessordirectives.

142
REFERENCEBOOKS

1. YashwantKanetkar–“LetuslearnC”- BPBPublication,NewDelhi
2. BalaguruSwamy–“ProgramminginANSIC”-TMH,IIIEdition
3. ByronGottfried-ProgrammingInC –SchaumSeries
4. ReemaThareja-ProgramminginC -Oxforduniversitypress.
5. BrainW, KernighanandDennisM.Ritchie-CProgramming Language-pearson

BLUEPRINT

S. UnitTitle No. Weighta MarkswiseDistr Questionwis CO’s

N ofp geAlloca ibutionofWeigh eDistributionof Mappe
o erio ted tage Weightage d
ds
Ap An
R U Ap An R U
1 Basicsof‘C’ 10 16 3 13 1 2 C01
Programmi
ng

2 Decision 15 26 3 13 10 1 3 CO2
&Loop
Control
3 Arrays& 18 26 3 13 10 1 3 C03
Strings
4 Userde 15 16 3 13 1 2 C04
fined
Functions
5 Structures, 17 26 3 13 10 1 3 CO5
Unions
& Pointers
15 65
Total 75 110 30 5 13

ModelPapers: SyllabustobeCoveredforUnitTests

UnitTest LearningOutcomestob
eCovered
UnitTest-I From1.1to3.7
UnitTest-II From4.1to5.13

143
144
 ELECTRICAL CAD LABORATORY

No. of Total no. Mark

Cours of
periods/ s for Marks for SA
e code Course title periods
week FA

EE-306 ELECTRICAL CAD 03 45 20 30

LABORATORY

No. of CO’s
S.No Unit Title periods Mapped
Exercise on various tool bars, menus and
standardCommands, Practice on dimensioning and
1. 14 CO1
formatting commands, insert commands and view
commands.

Exercise on drawing isometric drawings in 2D and

2. 5 CO1
introduction to 3D

Exercise on drawing Electrical symbols, electrical

3. 15 CO2
wiring, electrical poles, towers and earthing systems.

Exercise on drawing of the core section of

4. 7 CO4
transformer, pole and plinth mounted sub stations.

5 4 CO5
Exercise drawing the end view of D.C.Machin

Total 45

1) The students will learn to create control designs using standard-

basedcommands and drafting tools.

2) To facilitate error-checking and schematic designing.

COURSE
3) The course will provide training on cinematic-quality rendering, 3D
OBJECTIVES
animation, and visual presentation of panel layout model.

4) Overall, this course is intended to help control designers to design

andimplement the control systems efficiently.

EE-306.1 Familiarise and Practice on design of different

CO1

145
 engineering drawing models using basic
commands

EE-306.2 Drawing electrical circuits using basic symbols

CO2
COURSE
OUTCOMES Practicing on various poles, towers and
CO3 EE-306.3
earthing systems.

Design and drawing core sections of

CO4 EE-306.4 Transformers, Pole and plinth mounted
substations.

Designing and development of end view of

CO5 EE-306.5
D.C.Machine.

LEARNING OUTCOMES

1. Exercise on various tool bars, menus and standard Commands, Practice on dimensioning and
formatting commands, insert commands and view commands.

1. Study components in menu bar, Customise and arrange tool bar, Display the
drawing created in the workingarea

2. Study of user coordinate system (UCS), Increase or decreaselayouts

3. Give the inputs in the command bar, Display name and purpose of the tools, Study
cross hair to locate thecursor

4. Invoke the commands, Getting started with AutoCAD, Create a new file, Open a
file, Save a file, Close afile

5. Delete the object or text, Copy the object or text, Paste entities, Zoom anobject.

6. Use LINE command, MLINE command, POLYLINEcommand

7. Draw a circle using CIRCLE command, with centre point and radius, POLYGON
command, HELIX command

8. Draw a rectangular, Triangular and quadrilateral areas filled with a solid, colour

with the help of planetool

9. Understand SPLINE command, ELLIPSE command, DIVcommand

10. Understand INSERT command, HATCH command, MIRROR command, ARRAYcommand

11. Understand STRETCH command, TRIM command, BREAK command, JOINTcommand,

12. Understand FILLET command, CHAMFER command, EXPLODE command, GROUP

146
 command.

13. QDIM command, Practice LINEAR, ALIGNED and COORDINATE dimensions RADIUS or
DIAMETER commands, ANGULUR dimension command, ARC LENGTH command BASELINE
command, CENTREMARK command, LAYER command, Control the visibility of objects and
assigned properties to objects, Practice the locking, unlocking of layers.
14. Write a text to drawing, change font size and style, Create a standard naming
convention to a text styles, table styles, layer styles, dimension stylesetc.

15. Insert blocks into current drawing file using INSERTcommand

16. Understand ATTACH RASTER IMAGE command, REDRAWcommand
17. Draw the orthographic views (side view, top view, front view) of anyobject
18. Draw the isometric views of any object, SHADE command, HIDEcommand.

2. Exercise on drawing isometric drawings in 2D and introduction to 3D

1. Visualise the isometric view SW,NE isometric views, Isometric SNAP and GRID
2. Use set snap spacing, Change the default axis colours, size of the crosshair display by using crosshair
tab
3. Create an isometric circle on the current isometric plane using Ellipse Isocircle

3. Exercise on drawing Electrical symbols, electrical wiring, electrical poles, towers and earthing
systems.

1. Draw various electrical symbols

2. Drawing of electrical wiring circuit of one lamp controlled by one switch
3. Drawing of electrical wiring circuit of stair case wiring
4. Drawing of electrical wiring circuit of godown wiring
5. Drawing of electrical wiring circuit of series parallel control circuits
6. Drawing of different electrical poles with cross-arms, insulators and stay sets
7. Drawing of transmission towers
8. Drawing of pipe earthing with dimensions
9. Drawing of plate earthing with dimensions

4. Exercise on drawing of the core section of transformer, pole and plinth mounted sub
stations.
1. Drawing of plan and elevation of different stepped cores of single phase transformer.
2. Drawing of Pole mounted substation and Plinth mounted substation with dimensions

5. Exercise drawing the end view of D.C.Machine nd view of a D.C. Machine

1. Drawing of end view of D.C. Machine

147
 HYPONATED COURSE CONTENTS

1. Exercise on various tool bars, menus and standard Commands, Practice on dimensioning and
formatting commands, insert commands and view commands.

Study components in menu bar-Customise and arrange tool bar-Display the drawing created in
the working area-user coordinate system (UCS)-Increase or decrease layouts-Give the inputs in
the command bar-Display name and purpose of the tools-Study cross hair to locate the cursor-
Invoke the commands-Getting started with AutoCAD-Create a new file-Open a file-Save a file-
Close a file- Delete the object or text -Copy the object or text-Paste entities-Zoom anobject.

Use LINE command-MLINE command-POLYLINE command-Draw a circle using CIRCLE command-

with centre point and radius-POLYGON command-HELIX command-Draw a rectangular-
Triangular and quadrilateral areas filled with a solid-colour with the help of plane tool-
Understand SPLINE command-ELLIPSE command- DIV command-Understand INSERT command-
HATCH command- MIRROR command-ARRAY command-Understand STRETCH command-TRIM
command-BREAK command-JOINT command-Understand FILLET command-CHAMFER
command-EXPLODE command- GROUP command

QDIM command-Practice LINEAR-ALIGNED and COORDINATE dimensions-RADIUS or DIAMETER

commands-ANGULUR dimension command-ARC LENGTH command-BASELINE command-
CENTREMARK command-LAYER command-Control the visibility of objects and assigned
properties to objects-Practice the locking, unlocking of layers-Write a text to drawing-change
font size and style- Create a standard naming convention to a text styles-table styles-layer styles-
dimension styles etc.

Insert blocks into current drawing file using INSERT command-Understand ATTACH RASTER
IMAGE command-REDRAW command-Draw the orthographic views (side view-top view-front
view) of any object-Draw the isometric views of any object-SHADE command-HIDE command.

2. Exercise on drawing isometric drawings in 2D and introduction to 3D

Visualise the isometric view SW-NE isometric views-Isometric SNAP and GRID-Use set snap
spacing- Change the default axis colours-size of the crosshair display by using crosshair tab-
Create an isometric circle on the current isometric plane using Ellipse Isocircle.

3. Exercise on drawing Electrical symbols, electrical wiring, electrical poles, towers and
earthing systems.

Draw various electrical symbols - Drawing of electrical wiring circuit of one lamp controlled by
one switch-stair case wiring- godown wiring-series parallel control circuits - Drawing of different
electrical poles with cross-arms-insulators and stay sets-transmission towers - Drawing of pipe
earthing and Plate earthing with dimensions.

4. Exercise on drawing of the core section of transformer, pole and plinth mounted sub
stations.
Drawing of plan and elevation of different stepped cores of single phase transformer - Drawing

148
 of Pole mounted substation and Plinth mounted substation with dimensions.

5. Exercise drawing the end view of D.C.Machine nd view of a D.C. Machine

Drawing of end view of D.C Machine.

Reference books

1. Get started with AutoCAD Electrical (Vol.1 and 2)– James Richardson-Musselburgh Press
Publishers
2. AutoCAD Electrical 2022 Black Book 7th edition–Gaurav Verma, Matt Weber – Cadcamcae Works
Publishers

ELECTRICAL MACHINES – I LABORATORY

149
 Total
Course No. of Mark Mark
no.of
code Course title periods/ period s for s for
week s FA SA

EE-307 Electrical Machines – I

3 45 40 60
Laboratory

S. No. of
Unit Title CO’S Mapped
No. Period
s
1 Characteristics of DC Generators 12 CO1

2 Testing and Speed control of DC motors 18 CO2

3 Measuring Instruments 6 CO3

4 Transducers and sensors 9 CO4

Total 45

CourseObjectives:

i. To familiarise with the knowledge of different materials , tools used in

Electrical Engineeringprocess
Course ii. To know the etiquette of working with the fellowworkforce
Objectives iii. To reinforce theoretical concepts by conducting Relevantexperiments
iv. To know the procedures for measuring resistance and power .
V. To know the working of transducers and sensors

CourseOutcomes:

150
 Demonstrate the skill of planning and organizing
CO experimental setup for D.C Generators,performing
EE-307.1
1 operations for investigating performance and to sketch
graphically.

Analyse the experimental results to draw inferences, to

Course CO make recommendations for selection of D,C motor and
EE-307.2
2 to run at various speeds for different applications and
outcome
plotting various characteristics.
s
CO Conduct a test for measurement of resistance and
EE-307.3
3 power.

CO EE-307.4 Analyse the working of transducers and sensors

4

Learning outcomes:

1. Characteristics of DCGenerators

1. Obtain OCC of a DC shunt Generator at below, rated and above rated speeds.

2. Obtain Internal and External characteristics of DC ShuntGenerator.

3. Obtain Internal and External characteristics of DC SeriesGenerator.

4. Obtain Internal and External characteristics of DC CompoundGenerator

2. Testing and Speed Control of D.CMotors

1. Identify the terminals of the following DCMachinesi) DC Shuntmotorii) DC SeriesMotor

2. Study the parts of DC 3 - point starter, 4 - point starter and Drum ControllerStarter.

3. Obtain performance characteristics by conducting Brake Test on DC ShuntMotor

4. Obtain performance characteristics by conducting Brake Test on DC SeriesMotor.

5. Speed control of DC Shunt Motorbyi) Rheostatic controlmethod ii) Field controlmethod

6. ObtaintheperformanceofaDCShuntMotorbyconductingSwinburne’stest.

3. Measuring Instruments

1. Calibration of dynamometer type ofwatt meter.

2. Measurement of earth resistance by using megger.

151
3. Transducers and sensors
1. Obtain the performance characteristics of LVDT by conducting an experiment.
2. Obtain the performance characteristics of thermocouple by conducting an experiment.

HYPONATED COURSE CONTENTS

1. Characteristics of DCGenerators

OCC of a DC shunt Generator at below, rated and above ratedspeeds- Internal and External
characteristics of DC ShuntGenerator- Internal and External characteristics of DC
SeriesGenerator - Internal and External characteristics of DC CompoundGenerator

2. Testing and Speed Control of D.CMotors

Identification of terminals of DC machines-parts of DC 3 point starter- Brake Test on DC Shunt

Motor- Brake Test on DC SeriesMotor-Methods of Speed control of DC Shunt Motor-
Swinburne’stest on DCShuntMotor.

3. Measuring Instruments

Calibration of dynamometer type ofwatt meter-Measurement of earth resistance by using

megger.

4. Transducers and sensors

Performance characteristics of LVDT- performance characteristics of thermocouple.

Competencies to be achieved by the student

S.No Experiment title Competencies Key Competencies

1 OCC of a DC shunt  Draw the relevant circuit diagram  Make the

Generator at for OCCtest. connections
below, rated and  Select the proper DC according to
supplyvoltage. circuitdiagram.
above rated
 Choose the proper range of  Observe and
speeds.
voltmeter, ammeterand note the
rheostat. readings in a
 Make the connections according tabularform.
to circuitdiagram.  Drawthe
 Ensure that all the instruments graphbetweenIf
are connected in proper polarity. Vs Eg.
 Check the speed and maintain it
constant by meansof field
regulator before taking every

152
 reading.
 Observe and note the readings in
a tabularform.
 Drawthe graphbetweenIfVs Eg.
 Draw the relevant circuit diagram
 Select the proper DC supply
voltage.
 Choose the proper range of
voltmeter, ammeter and
Internal and  Make the
rheostat.
External connections
 Make the connections according
characteristics of according to
to circuit diagram.
2, circuit diagram
DC shunt  Ensure that all the instruments
 Observe and
3, generator DC are connected in proper polarity.
note the
4 series generator  Check the speed and maintain it
readings in a
constant by means of field
tabular form.
DC compound regulator before taking every
 Draw the graph
generator reading.
between IaVs Eg ,
 Apply load in steps upto rated Il Vs Vl
current
 Observe and note the readings in
a tabular form.
 Draw the graph between IaVs Eg ,
Il Vs Vl
 Measure the
resistance
 Note down the name across
platedetails. different
Identify the  Locate the different terminals of terminals using
terminals of the a DC Shunt Motor / DC Series multimeter.
following DC Motor  Identification
 Measure the resistance across of armature
Machines
different terminals using and shunt field
multimeter. / series field
DC Shuntmotor,
 Record the resistance values of resistance
DC SeriesMotor theterminals. according to
5
 Identify the armature and shunt resistance
field / series field resistance valuesobserve
according to resistance d.
valuesobserved.

 Locate the Line, Armature, Field  Know the

terminals of the starter (L-A-F) purpose of
 Locate NVR coil and OLRcoils. NVR and
 Know the purpose of NVR and OLRcoils.
Study the parts OLRcoils.  Properly
of DC 3 point  Properly connect Starter and handle the
6 starter. motorterminals Starterterminal
 Properly handle the s.
Starterterminals.
 Properly start themotor.

 Select the proper DC  Connect the

153
 supplyvoltage
 Choose the proper range of
voltmeter, ammeter and
rheostat.
 Connect the circuit as per the
circuit as per
circuitdiagram.
the
 Ensure that all the instruments
circuitdiagram.
are connected in proper
 Note readings
polarity.
by varying
 Start the Motor with thestarter.
loads on the
 Note the readings of speed N,
motor upto
current I and spring balance for
Performance rated current.
a particularload.
characteristics  Calculate the
 Pour water in the break
torque, input,
of DC (Shunt, drumcarefully.
output
Series)  Check the speed and maintain it
andefficiency.
constant by means of field
 Draw
by conducting regulator before taking
7,8 performance
Brake Test everyreading.
curves ofmotor
 Note readings by varying loads
on the motor upto rated
current.
 Calculate the torque, input,
output andefficiency.
 Draw performance curves
ofmotor
 Select the proper DC  Connect the
supplyvoltage circuit as per
 Choose the proper range of the
voltmeter, ammeterand circuitdiagram.
 rheostat.  Record the
Speed control  Connect the circuit as per the readings of
of DC Shunt circuitdiagram. Ammeter and
Motor by  Ensure that all the instruments Tachometerby
are connected inproper gradually
(a) Rheostatic increasing the
 polarity.
control  Handle the 3- pointStarter resistance in
9  Set the Field Resistance of the the Field
method rheostat.
motor bygradually
(b)  moving the knob on the  Draw the
rheostat coil. graph speed Vs
Fieldcontrol  Record the readings of Ammeter Fieldcurrent.
and Tachometerby  Observe the
Method gradually increasing the
graph and
resistance in the Field rheostat.
write
 Draw the graph speed Vs theconclusions
Fieldcurrent. .
 Observe the graph and write
theconclusions.
10  Select the proper DC  Connect the
supplyvoltage circuit as per
 Choose the proper range of the
voltmeter, ammeter and circuitdiagram.
 Calculate the

154
 rheostat.
 Connect the circuit as per the
circuitdiagram.
 Ensure that all the instruments
are connected in proper polarity.
 keep the rheostat in maximum
position in armature so that
minimum voltage is applied
toarmature
 Adjusting the field rheostat to
minimumposition
 Adjust the speed of the motor to
its rated value by usingits
FieldRheostat.
 Taking the readings of Ammeter
and Voltage byopening the
Fieldswitch efficiency of
Performance of  Taking the readings of Voltage and the DC
a DC Shunt current by closing the field Machine as a
Motor by switch and gradually decreasing Generator and
conducting the resistance in the Rheostat. as a Motor at
 Calculate the efficiency of the DC variousloads.
Swinburne’s Machine as a Generator and as a  Draw
test. Motor at variousloads. theconclusions
 Draw theconclusions Adjusting the
field rheostat to
minimumposition
 Adjust the speed of the motor to
its rated value by usingits
FieldRheostat.
 Taking the readings of Ammeter
and Voltage byopening the
Fieldswitch
 Taking the readings of Voltage and
current by closing the field
switch and gradually decreasing
the resistance in the Rheostat.
 Calculate the efficiency of the DC
Machine as a Generator and as a
Motor at variousloads.
 Draw theconclusions
 Select the proper  Connect the
Calibration of supplyvoltage circuit as per
dynamometer  Choose the proper range of the
type ofwatt voltmeter, ammeter and circuitdiagra
11 m.
rheostat.
meter
 Connect the circuit as per the  Load is
circuitdiagram. switched on
 Ensure that all the and note
instruments are connected in down the

155
 proper polarity.
 Initially keep in no load
condition.
readings of
 Switch on power supply.
ammeter,volt
 Load is switched on and note
meter and
down the readings of
wattmeter.
ammeter,voltmeter and
 Calculate the
wattmeter.
error and
 Increase the load in steps and
percentage
note down the corresponding
error.
meter readings at every step.
 Remove the load gradually
and switch off the supply.
 Calculate the error and
percentage error.

 Rotation of the
handle of the
megger at
uniform speed
 The value of
resistance is
 Connect the megger as per measured directly
the connection diagram. from the
instrument.
Measurement of  Switch ON the megger
12 earth resistance  Rotate the handle of the
by using megger. Megger at uniform speed.

 The value of resistance is

measured directly from the
instrument.

156
  Connections are given as per the
circuit diagram
 The screw gauge is adjusted for
minimal voltage
 The core is moved in clockwise
 Connections
direction with the help of screw
are given as
gauge
per the circuit
 The output voltage for each
Performance diagram
1mm displacement was added
13 characteristics  Performance
and noted
of LVDT  The displacement core was
characteristic
brought to initial position and s of LVDT is
moved in anticlockwise studied.
direction.
 Again for each 1mm
displacement was noted
 A graph is
plotted between displacement
and output voltage.

 Connect the
multi-meter
to the
 Connect the multi-meter to
Thermocoupl
the Thermocouple as shown
e as shown in
in the diagram
the diagram
performance  Heat the water up to90 ̊ C.
 Graph is
14 characteristics of  The emf is noted down aftera
plotted
thermocouple. certain interval such as 5 ̊C.
between emf
 Graph is plotted between emf
and
and Thermocouple.
Thermocoupl
 Calculate time
e.
constant from the graph
 Calculate time
constant from
the graph.

CIRCUITS AND TRANSFORMERS LABORATORY

157
 No. of
Total No. of
Course code Course Title periods Marks for FA Marks for SA
periods
/week

CIRCUITS AND
EE-308 TRANSFORMERS 3 45 40 60
LABORATORY

COURSE OUTCOMES MAPPING

S.No Major Topics No. of periods CO’s Mapped

1 DC Circuits and DC Theorems 12 CO1

2 AC Circuits 12 CO2

3 Performance and testing of Transformers 21 CO3

Total 45

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

i) Verification of KCL, KVL and DC Theorems

ii) Observe the response at R, L and C in series RLC circuit, determining

Course Objectives the power in single phase and three phase balanced circuits

iii) To reinforce theoretical concepts of transformers by conducting

relevant experiments.

Course CO1 EE-308-1 Understand the connection patterns in bread board,

able to connect circuit in bread board, verify DC

158
 theorems

Understand the operating procedure of CRO, able to

EE-308-2 connect the voltmeters and wattmeters in a circuit,
CO2
able to determine the power in single phase and three
Outcomes phase balanced circuits

Able to determine the polarity of Transformer

terminals and its transformation ratio, Understand the
CO3 EE-308-3 testing procedure of single phase transformers to
determine its parameters, able to find dielectric
strength of transformer oil

Course Outcomes:

LEARNING OUTCOMES

1.0. DC Circuits and DC Theorems

1.1. Verification of OHM’s law

1.2. Verification of KCL and KVL
1.3. Verification of Super Position Theorem
1.4. Verification of Thevenin’s Theorem
1.5. Verification of Maximum Power Transfer Theorem

2.0. AC Circuits

2.1. Verifying the response at R, L and C in series RLC circuit

2.2. Measurement of power in single phase circuit by 3-Voltmeter method
2.3. Measurement of power in three phase balanced circuit by 2-Wattmeter method

3.0. Performance and testing of Transformers

3.1. Determination of the polarity and voltage transformation ratio of a single phase transformer
3.2. Conduct load test on 1-phase Transformer and calculate efficiency and regulation
3.3. Conduct O.C. and S.C. tests on 1-phase transformer and from result
a) Draw the equivalent circuit
b) Calculate efficiency at various loads and power factor
c) Find the load at which maximum efficiency occurs
3.4. Conduct Oil testing using oil testing kit to know the dielectric strength of transformer oil

HYPONATED COURSE CONTENT

159
1.0. Verification of DC Circuits and DC Theorems
Verification of OHM’s law, KCL and KVL – Verification of DC Theorems (Superposition,
Thevenin’s and Maximum power transfer)

2.0. AC Circuits
Verifying the response at R, L and C in series RLC circuit - Measurement of power - in single
phase circuit by 3 Voltmeter method - in three phase balanced circuit by 2-Wattmeter method

3.0. Performance and testing of Transformers

Determination of - polarity of terminals - voltage transformation ratio – Direct load test on 1-phase
Transformer – Calculation of efficiency and regulation - O.C. and S.C. tests on 1-phase transformer -
equivalent circuit - efficiency at various loads and power factor - load at which maximum efficiency occurs -
Test to know the dielectric strength of transformer oil

Competencies & Key competencies to be achieved by the student

Sl.No. Experiment Competencies Key Competencies

Title

1 Verification of  Understand the connection patterns in  Connection of devices with

DC Circuits and bread board exact ratings as per circuit
 Identify the correct rating of resistors, diagram in bread board
DC Theorems voltage sources and meters  Verification of laws and
 Connection of circuit diagram on bread theorems in DC
board with proper input sources and
meters
 Interpreting the responses of various
circuits related to verification of KCL, KVL
and DC Theorems
2 AC Circuits  Operating of CRO  Verifying the response at R,
 Setting up the desired voltage source L and C in series RLC circuit
frequency  Ability to measure power in
 Connection of circuit diagram on bread single phase and balanced
board with proper input sources three phase circuits
 Using CRO to observe output waveform
patterns
 Usage of 3 voltmeter and 2 wattmeter
methods to measure power in single
phase and three phase respectively
3 Performance  Conduct polarity test and ascertain the  Identifying the polarity of
and testing of relative polarities of secondary windings. transformer terminals
 Interpret the name plate details of  Ability to find
Transformers transformer transformation ratio of
 By selecting proper range and type of transformer
meters the circuit diagram to determine  Calculation of efficiency and
voltage transformation ratio is to be voltage regulation by
connected performing O.C., S.C. and
 Make connections as per circuit diagram load tests
with appropriate range and type of  Ability to determine
meters to conduct load test, O.C. test and dielectric strength of
S.C. test transformer oil

160
 Follow the precautions to be taken (ex:
Check for loose and/or wrong connections
if any and rectify)
 Perform the tests as per standard
procedure and make a note of test results
 Calculate the efficiency and regulations
from test data
 Plot the efficiency curve and indicate the
maximum efficiency point
 Conduction of transformer Oil testing
using oil testing kit to know the dielectric
strength of transformer oil.

ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING LABORATORY

161
 No. of Total
Course Marks Marks
Course Title periods No. of
Code for FA for SA
/ Week Periods

EE-309 ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING 3 45 40 60

LABORATORY

No. of CO’s
S.No Major Topics
periods Mapped

1. Semiconductor Devices 12 CO1

2. Power Supplies 12 CO2

3. Amplifiers 6 CO3

4. Oscillators 9 CO4

5. Linear Integrated Circuits 6 C05

Total 45

COURSE OUTCOMES MAPPING

i. To impart adequate knowledge on electronic devices and circuits.

ii. To develop skills of using amplifier and oscillators.
COURSE
OBJECTIVES iii. To enable effective usage of linear integrated circuits.

Illustrate the characteristics of various electronic

CO1 EE-309.1
devices.

CO2 EE-309.2 DevelopingPower Supply Circuits.

COURSE
OUTCOMES Designing amplifier and using them in various
CO3 EE-309.3
applications.

CO4 EE-309.4 Practice on various oscillator circuits.

Practicing linear integrated circuits to develop

CO5 EE-309.5
various applications.

LEARNING OUTCOMES

162
1. Semiconductor Devices

1. Plot the VI characteristics of PN junction diode.

2. Plot the VI characteristics of Zener diode.
3. Plot the Input and Output characteristics of NPN transistor in Common Emitter
configuration.
4. Plot the VI characteristics of Photo Diode
5. Plot the VI characteristics of LDR

2. Power Supplies

1. Implement Half Wave rectifier with and without filter.

2. Implement Full Wave rectifier with and without filter.
3. Implement Bridge Wave rectifier with and without filter.
4. Build a regulated power supply with (a) Zener Diode and (b) Voltage Regulator IC.

3. Amplifiers

1. Plot the frequency response characteristics of RC coupled amplifier.

4. Oscillators

1. Measure the frequency of Hartley oscillator.

2. Measure the frequency of Colpitts oscillator.

5. Linear Integrated Circuits

1. Implement Inverting Amplifier with IC 741 OpAmp.

2. Implement Inverting Integrator with IC 741 OpAmp.

Note : 1. This Lab is to be handled by Electronics & Communication Engg. faculty

2. Paper setting and paper evaluation is also to be done by Electronics &
Communication Engg Faculty.

HYPONATED COURSE CONTENTS

1. Semiconductor Devices

VI characteristics of PN junction diode - VI characteristics of Zener diode - Input and Output

characteristics of NPN transistor in Common Emitter configuration - VI characteristics of Photo
Diode - VI characteristics of LDR.

2. Power Supplies

163
 Half Wave rectifier with and without filter - Full Wave rectifier with and without filter - Bridge
Wave rectifier with and without filter - Regulated power supply with (a) Zener Diode and (b)
Voltage Regulator IC.

3. Amplifiers

Frequency response characteristics of RC coupled amplifier.

4. Oscillators

Measure the frequency of Hartley oscillator - Measure the frequency of Colpitts oscillator.

5. Linear Integrated Circuits

Inverting Amplifier with IC 741 OpAmp - Inverting Integrator with IC 741 OpAmp

Competencies & Key competencies to be achieved by the student

Sl.No. Experiment Competencies Key Competencies

Title

1 VI  Understand the connection patterns  Connection of devices with exact

Characteristics in bread board ratings as per circuit diagram in
bread board
of  Identify diode,the correct rating of  Ability to plot the VI characteristics
Semiconductor voltage sources and meters of various semiconductor
Devices devices(PNjunction diode,zener
 Connection of circuit diagram on diode, photo diode, LDR) and to plot
bread board with proper input input/output characteristics of NPN
sources and meters transistor in CE configuration

 Interpreting the responses of the

various semiconductor devices.

2  Operating of CRO
 Setting up the desired voltage
Power source frequency  Verifying the responses at CRO with
 Connection of circuit diagram on kit and without filter for various
Supplies
with proper input sources with and rectifiers(HalfWaverectifier,fullwave
without filter and bridge rectifier)
 Using CRO to observe output  Ability to build regulated power
waveform patterns with and supply with zener diode and voltage
without filter regulator IC
3  Operating of CRO  Verifying the response at CRO
 Setting up the desired voltage
Amplifiers source frequency  Ability to plot the frequency
 Connection of circuit diagram on kit response characteristics of RC
with proper input sources coupled amplifier
 Using CRO to observe frequency
response waveform patterns

164
4  Operating of CRO  Verifying the output waveform at
 Setting up the desired voltage CRO (Hartley and colpitts oscillators)
Oscillators source frequency  Ability to draw output waveform
 Connection of circuit diagram on kit
with proper input sources
 Using CRO to observe frequency
response waveform patterns

5  Identify the components  Verify the input and output

 Setup the circuit on the breadboard waveforms are out of phase.
and check the connections. (inverting amplifier)
 Switch on the power supply  Verify the obtained gain is same as
Linear  Give input. designed value of gain.
 Observe input and output on the  Observe input and output on two
Integrated
two channels of the oscilloscope channels of the oscilloscope
Circuits simultaneously. simultaneously
 Note down and draw the input and  Ability to draw input and
output waveforms on the graph outputwaveforms(integrating
amplifier)

PROGRAMMINGINCLABORATORY

165
 No. Total
Course Marks Marks
CourseTitle ofperiod No.ofP
Code for FA forSA
s /Week eriods

EE-310 PROGRAMMING IN 3 45 40 60
CLABORATORY

COURSEOUTCOMESMAPPING

S.No UnitTitles No. of CO’s

periods Mapped
1. CProgrammingBasics 6 CO1
2. Decision& LoopControlStatements 9 CO2
3. Exercisesonfunctions 6 CO3
4 Arrays,StringsandPointers in C 9 CO4
5. Structures,Unions&Pre-processorDirectives 6 C05
Total 45

i) To impart adequate knowledge on the need of

programminglanguages and problemsolvingtechniques.
COURSEOBJ ii) To develop programming skills using the fundamentals and
ECTIVES basicsof Clanguage.
iii) To enable effective usage of arrays, structures, functions,
pointersandto implementthememorymanagement concepts.

Design problems solving with flow chart

CO1 EE-310.1
andalgorithm.
Practice conditionalanditerativestatementsto
CO2 EE-310.2 writeC programs.
COURSEOU
TCOMES CO3 EE-310.3 ExecuteCprogramsthatuse functions.
Execute C programs using arrays and strings
CO4 EE-310.4
Practiceonstructures,unions.
CO5 EE-310.5

LEARNINGOUTCOMES

1. CProgrammingBasics
1. Editingandexecutingsimpleprograms(usingprintfandscanf functions) .

166
2. Exercisesonoperators in C.

2. Decision&LoopControlStatements
1. Exercises on conditional statements (if, if – else, else if statements).
2. Exercisesonswitchstatements andconditional operator.
3. Exercisesonloopingstatements(while, do–while andfor statements).

3. Exercisesonfunctions
1. Exercises on functions to demonstrate prototyping, parameter passing, function
returningvalues
2. Exerciseson recursion.

4. Arrays,StringsandPointersinC
1. Exercisesonone dimensionalarraysandtwo dimensional arrays.
2. ExercisesonStringshandlingfunctionscomparison,copyingand concatenation.
3. Exercises to demonstrate use of Pointers, pointers as function arguments, functions
returningpointers.

5. Structures,Unions&Pre-processorDirectives
1. Exerciseon structures.
2. ExercisesonunionsandCpre-processor Directives.

Note: 1.ThisLabistobehandledbyComputerEngg.faculty
2.Papersettingandpaperevaluationisalso to bedone byComputerEnggFaculty.

HYPONATEDCOURSECONTENTS

1. CProgrammingBasics

Editing, compiling and executing simple programs (using printf and scanf functions) -
Exercisesonoperators inC.
2. Decision&LoopControlStatements
Exercises on conditional statements (if, if – else, else if statements) , switch statements
andconditionaloperator) -Exercisesonloopingstatements(while, do–while andforstatements).

3. Exercisesonfunctions
Exercises on functions to demonstrate prototyping, parameter passing, function - returningvalues
andrecursion.

4. Arrays,StringsandPointersinC
Exercises on one dimensional arrays and two dimensional arrays, Strings handling
functionscomparison, copying and concatenation - Exercises to demonstrate use of Pointers,
pointers asfunctionarguments,functions returningpointers

167
5. Structures,Unions&PreprocessorDirectives
Exerciseonstructures,unionsandCpre-processorDirectives.

Competencies & Key competencies to be achieved by the student

Sl.No Experiment Title Competencies Key Competencies

.

1 CProgrammingBasics  Opening of Turbo C  Perform simple

 Understand about mathematics
work space related programs
 Procedure to open by using Turbo C
new file in Turbo C  Familiarization with
 Able to write simple work space of
programs Turbo C
 Understanding the
procedure to save file.
 Understand about
different tabs in Turbo
C
 To know about
Execution of program
in Turbo C
 Understand to see
ouput file

2  Opening of new file in  Writing of different

Decision&LoopControlStatements Turbo C programs using
 Understand about loop control
different looping statements
statements like if, if-  Observation of
else, while, do-while outputs
and for loop
 Understand about
SWITCH statements
 Executing different
programs related to
loop control
statements.
 Save program file
Turbo C
 Understand about
output of program
3 Exercisesonfunctions  Opening of new file in  Usage of recursive
Turbo C functions
 Understand to use  Usage of External
function in C program and internal
 Understand to use variables
recursive functions in  Usage of function

168
 C call technique
 Understand to use  Observation of
Function call outputs
technique in C
program
 Save the program file
 Understand about
output of program
4  Opening of new file in  Usage of one
Exercises on Arrays,StringsandPointersinC Turbo C dimensional and
 Understand about multi dimensional
arrays and their usage arrays
 Understand about  Usage of string
strings and their usage handling functions
 Understand about  Usage of pointers
pointers and their  Writing program
usage using arrays ,
 Writing of C programs strings and
using arrays , strings pointers
and pointers  Observation of
 Save the program file outputs
 Understand about
output of a program

5 Structures,Unions&PreprocessorDirectives  Opening of new file in  Usage of structures

Turbo C in program
 Understand about  To know the
Structures difference between
 Understand about structures and
unions unions
 Understand about  Types of pre
preprocessor processor
directives directives and their
 Usage of structures, importance in C
unions and pointers in program
C program  Writing of
 Save the program file programs using
 Understand about structures
output of a program  Observation of
outputs

169
IV SEMESTER
170
 DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATIONS
(IV SEMESTER)

Instruction
Scheme of Examination
period /week Total
Subject Period
Name of the Subject End
Code Practical/ /year Duration Sessional Total
Theory Exam
Tutorial (hours) Marks Marks
Marks

THEORY
Electrical Installation
EE-401 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
& Estimation

Electrical Machines-
EE-402 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
II

EE-403 Power Systems – I 4 - 60 3 20 80 100

Power Electronics &

EE-404 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
PLC

General Mechanical
EE-405 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
Engineering

PRACTICAL
EE-406 Electrical - 6 90 3 40 60 100

171
 EngineeringDrawing

Electrical Machines-
EE-407 - 3 45 3 40 60 100
II Laboratory

Communications
EE-408 - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Skills Laboratory

Power Electronics
EE-409 - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Laboratory

Hybrid Power
EE-410 - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Systems Laboratory

TOTAL 21 18 585 30 300 700 1000

NOTE:03 periods per week are allotted to Student Centric Activity (Library, Sports& Games, Clean & Green,
Preparation for placements etc)

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION AND ESTIMATION

Total
No. of Mark Mark
Course no. of
Course title periods/wee s for s for
code period
k FA SA
s

EE-401 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

ANDESTIMATION 4 60 20 80

S. No.of
No. Unit Title CO’S Mapped
Periods
1 Wiring Systems 7 CO1

2 Estimation of Lighting and Power Loads 20 CO2

3 Estimation of OH Lines and Earthing systems 18 CO3

4 Departmental Tests 9 CO4

5 Electrical Safety 6 C05

Total 60

172
 Course Objectives:

(i) To understand different wiringsystems, service mains

(ii) To estimate the cost of domestic installations,industrialinstallations
Course Objectives of electrical equipment and earthing
(iii) To know the safety precautions, Departmental procedure for
acquiring electrical connection

Course outcomes:

Describing the specifications of various wiring

CO1 EE-404.1 accessories and different components of wiring
system

Estimate the materials required and their cost in

CO2 EE-404.2 domestic installation and power wiring installation.

Estimate the electrical materials required for OH

CO3 EE-404.3
lines, Earthing systems.

Extending the knowledge on departmental

Course outcomes procedure for acquiring electrical connection.
CO4 EE-404.4
Calculation of Transformer ratings for Rural
electrification

Extending the knowledge on electrical safety and

C05 EE-404.5
precautions to be taken

Learning Outcomes:

1. Wiring systems

173
 1.1 Mention the use of wires, cables, Types of Installations and wiringAccessories.

1.2 Explain (i) Surface conduit system (ii) Concealed wiring system.

1.3 State merits and demerits of (i) Surface conduit system (ii) Concealed wiring system.

1.4 List different types of knife switches.

1.5 List the MCB types with specifications and mention their applications (MCCB,ELCB AND
RCCB)

1.6 List the different types of fuses and specify the materials used.

1.7 List different ratings of fuses and state their applications.

1.8State the reasons for not using fuse in Neutralwire

2. Estimation of Lighting and PowerLoads

2.1 Define service mains and explain different types of servicemains

2.2 List the electrical material used in wiring the service mains.

2.3 List the schedule of rates used in preparingestimate for house wiring and service mains

2.4 Estimate the material requirement with cost for (i) PVC conduit wiring and (ii) PVC casing
capping wiring for the given plan of abuilding.

2.5 Draw the wiring layout for a big office building, workshop/ Electrical Laboratory
2.6 Prepare layout and draw single line wiring diagrams as per standard practice for a given
set of machines in aworkshop.
2.7 Prepare the estimate of the materials for the complete installation of machines in a work
shop / laboratory as per standard practice

2.8 Select the type of wiring and service mains used for the irrigation pumpset.

2.9 Prepare an estimate for electrifying the irrigation pump set scheme

2.10 Prepare estimation for submersible pumpinstallation

3. Estimation of OH Lines and Earthingsystems

3.1 Select the type of insulators to be used for over headlines
3.2. Calculate the total number of insulators required for the givenOH Line
3.3 Select the type, size and number of cross arms required for the overheadline
3.4 Determine the size and total length of overhead conductor required for the line givingdue
Consideration for the sag to be allowed
3.5 Estimate the quantity of all materials required for given 11 kV and 400V overheadlines
3.6Draw and explain plinth and Pole Mounted transformersubstations
3.7 Estimate the quantity of all the electrical accessories and components required for thegiven
(i) Pole mounted transformer (ii) Plinth mounted transformer

174
 3.8 State the purpose of Earthing and mention its types that are normallyused.

3.9 Select the suitable type of Earthing for a given installation

3.10 Draw and explain (i) pipe earthing (ii) plateEarthing with neat sketches.

3.11Estimate the materials required for pipe and plateearthing.

4. Departmental Tests

4.1 Describe the departmental procedure for obtaining a serviceconnection

4.2 Specify insulation resistance desirable for a given electricalinstallation

4.3 Specify the value of earth resistance to be maintained for a given electrical Installations

4.4 List different tests to be conducted before energizing a newly constructed electrical
installation.
4.5 Describe the test procedure for continuity of wiring in an electricalinstallation.

4.6 Explain the procedure for conducting insulation test of domesticwiring

4.7 Explain the Survey of load particulars in a villagefor

(i) Domestic(ii)industrial (iii) agriculturalloads.

4.8 Calculate the capacity of a transformer required assuming suitable diversityfactor

4.9 Determine the location point of transformer and calculate the tail end voltage regulations

5. Electrical Safety

5.1 State the importance of electrical safety.

5.2 State the common electrical hazards.
5.3 Define electric shock and state the effects of electric shock on human body.
5.4 State the safety precautions to be taken to avoid electric shock.
5.5 List safety equipments used while working with electricity.
5.6 Describe the procedure of first aid for shock treatment to an electrocuted person.
5.7 State the reasons for fire accidents and state the prevention techniques.
5.8 Define fire extinguisher and State fire extinguishing techniques.
5.9 List different fire extinguishers in common use.

HYPONATEDCOURSE CONTENT

1. Wiring Systems

175
 Introduction, size of wires, standard wires, types of wires - various wiring systems -- Distribution
boards - Main switches – Different types of fuses and fuse carriers.

2. Estimation of Lighting and powerloads

Estimation of domestic lighting installation service main - specification - quantity of materials
required for service main – estimation and selection of interior wiring system suitable to a given
building - number of sub circuits - calculation of length of wire and quantity of accessories
required - estimates of materials for execution of the domestic wiring installation - Power wiring
installation Drawing wiring layout for a big office building, electrical laboratory, - Irrigation pump
installation - Estimation upto 10 HP service main - calculation of size and quantity of wire and
other components required - Types of starter and control panel – Estimate for the installation of
submersible pump.

3. Estimation of OH Lines andEarthing

Distribution lines of 11 kV and 400Volt OH lines estimation only -quantity of materials required
for lines of length 1 km - number of poles - Cross arms - insulators - conductor length and size -
Distribution transformer erection- Estimation of quantity of materials required for structures,
isolators - HG fuse isolators, lightening arrestors for pole mounted substation and plinth
mounted substation Quantity estimation for materials required in electrical Earthing for pipe
earthling and plate Earthing

4. Departmental Tests

Electrical installation testing - departmental procedure for obtaining service connection -

desirable insulation resistance for domestic and power circuits - procedure for conducting
insulation resistance test and continuity tests, earth continuity test - Design of rural
electrification scheme - Load survey-determination of capacity of transformer - estimation of
quantity of materials required for the erection of distribution lines and11 kV feeder from a
nearby 11 kV feeder - determining the feasibility of placement of distribution transformer

5. Electrical Safety
Safety procedures - Electric shock and first aid, causes for fire hazards in Electricalinstallations-
reasons for fire accidents - prevention techniques -fire extinguisher- different fire extinguishers

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. G.C Garg &S.L.Uppal-Electrical Wiring ,Estimating & costing Electricalwiring,

2. J.B.Gupta -Estimating &costing
3. BVS Rao -Maintenance and Operation of Electrical Equipment – Vol-I-TMH
4. S. Rao -Testing, Commissioning Operation & Maintenance of Electrical equipment–TMH
5. V.K Mehta- Electrical Estimating & costing

176
 Blue print:

Marks wise Question wise CO’S

Weightage distribution of distribution of
S. No. of mapped
Unit Title allocated
No. periods R U Ap R U Ap

0 0 CO1
1 Wiring Systems 7 16 6 10 2 1

Estimation of
2 Lighting and 36 CO2
6 10 20 2 1 2
Power Loads 20

Estimation of
3 OH Lines and
18 26 6 10 10 2 1 1 CO3
Earthing
systems

Departmental
Tests 0 0 CO4
4 9 16 6 10 2 1

5 Electrical Safety
16 6 10 0 2 1 0 CO5
6

Total 60 110 30 50 30 10 5 3

177
Model Papers:Syllabus to be Covered for Unit Tests

Unit Test Learning Outcomes to be Covered

Unit Test-I From 1.1 to 2.10

Unit Test-II From 3.1 to 5.9

ELECTRICAL MACHINES-II

Total
Course No.of Marks Marks
Course title no. of
code periods/week for FA for SA
periods

EE-402 ELECTRICAL MACHINES-II 5 75 20 80

No.of
S.no Unit Title CO’S Mapped
Periods
1 3- Phase Induction Motors 20 CO1

2 Fractional Horse Power Motors 12 CO2

3 Alternators 16 CO3

4 Parallel operation of Alternators 12 CO4

5 Synchronous motors 15 CO5

75

Course Objectives:

1) To familiarize with the knowledge of Induction Motors and Fractional

178
 Course Horse Power Motors
Objectives 2) To understand the working of Alternators and its parallel operation
3) To Understand the working of Synchronous motors

Course outcomes:

Explain the working of 3-phase induction motors and

CO1 EE-402.1 understand equivalent circuit parameters, power,
torque, efficiency.

EE-402.2 Explain the working of fractional Horse power motors

CO2
Course
Describe construction and working principle of
outcomes CO3 EE-402.3
Alternator.

Manipulate paralleling and synchronisation methods of

CO4 EE-402.4
Alternators.

CO5 EE-402.5 Explain the working of Synchronous motors

Learning outcomes:

1. Three-phase Induction Motors

1.1 Principle of Production of Rotating Magnetic Field in 3-phaseSystem.
1.2 Explain the construction of Induction motor- slip ring and squirrelcage
1.3 Compare Slip ring & Squirrel cage Inductionmotors.
1.4 State the working principle of 3 phase inductionmotor.
1.5 Explain working of 3 phase induction motor on(i)no-load (ii) Load.
1.6 Derive the expression relating to TORQUE, POWER and SLIP and solve simple problems.
1.7 Draw Torque – Slipcurves.
1.8 Explain(i)No-loadtest (ii) Blockedrotortest
1.9 State the Starters used for different ratings of induction motors.
1.10 Explain the working of the following starters with the help of circuitdiagram.
(i) D.O.L.starter (ii) Star/Delta Starter
(iii) Auto – Transformerstarter (iv) Rotor resistance starter
1.11 Explain the speed control of inductor motorsby
(i) Frequencychangingmethod(ii) Pole changingmethod (iii) Injecting voltage inrotor
circuit(iv)Cascading

1.12 State the advantages of inductionmotors

1.13 List at least six applications of inductionmotors

2. Fractional H.P motors.

2.1 List the types of 1- phasemotors.
2.2 Explain why a Single-phase Induction motor is not a Self-startingmotor.
2.3 Explain the working principle of 1 – phase Induction motorbyDouble field revolvingtheory.
2.4 Explain the working of the following 1-phase induction motorswith legible sketch
(i) Splitphasemotor(ii) capacitor start motor (iii) shaded polemotor

179
 2.5 Explain the working of the universal motor.
2.6 Explainthe working of Steppermotor and list different types.
2.7 Listapplicationsof
(i) 1-phaseinductionmotors (ii)1-phase Commutator motors (iii)Steppermotors.

3. Alternators

3.1 Explain the working principle of Alternators.

3.2 Describe the Constructional details of Alternators with legiblesketch.

3.3 Classify the Alternators based on rotorconstruction.

3.4 State the advantage of StationaryArmature.

3.5Define Chording and Distributionfactor

3.6 Derive EMF equation of an alternator taking into account distribution factorand pitch factor
and solve problems

3.7 State the need for an exciter in anAlternator and list various types of exciters.

3.8 ExplainArmatureReactionofAlternatoratdifferentP.F’s.

3.9 Define the term synchronous impedance and state its effects on operation of an
alternator.

3.10 Define voltage regulation of analternator

3.11 List the different methods of finding the regulation ofalternator.

4. Parallel operation ofAlternators

4.1 Explain the necessity for parallel operation ofalternators
4.2 State the conditions forsynchronisation
4.3 Explain the procedure of synchronisation by using lamps and synchroscopemethods.
4.4 Explain the method for adjusting the loads shared by two alternators (or one
Alternator withinfinite bus bar).

5. Synchronousmotors

5.1 Explain the working principlesof synchronousmotors.

5.2 Explain the effects of varying excitation at constant load with phasordiagrams
5.3 Explain‘V’ and inverted ‘V’curves with neat sketch.
5.4 Explain how a Synchronous motor can be used as a Synchronouscondenser.
5.5 Explain the phenomenon ofHUNTING and how HUNTING can be prevented.
5.6 List the applications of synchronousmotor.
5.7Compare synchronous motors with induction motors.

180
HYPONATED COURSE CONTENT

1. Three Phase InductionMotors

Introduction – Rotating Magnetic field - Construction of Induction motors – Comparison –
working principle of three phase Induction motor – working of Induction motor at different
conditions (Starting and Running) - Derive the relationship between Torque, Power and slip of
Induction motor, problems – Torque-slip characteristics –Testing of Induction motors - Types of
starters – Methods of speed control of Induction motor – Advantages and applications of
Induction motors.

2. Fractional Horse Power Motors

Types of 1-phase motors – Reasons for not self starting-working principle of 1-phase induction
motors- Double field revolving theory- Working of split phase, capacitor start and shaded pole
types – principles of working – Universal motor- principle of working- Stepper motor – types-
Applications of1-phase motors.

3. Alternators

Classification of alternators - Brief description of parts with sketches and function of each part,
construction, Exciter and pilot exciter – Stationary armature type construction – Advantages,
Concentrated and distributed windings - short pitch and full pitch coils - Effect of chording and
distribution factors - EMF equation - Derivation – Problems - Armature reaction - Synchronous
impedance concepts - phasor diagram for unity, lagging and leading power factor loads -
Regulation definition - Different methods of finding regulation.

4. Parallel operation ofalternators

Necessity for parallel Operation - condition to be fulfilled for synchronisation - Synchronisation

by lamps & synchroscope methods - Load sharing.

5. Synchronous Motors
Introduction - synchronous speed – Excitation of rotor - working Principle– Effects of change of
Excitation at constant Load, Vector diagrams for(a) Normal, (b)Under and c)Over excitation
conditions- V – Curves and inverted V –curves– Synchronous motor as synchronous condenser -
Hunting phenomenon – prevention of Hunting- Applications of synchronous motor - Comparison
with Induction motor.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. B.L. Theraja-Electrical Technology - Vol –II S.Chand &Co.

2. M.G Say –ACmachines
3. DP Kothari, IJ Nagrath – Electric Machines-Mc.Graw.Hill

181
4. P.S. Bhimbra -Electrical machines – Khanna Publishers
5. MV Deshpande-Electric machines – Wheelerpublishing.

Blue print:

Question
Weig Marks wise wise CO’S
htag distribution of distribution
S.N No. of mapp
e of
o Unit Title period ed
alloca
. s ted A A
R U R U
p p

Three Phase
Induction 20 29 13 13 3 C O1
1 Motors 2 2 1

Fractional
12 13 3 10 0 1 1 0 CO2
H.P. motors
2

3 Alternators 16 29 13 6 10 2 2 1 CO3

Parallel
operation of 12 13 3 10 0 1 1 0
4 Alternators CO4

Synchronous
5 15 26 13 13 0 2 2 0 CO5
motors

182
 Total 75 110 45 52 13 8 8 2

R - Remember; U - Understanding; Ap - Application; An - Analysing

Unit Test Learning Outcomes to be Covered

Unit Test - I From 1.1 to 3.6

Unit Test - II From 3.7 to 5.7

Syllabus for Unit Tests

183
 POWER SYSTEMS – I

Course No. Of Total No. Marks Marks for

Course title
code periods/week of periods for FA SA

POWER
EE-403 4 60 20 80
SYSTEMS - I

S.No. Unit Title No. of Periods CO’S Mapped

10
1. Sources of Electrical Energy CO1
Thermal, Hydro Electrical, Nuclear & Gas 18
2. CO2
Power Stations
12
3. Combined Operation and Economics CO3
10
4. Switchgear and Reactors CO4
Protective relays, Protection of Alternators 10
5. CO5
and Transformers
Total 60

(i) To understand the need for non-conventional method of power generation

(ii) To analyse the working of various power generation stations.

Course (iii) To familiarise the fundamental concepts of combined operation and

Objectives economics

(iv) To understand the role of circuit Breakers and relays in power system
protection and to analyse the protection of transformers and alternators.

CO1 EE-403.1 Recognizing of various sources of power generation

Analyze the working of Thermal, Hydro, Nuclear and
CO2 EE-403.2
Gas power stations.
Course Understand the concept of load dispatching and
CO3 EE-403.3
outcome Analyse various tariffs.
s CO4 EE-403.4 Analyse the working of various circuit breakers
Interpret the applications of relays and analyse various
CO5 EE-403.5 protection schemes used for protection of alternators
and transformers.

184
 LEARNING OUTCOMES

1. Sources of ElectricalEnergy

1.1 Know the different sources of energy and classify them into conventional and
Non-conventional types.
1.2 State necessity of developing non-conventional methods of power generation.
1.3 Describe the method of power generation by (i) Solar Power plant(ii) Tidal Power plant
(iii) Wind Power plant(iv) Biomass Power plant

1.4 State the relative merits and limitations of Conventional and Non- Conventional types of
sources

1.5 Appreciate the need of energy conservation and its methods.

2. Thermal, Hydro Electrical, Nuclear & Gas Power Stations

2.1 State working principle of Thermal power plant.

2.2 State the factors required for selection of site.
2.2 Draw the detailed line diagram of a condensing type thermal power station and explain the
working of each component of thermal power station.

2.3 State the advantages of(i) Pulverisation and the machine used for it(ii) Cooling towers and their
types.
2.4 State the causes of pollution and methods to control them.
2.5 State the advantages and disadvantages of Thermal power plants.
2.6 State the principle of working of Hydro power station.
2.7 State the factors required for selection of site for Hydro power station.
2.8 Explain Hydrograph.
2.9 Define various hydraulic terms
2.10 Write water power equation
2.11 Classify the Hydro Electric Plants based upon head, duty, location and hydraulic considerations.
2.12 Explain with layout diagram working of i) High Head ii) Medium Head iii) Low Head Power
stations.

2.13 Explain the need and working of (i) Surge Tank ii) Forebay iii) Spill gates.
2.14 State the advantages and disadvantages of hydroelectric power station.
2.15 State merits and risks involved in using nuclear energy
2.16 List out the nuclear fuels.
2.17 Explain fission and fusion reactions.
2.18 Explain sustained chain reaction.
2.19 Explain the working of a moderate type nuclear power station with a block diagram.
2.20 Explain the need and working of coolant, reflector, and control rods. Mention the
materials used for them
2.21 List the types of Reactors used in Nuclear Power Station
2.22 Explain the principle of working of gas power station with the help of schematic diagram and
mention its merits and demerits

185
3. Combined Operation and Economics of Power Stations.

3.1 State the need for integrated operation of power plants and list the merits of it.
3.2 Differentiate between isolated operation and integrated operation of power stations
3.3 Understand the concept of load dispatching and its process.
3.4 List the various charges and expenses in power station and classify them as fixed and running.
3.5 Define the terms load curve, connected load, Maximum demand, Demand factor, load factor,
diversity factor, capacity factor and plant use factor.
3.6 Comprehend the cost of generation and effects of load factor and diversity factor on it.
3.7 Solve problems on above topics.
3.8 Explain various types of consumer tariffs and compare them.
3.9 List the causes of lower power factor
3.10 State the effects of power factor (p.f.) on electricity charges and mention the methods to
improve it.

4. SwitchgearandReactors

4.1 Define faults and list types if faults in power systems.

4.2 Define and classifyswitchgear.
4.3 Defineisolators,airbreakswitches,theirusesand limitations.
4.4 Explainthe phenomenonofarc,arcvoltage, arccurrentandits effects.
4.5 List the methodsofarc quenching.
4.6 Classifythecircuitbreakersbaseduponmediumofarc quenching.
4.7 StatetheprincipleofM.O.C.Bandexplainits working.
4.8 StatepropertiesofSF6gas and explainthe workingofSF6circuitbreaker.
4.9 Explainworking principleof Vacuum circuit breaker (V.C.B).
4.10 Definecurrentlimitingreactorsandstate their importance.

5. Protective relays, Protection of Alternators and Transformers

5.1 DefinerelayandState thebasic requirementsofrelays.

5.2 Classifytherelaysbasedupon(i)Principleofoperation(ii)Timeof operation(iii)Duty

5.3 Definecurrentsettingandtimesetting.

5.4 State the applicationsof(i) Inductiontypeovercurrent relay(ii)

Directionalovercurrentinductiontyperelay(iii)Distance relay (iv)DifferentialRelay

5.5 Listthe probable faultsinStatorandrotorof Alternator.

5.6 Explainthedifferentialprotectionforalternator stator.

5.7 List the possible faults and their types in a transformer.

5.8 ExplaintheworkingofBuchholzrelay in atransformer.

186
HYPONATED COURSE CONTENTS

1. Sources of Electrical Energy

Different sources of energy – Conventional and Non-conventional sources –Methods of

generation of energy from different sources of power- Working principle of Solar, Tidal, Wind
and Biomass power plants- Merits and limitations of conventional and Non- conventional
sources - Need for energy conservation and their methods.

2. Thermal, Hydro Electrical, Nuclear & Gas Power Stations

ThermalPowerStation –Principleofworking–Factorsforselectionofsite -Blockdiagramof

condensing type thermal power station- Components and its working -pulverization, Cooling
towers and their types -Causes of pollution and methods to controlthem.

Principle of working of hydroelectric power station – limitations in location and operation.

Hydraulic terms used – Water power equation – Classification of hydroelectric power stations
based on head, duty, location and hydraulic considerations- Layout diagram of i)High Head ii)
Medium Head iii) Low Head Power Stations- Working of surge tank, fore bay, spill gates.

Nuclear fuels - Fission and fusion reactions with massenergy balance, sustained chain reaction –
Working of moderate type nuclear power station with a block diagram- Need and working of
coolant, reflector, control rods – Materials used for them –reactors used in nuclear power plant-
Principle and working of gas power plant.

3. Combined Operation and economics of PowerStations

Isolated operation and integrated operation of power stations –– Load dispatching and its
process –Charges/Expenses involved in power station – Their classification as fixed and running-
Load curve, load factor, diversity factor and maximum demand – Effects of load factor and
diversity factor in power generation – Solve numerical problems. Consumer tariffs and their
comparison – Effect of power factor on the electricity charges and methods to improve it.

4. Switch Gear and Reactors

Faults in power systems - Switch gear and their classification – Isolators, air break switches and
explain the phenomenon of arc, arc voltage, arc current and their effects – methods of arc
quenching. Circuit breakers and their classification based on the medium of arc quenching – ,
M.O.C.B – Properties of SF6 gas and working of SF6 circuit breakers – Working of V.C.B, M.O.C.B,
SF6 C.B. Reactors – Current limiting reactors and their importance.

5. Protective relays, Protection of Alternators and Transformers

Requirements of relays – Classifications based on duty, principle of operation and time of

operation – Construction and working of induction type over current relays – applications of
induction type over current relay, directional over current relay, distance relay and differential
relay Faults in Alternator stator and rotor- its effects – differential protection for alternator
stator- Possible faults and their types in the transformer – buchholz relay in transformers.

187
 REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Electrical Power byS.L.Uppal

2. Generation, Transmission and Utilisation byA.T.Starr
3. Power System byC.L.Wadhwa
4. Electrical power plants by J B Guptha
5. Switch gear and protection by Sunil S. Rao

Blue print

marks wise Question wise

distribution of distribution of CO'S
No. of weightage
S.NO. Unit title Weightage weightage Mappe
periods allocated
d
R U Ap R U Ap

Sources of Electrical
1 10 16 6 10 - 2 1 0 CO1
Energy

Thermal, Hydro
2 Electrical, Nuclear & 18 36 3 33 0 1 4 0 CO2
Gas Power Stations

Combined
3 Operation and 12 26 3 13 10 1 2 1 CO3
Economics

Switchgear and
4 10 16 3 13 0 1 2 0 CO4
Reactors

Protective relays,
Protection of
5 10 16 3 13 0 1 2 0 CO5
Alternators and
Transformers

Total 60 110 18 82 10 6 11 1

R-Remembering U-Understanding AP-Application

Syllabus to be covered for Unit Tests

Unit Test Learning Outcomes to be Covered

Unit Test - 1 From 1.1 to 2.22

Unit Test – 2 From 3.1 to 5.8

188
 POWER ELECTRONICS & PLC

Total No.
Course No. Of Marks Marks
Course title of
code periods/week for FA for SA
periods

POWER ELECTRONICS
EE-404 4 60 20 80
& PLC

S.No
Unit Title No. of Periods CO’S Mapped
.
1. Power Electronic devices 12 CO1

2. Power Transistors 8 CO2

Converters, AC Voltage controllers & 14
3. CO3
Inverters
4. Applications of Power Electronic circuits 14 CO4

5. PLC and SCADA 12 CO5

Total 60

(i) To introduce the basic theory of power semiconductor devices.

(ii) To familiarize with the principle of operation, design and synthesis of different
Course power conversion circuits and their applications.
Objectives
(iii) To provide strong foundation for further study of power electronic circuits and
systems and To maintain PLCs and SCADA systems used in different applications.

Describe the operation of SCR, TRIAC and DIAC, SCR

CO1 EE-404.1
Commutation circuits.
Describe the operation of IGBT, Power MOSFET and
CO2 EE-404.2
MCT
Design and Analyze power converter circuits, A.C
Course CO3 EE-404.3
Voltage controllers and Inverters.
outcomes
Analyse the speed control of AC motors and DC motors
CO4 EE-404.4
using power semiconductor devices.
Develop PLC ladder programs for the given applications
CO5 EE-404.5 and understand the necessity of SCADA and its
applications

189
LEARNING OUTCOMES

1. Power Electronic Devices

1.1 List different thyristors family devices and draw the circuit symbols for each device.
1.2 Describe constructional details and operation of SCR
1.3 Explain the Volt – Ampere characteristics of SCR with the help of adiagram.
1.4 Draw the Gate characteristics of SCR
1.5 Mention the ratings of SCR.
1.6 Give the advantages of SCR as a switch.
1.7 List ten applications of SCR.
1.8 Explain the Volt-ampere characteristics of Diac under forward / reverse bias.
1.9 Explain the Volt-ampere characteristics of Triac under forward / reverse bias.
1.10 State the necessity of Commutation in SCR’s and list different methods of commutation

2. Power Transistors

2.1 Classify power transistor.

2.2 Describe the basic structure and operation of IGBT.
2.3 Explain the characteristics of IGBT.
2.4 Mention the applications of IGBT.
2.5 List the types of MOSFETs.
2.6 Describe the working of Power MOSFET.
2.7 Explain the characteristics of MOSFET.
2.8 Mention the applications of MOSFET.
2.9 Compare MOSFET with BJT.
2.10 Compare IGBT with MOSFET.
2.11 Describe the basic structure and operation of MOS –Controlled Thyristor (MCT).

3. Converters, AC Voltage Controllers and Inverters

3.1 Define rectifier, AC voltage controller, inverter, chopper and cyclo converter
3.2 Explain the working of single-phase half wave converter with resistive and R-L loads.
3.3 Understand need for free wheeling diode.
3.4 Explain the working of single phase full wave converter with resistive and R- L loads.
3.5 Explain the working of three-phase half wave converter with resistive load
3.6 Explain the working of three phase full wave converter with resistive load.
3.7 Explain the working of single phase AC voltage controller with resistive load.
3.8 Explain the working of three phase AC voltage controller with resistive load.
3.9 Compare AC voltage controller with transformer.
3.10 Classify inverters.
3.11 Explain the working of single-phase bridge inverter.
3.12 Explain the working of three-phase bridge inverter.
3.13 State the advantages of MOSFET based inverters over SCR based inverters.
3.14 List the applications of Inverters.

190
4. Applications of Power Electronic Circuits

4.1 List applications of power electronic circuits.

4.2 Mention the factors affecting the speed of DC Motors.
4.3 Explain the speed control of DC Shunt motor using converter.
4.4 Explain the speed control of PMDC motor using converter.
4.5 List the factors affecting speed of the AC Motors.
4.6 Explain the speed control of induction motor by using AC voltage controller.
4.7 Explain the speed control of induction motor by using converter and inverter (V/F control).
4.8 Devices used to suppress the spikes in supply system.
4.9 Working of UPS with block diagram.
4.10 Explain the illumination control circuit using TRIAC and DIAC with the help of a legible
sketch.
4.11 Explain the anti-theft alarm circuit using SCR with the help of a diagram.
4.12 Explain the emergency lamp circuit using SCR with the help of a diagram.
4.13 Explain the battery charger circuit using SCR with the help of a diagram.
4.14 Explain the power factor improvement circuit using SCR with the help of a diagram.
4.15 Explain the DC circuit breaker using SCR with the help of a diagram.

5. PLC and SCADA

5.1 Need for automation and advantages of automation.

5.2 Define Programmable Logic Controller(PLC) and state the advantages of PLC
5.3 Explain the different parts of PLC by drawing the Block diagram and state the purpose
of each part.
5.4 State the applications of PLC
5.5 Explain Ladder diagram
5.6 Explain contacts and coils used in PLC
5.7 Draw ladder diagrams for
(i)AND gate (ii)OR gate (iii) NOT gate
(iv) NAND gate (iv) NOR gate (iv) X-OR gate
5.8 Explain the following Timers and counters
(i)TON (ii)T OFF (iii) Retentive timer (iv) CTU (v) CTD
5.9 Draw ladder diagrams using Timers and counters
5.10 Explain PLC Instruction set
5.11 Explain ladder diagrams for following
(i) DOL starter and STAR-DELTA starter (ii) Stair case lighting
(iii) Traffic light control (iv) Temperature Controller
5.12 Explain the need of data acquisition.
5.13 State the advantages of supervisory control.
5.14 List the softwares used for SCADA and explain them.
5.15 State various communication methods used in SCADA.
5.16 Explain the working of SCADA with PLC and applications of SCADA.

191
HYPONATED COURSE CONTENTS

1. Power Electronic Devices

Types of power semiconductor devices – SCR, DIAC, TRIAC - Construction, Working principle of
all devices, symbols - Two transistor analogy for SCR – V-I & Gate characteristics, Forward break
over voltage, latching current, holding current, turn on triggering time, turn off time - triggering
of SCR using UJT- Necessity of Commutation- various methods of Commutation.
2. Power Transistor
Classification of power transistor - basic structure and operation of IGBT - characteristics of IGBT
- applications of IGBT - types of MOSFETs - working of Power MOSFET - characteristics of
MOSFET - applications of MOSFET – Comparison of MOSFET with BJT – Comparison of IGBT with
MOSFET - basic structure and operation of MOS –Controlled Thyristor (MCT).

3. Converters, AC Voltage Controllers and Inverters

Classification of converters - single phase half wave converter - freewheeling diode- single
phasefullwave converter- threephasehalfwave converter- fullwaveconverter - singlephase ac
voltage controller- three phase ac voltage controller - Classification of Inverters - Single Phase
bridge Inverter – Three phase bridge Inverter – applications of inverter.

4. Application of Power ElectronicCircuits

DC Motor control - Speed control of DC shunt Motor by using converters - AC Motor Controls -
speed control of induction Motor by using AC voltage controllers - V/F control (Converters and
invertors control) - Devices used to suppress spikes in supply system.- Working of UPS with block
diagram – Illumination Control Circuit - Anti theft alarm circuit - Emergency lamp - Battery
charger Circuit using SCR - power factor improvement circuit - DC circuitbreaker.

5. PLC and itsapplications

PLC Definition-advantages-Block diagram-Ladder diagrams for AND, OR, NOT, NAND, NOR -
Instruction set-Ladder diagram for DOL starter, Star-Delta Starter, Stair case lighting, Traffic light
control, Temperature controller – Data Acquisition – Supervisory Control – SCADAsoftwares –
Communication methods – SCADA with PLC - Applications of SCADA.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Power Electronics – P.S. Bimbhra

2. Jamil Asghar -Power Electronics– PHI, NewDelhi.
3. P.C.Sen.-Advanced Power Electronics
4. S.K.Bhattacharya -Control of Electrical Machines
5. John W.Webb -Programmable Logic controllers

192
 Blue Print

marks wise Question wise

No. of weightage distribution of distribution of CO'S
S.NO. Unit title Weightage weightage
periods allocated Mapped
R U Ap R U Ap

Power
1 Electronic 12 26 6 20 - 2 2 - CO1
devices

Power
2 8 13 3 10 - 1 1 - CO2
Transistors

Converters, AC
Voltage
3 14 29 3 26 - 1 4 - CO3
controllers &
Inverters

Applications of
Power
4 14 26 3 23 - 1 3 - CO4
Electronic
circuits

5 PLC and SCADA 12 16 3 3 10 1 1 1 CO5

Total 60 110 18 82 10 6 11 1

R-Remembering U-Understanding AP-Application

Syllabus to be covered for Unit Tests

Unit Test Learning Outcomes to be Covered

Unit Test – 1 From 1.1 to 3.14

Unit Test – 2 From 4.1 to 5.16

193
 GENERAL MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Course code Course Tilte No. of Total No. of Marks for FA Marks for SA
periods periods
/week

GENERAL
EE-405 MECHANICAL 4 60 20 80
ENGINEERING

S.No Unit Title No. of periods CO’s Mapped

1 Simple Stresses and Strains 10 CO1

2 Torsion in Shafts 10 CO2

3 I.C. Engines 12 CO3

4 Boilers and Turbines 18 CO4

5 Pumps 10 CO5

Total 60

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

Course Objectives i) Understand Stress, Strain and Torsional Stress

ii) Understand the working of I.C.Engines, Boilers, Turbines and pumps

Course Outcomes:

CO1 EE-405-1 Understand the concept of stress and strain and

various constituent relations

CO2 EE-405-2 Understand the Torsional Stresses in circular

shafts and find them in solid and circular shafts
Course Outcomes
CO3 EE-405-3 Analyze the Working of I C Engine Systems

CO4 EE-405-4 Analyze the Working of Boilers and Turbines

CO5 EE-405-5 Analyze the Working of Pumps

194
Learning Objectives:

1.0. Simple Stress and Strain

1.1. Definitions of Tensile stress, Compressive stress, Shear stress, Linear strain, lateral strain
and, Poisson‘s ratio, elastic limit, Identify the different types of stresses and Strains
1.2. State Hooke‘s law
1.3. Draw stress-strain curves for ductile and brittle materials under tension
1.4. Define a) Working stress, ultimate stress, yield stress, factor of safety and Young’s
modulus. solve simple problems on above topics
1.5. State the factors to be considered in selecting factor of safety
1.6. Solve Simple problems on uniform bars subjected to loads

2.0 Torsion in Shafts

2.1. State the function of shafts
2.2. Classify shafts
2.3. Specify the standard sizes of shafts
2.4. Write the torsion equations with usual notations
2.5. State the procedural steps in design of shaft (both solid and hallow types)
2.6. Design a shaft from given data on the basis of strength and solve problems.

3.0I.C.Engines
3.1 Classify I.C. Engines
3.2 Functions of main components of an I.C.Engine
3.3 Illustrate the working of four stroke petrol engine
3.4 Illustrate the working of four stroke diesel engine
3.5 Illustrate the working of two stroke petrol engine
3.6 Compare four stroke and two stroke engines
3.7 Compare petrol engine and diesel engine

4.0. Boilers and Turbines

4.1.Classify steam boilers
4.2. Compare fire tube and water tube boilers
4.3. Differentiate between boiler mountings and accessories
4.4. List out a) Popular boiler mountings b) Popular boiler accessories
4.5. Illustrate the working of Lamont boiler
4.6. State the working principle of steam turbine
4.7. Classify steam turbines
4.8. Explain the working of a) De-laval steam turbine, b) Parson’s reaction turbne
4.9. Compare impulse and reaction turbines
4.10. Classify hydraulic turbines
4.11. Explain the working of
(i) Pelton wheel
(ii) Francis turbine
(iii) Kaplan turbine

195
 5.0. Pumps
5.1. Classify hydraulic pumps
5.2. Compare between centrifugal and reciprocating pumps
5.3. Illustrate the working of
(i) Single acting and Double acting reciprocating pump
(ii) Single stage centrifugal pump
(iii) Jet pump
(iv) Submersible pump

Note:1.Thissubjectistobe taughtbyMechanical EngineeringFaculty.

2.Papersettingandpaperevaluationisalso to be done by Mechanical Engineering
Faculty.

HYPONATED COURSE CONTENT

1. Simple stress and strains

Definitions of Tensile stress, Compressive stress, Shear stress, Linear strain, lateral strain and, Poisson‘s
ratio, elastic limit, Hook‘s law - stress-strain diagram for ductile and brittle materials under tension -
Working stress, Ultimate stress, yield stress - Factor of safety – selection of factor of safety-Young‘s
modulus - Simple problems on bars of uniform section subjected to external loading.

2. Torsion in Shafts
Function of shafts – classification of shafts - standard shaft sizes - Torsion equation (derivation omitted)
– simple problems on its application - Step by step procedure of designing a shaft- Problems on design
of shaft based on strength.

3. I.C. Engines
Classification of I.C Engines - Main components of IC Engine - Sketch and description of four
stroke petrol engine - Sketch and description of four stroke diesel engine - Sketch and
description of two stroke petrol engine - Comparison between two stoke and four stroke
engines - Comparison between petrol and diesel engine.

4. Boilers and Turbines

Classification of boilers - Comparison between fire tube and water tube boilers - Difference between
Boiler Mountings and Accessories – Functions of popular mountings and accessories (without sketches)
- Sketch and description of Lamont high pressure boiler - Classification of steam turbines - Sketch and
description of a De-Laval impulse turbine - Sketch and description of Parson‘s reaction turbine -
Comparison between impulse and reaction turbines - Classification of hydraulic turbine - Sketch and
description of Pelton wheel - Sketch and description of Francis turbine - Sketch and description of
Kaplan turbine.

5. Pumps
Classification of hydraulic pumps - Comparison between Centrifugal and Reciprocating pumps - Sketch
and description of a single acting and double acting reciprocating pump - Sketch and description of
single stage centrifugal pump - Sketch and description of a jet pump - Sketch and description of a
submersible pump

196
 REFERENCES

1. Surender Singh- Strength of materials - Vikas publishing

2. R.K. Rajput - Strength of Materials- S.Chand& CO
3. R.S. Kurmi - Strength of Materials- S.Chand& CO
4. P.K. Nag, K,Tripathi, C B Pawar – Basic Mechanical Engineering – McGraw Hill
5. Pravin Kumar – Basic Mechanical Engineering - Pearson

Blue Print:

Marks wise Question wise

CO’S
No. of Weightage distribution of distribution of
S.No Unit Title Mapped
Periods Allocated weightage weightage

R U AP R U AP

Simple
1 Stresses 10 16 03 03 10 01 01 01 CO1
and Strains

Torsion in
2 10 16 03 03 10 01 01 01 CO2
Shafts

3 I.C. Engines 12 26 13 13 - 02 02 - CO3

Boilers and
4 16 26 13 13 - 02 02 - CO4
Turbines

5 Pumps 12 26 13 13 - 02 02 - CO5

Total 60 110 45 45 20 08 08 02

R-Remembering; U-Understanding; AP-Application

Syllabus to be covered for Unit Tests

Unit Test Learning Outcomes to be Covered

Unit Test - 1 From 1.1 to 3.7

Unit Test – 2 From 4.1 to 5.3

197
 ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING DRAWING

Total
No.of
Cours no. Marks Marks
Course title periods /
e code of for FA for SA
week
periods

EE-406 ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING 6 90 40 60

DRAWING

No.of
S.no Unit Title CO’S Mapped
Periods
Graphical symbols, couplings, and Guarding
1 15 CO1
systems

2 D.C.Machines 24 CO2

3 Induction Motors 15 CO3

4 Transformers 15 CO4

5 D.C and A.C Windings 21 CO5

TOTAL 90

(i) To familiarise with the different electricalsymbols, couplings and guarding

systems.
Course
Objectives (ii) To draw the views of D.C. machine, induction motors and Transformers.

(iii) To draw different winding diagrams of DC and AC machines.

Understand different types of symbols, couplingsand

CO1 EE-406.1
guarding system in electrical drawing.

CO2 EE-406.2 Comprehend and draw different views of DC machine.

Comprehendand draw different views of Induction

CO3 EE-406.3
Course motors.
outcomes
CO4 EE-406.4 Comprehend and draw different views of Transformers.

198
 Design the different types of DCand AC machine
CO5 EE-406.5
windings.

199
LEARNING OUTCOMES

1. Graphical symbols, couplings and Guarding systems.

1.1 Draw the standard symbols of electrical components andfixtures.
1.2 Draw sectional elevation and end views of a Protected type and Unprotected type shaft
couplings.
1.3 Draw the views of the guarding systems in the followingcases.
(i) Telephone lines under power lines (ii) H.V. line over L.V. line crossing
(iii) H.V. Line over L.V. line on same supports (iv) H.V. Line crossing over railway lines.

2. DC machines.
2.1 Draw the assembled sectional views of Pole and Field coils.
2.2 Draw the half sectional end view and elevation of armature of DC machine with the given
data.
2.4 Draw the end view of commutator in a DCMachine with the given data.
2.5 Draw the Half sectional End view and Elevation of a D.C machine from the given data.

3. InductionMotors.
3.1 Draw the Half - sectional elevation and end views of an assembled 3-phase squirrel cage
induction motor from the givendata.
3.2 Draw the Half - sectional elevation and end views of an assembled 3-phase slip ring
induction motor from the givendata.

4. Transformers.
4.1 Draw different plan and elevational views of core stepping sections (one, two, three and
four
stepped cores) of aTransformer.
4.2 Draw sectional plan and elevation of a 1-phase core type transformer from the given data.
4.3 Draw sectional plan and elevation of a 3-phase core type transformer from the givendata.

5. D.C and A.C Windings.

5.1 Draw the development winding diagrams of a Single Layer Lap and wave connected D.C
Machines with the given data with ring diagram showing brush positions and windingtable.
5.2 Draw the developed winding diagrams of a 3-phase, single layer lap and wave windings with

windingtable from the given data.

200
HYPONATEDCOURSE CONTENTS
1. Graphical symbols, couplings and Guarding systems
Graphical symbols as per ISI standards, Shaft coupling (Protected and unprotected type) -
Guarding Systems employed for the Poles while crossing the Roads and Railway Lines.

2. DC machines
Stator pole and field coil assembly, Armature of a small DC machine, Commutator of DC machine
- Half sectional end view and elevation of D.C machine.

3. InductionMotors
Sectional elevation and end views of 3 - phase Squirrel Cage Induction Motor and 3-Phase Slip
Ring Induction motor.

4. Transformers
Core stepping sections -Sectional views of single-phase core type and three phase core type
transformers.

5. D.Cand AC Windings
Single Layer Lap and Wave DC Windings - Winding tables- -Brush location – Equalizer rings -
Three phase single Layer Lap and Wave AC Windings - Winding tables.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Simpson - Electrical EngineeringDrawing

2. Dargon. - Electrical Engineering Drawing
3. K.L.Narang - Electrical EngineeringDrawing
4. Surjit singh - Electrical EngineeringDrawing
5. Dr. SK Bhattacharya - Electrical EngineeringDrawing

201
 Blue print:

Question wise CO’S

Marks wise
distribution of mappe
distribution of
Weightag weightage d
No. of weightage
e
Sl.No period
Unit title allocate
. s
d A A
R U R U
p p

Graphical
symbols,
couplings, 15 10 5 5 0 1 1 0 CO1
1. andGuardin
g systems

D.C.
2. 24 25 5 0 20 1 0 1 CO2
Machines

Induction
3. 15 CO3
Motors
25 5 0 20 1 0 1
Transforme
4. 15 CO4
rs

D.C and AC
5. 21 20 0 0 20 0 0 1 CO5
Windings

1 0 0 0
Total 90 80 60 03
5 5 3 1

Syllabus to be Covered for Unit Tests

Unit Test Learning Outcomes to be Covered

Unit Test-I From 1.1 to 3.1

Unit Test-II From 3.2 to 5.2

202
 ELECTRICAL MACHINES – II LABORATORY

Total
Course No.of no. of Marks Marks
code Course title periods/week periods for FA for SA

EE-407 ELECTRICAL MACHINES – II 3 45 40 60

LABORATORY

S.No No.of
Unit Title CO’S Mapped
. Periods
1 Tests on 3-phase Induction Motors 18 CO1

2 Tests on 1-Ph Fractional Motors 9 CO2

3 Tests on Alternators and Synchronous Motors 18 CO3

Total Periods 45

Course Objectives:

(i) To conduct tests and estimate the parameters of three phase induction
motors and predict theperformance
Course (ii)To operate fractional horse power Motors and analyse their performance
Objectives (iii) To conduct tests and interpret the performance of three phase
Alternators and Synchronous motors

Course outcomes:

EE-407.1 Demonstrate the skill of planning and organising

CO
experimental setup forthree phase Induction Motors and
1 observe various parameters, their variations, sketch them
graphically and draw the circle Diagram.

203
 Analyse the experimental results from the loadtest data of
CO EE-407.2 1 phase induction motors to calculate the machine
Course 2 parameters
outcome
s CO Conduct of various tests on Alternators and Synchronous
EE-407.3
3 Motors to know their performance

204
Learning outcomes:

1. Tests on 3-phase Induction Motors

1. Conduct brake test on 3-phase squirrel cage inductionmotor.

2. Conduct Brake test on 3-phase slip ring inductionmotor.
3. Conduct suitable tests and draw circle diagram for a squirrel cage inductionmotor.
4. Conduct suitable tests and draw circle diagram for a slip ring inductionmotor.

2. Tests on Fractional H.P Motors

1. Perform Load test on single phase capacitor start motor.

2. Perform Load test on single phase split phase induction motor.
3. Perform Load test on a single-phase Universal motor.

3. Tests on Alternators and Synchronous Motors

1. Conduct (direct) load test on Alternator and obtain voltage regulation.

2. Obtain the regulation of Alternator by using synchronous impedance method.
3. Conduct load test on synchronous motor and draw ‘V’ and inverted ‘V’ curves.

Competencies & Key competencies to be achieved by the student

S.N Experiment Title Competencies Key

o competency

 Draw the circuitdiagram  Apply the load

 Identify the different terminals of 3-ph up to full load in
induction motor steps
 Select the suitablestarter.  Pour water in
 Identify the terminals of thestarter. the brake drum
 Select the range and type of themeters  Before
 Make the connections as per the Switching off
circuitdiagram the motor
Brake test on 3-
 Start the motor using a starter Apply remove the load
phase squirrel the load up to full load insteps
cage induction  Pour water in the brakedrum
1 motor.  Note down the readings of ammeter
and voltmeter for eachload.
 Calculate the output, torque and
efficiencyetc
 Plot the performancecharacteristics
 Verify the performance of themachine.
 Draw the circuitdiagram  Before giving
 Interpret the name platedetails supply Slip rings
 Identify the different terminals of the must be short
3-ph induction motor circuited
Brake test on 3-  Select the suitablestarter.  Speed shouldbe
phase slip ring  Identify the terminals of thestarter.  measured
 Select the range and type of themeters

205
 induction motor.  Make the connections as per the
2
circuitdiagram
 Start the motor using astarter
 Verify the performance of themachine. accurately

3,4  Draw the circuit diagram for No-load test  Apply the
and Blocked rotortest rated
Conductsuitable  Make the connections for no-load test voltage to
tests and Blocked rotor test as per the the motor in
circuitdiagram the no- load
and drawcircle  Start the motor withoutload test
diagram  Apply the rated voltage to the motor in  and rated
the no-load test and rated current to the current to
of a)squirrelcage blocked rotortest. the blocked
 During the Blocked rotor test fully rotor test.
inductionMotor tighten the rotor shaft  During the
 Record the meterreadings Blocked
b)slip  Calculate the output, rotor test
ringinductionMoto torque ,efficiencyetc. fully tighten
r  Plot the performancecharacteristics. the rotor
 Verify the performance of themachine.
 Draw the circle diagram on a graph sheet
using the test data
 Select proper scale to draw the
circlediagram
Load test on  Draw the circuitdiagram  Start the
 Identify the different terminals of the 1- motor using
ph split phase induction motor /1-ph a
capacitor type induction motor and  starter
a) split phase thestarter without load
induction motor.  Select the ranges and type of themeters
 Apply the
 Make the connections as per
b) Capacitor start load up to
circuitdiagram
induction motor full load in
 Start the motor using astarter
steps
 Apply the load in steps
5,6
 Record the meterreadings
 Verify the performance of themachine.
 Draw the circuitdiagram  Apply the
 Identify the different terminals of the 1- brake load
Load test on single- ph universal motor lightly
phase Universal  Select the range and type of themeters  Take the
motor.  Make the connections as per the readings
circuitdiagram properly
7  Start the motor using astarter
 Apply the brake load lightly
 Verify the performance of themachine

206
 Conduct (direct) load  Draw the circuitdiagram  Switch on
test on Alternator  Identify different terminals of the 3-ph the
and alternator excitation at
 Select the range and type of the meters correct time
8 Obtain the  Make the connections as per thecircuit  Apply the
regulation  Start the alternator as per theprocedure brake load
 Increase the load and take the readings lightly
And by synchronous  Reduce the load to zerogradually. Take
Switch off the alternator. the
impedance method 
 Disconnect thecircuit. readings
 Plot the performancecharacteristics. properly

 Draw the circuitdiagram  Switch on

 Identify different terminals of the 3-ph the
synchronous motor excitation at
 Select the range and type of themeters correct time
Conduct load test  Make the connections as per thecircuit  Vary the
on synchronous  Start the motor as per theprocedure excitation
9 motor and draw V  Switch on the excitation at correcttime insteps
and inverted V  Vary the excitation insteps  First switch
curves  Pour water in the brake drum forcooling. off the
 Reduce the load to zerogradually. excitation
 Switch off themotor. and then
 Disconnect thecircuit. onlyswitch
 Calculate the output,  off mains
torque ,efficiencyetc.
 Plot the performancecharacteristics.
 First switch off the excitation and then
only switch off themains
 Draw the V and inverted V curves on a
single graph sheet

Hyponated Course Contents:

Test on three phase Induction Motors

Brake test on three phase squirrel cage induction motor and slip ring induction motor, calculate
the efficiency and plot the torque slip characteristics. No-load test and blocked rotor test on
squirrel cage and slip ring induction motor, calculate output power, Torque, Efficiency, calculate
the machine parameters, Draw the circle diagram, estimate the performance and verify the
performance.

207
Load Test on Fractional Horse Power Motors

Load test on – split-phase induction motor, single phase capacitor start induction motor-
universal motor -calculate output power, Torque, Efficiency, calculate the machine parameters

Tests on Alternators and Synchronous Motors

Load test on Alternator – obtain the regulation of alternator by using synchronous Impedance
method – Draw the v curves and inverted v curves

COMMUNICATION SKILLS

Total No.
Course No. Of Marks Marks
Course title of
code periods/week for FA for SA
periods

208
 COMMUNICATION
EE-408 3 45 40 60
SKILLS

Course Title : Communication Skills Course code: C23-Common- 408

{ Common to all Branches}

Year/ Semester : IV Semester Number of Periods : 45 ( 3 hrs per week)

Type of Course : Practical Max Marks : 100

{ Internal 40 + External 60 }

Course Objectives: The students shall

- communicate effectively in diverse academic, professional and everyday situations

- exhibit appropriate body language and etiquette at workplace

- be employable through preparing appropriate job applications and attend interviews confidently
with all necessary skills

Course Outcomes:The students shall

CO1: Listen and comprehend the listening inputs related to different genres effectively

CO2: Communicate effectively in interpersonal interactions, interviews, group discussions and

presentations

CO3: Acquire employability skills: job hunting, resume writing, attending interviews

CO4: Practise appropriate body language and professional etiquette

Course Delivery: Text book: “Communication Skills”

by State Board of Technical Education and Training, AP

Sl No Unit Teaching
Hours

1 Listening Skills 6

2 Work place Etiquette 3

3 Introduce oneself 3

209
 4 Short presentation (JAM) 6

5 Group Discussion 6

6 Resume Writing and Cover Letter 3

7 Interview Skills 9

8 Presentation Skills 9

Total 45

Course Content:

UNIT I:Listening Skills 6 periods

Pre – While- Post-listening activities- Listening to audio content ( dialogues/ speech/ narrations) -
answering the questions and fill in the blanks- vocabulary

UNIT 2: Work place Etiquette 3 periods

Basics of Etiquette- politeness/ courtesy, good manners- features of work place etiquette-
adaptability, positive attitude, body language.

UNIT 3: Introducing Oneself 3 periods

Speak about oneself - introduce oneself to a gathering/ formal & informal situations- Know about
others- filling in the grid- introducing oneself in interviews

UNIT 4: Short Presentation 6 periods

Dos and Don’ts in short presentation- speak for a minute without repetition, deviation & hesitation -
the techniques to speak fluently – defining and describing objects, people, phenomena, events.-
speaking on randomly chosen topics.

UNIT 5: Group Discussion 6 periods

Fundamentals of Group Discussion- Dos and Don’ts- filling the Grid- possible list of topics- practice
sessions- sample videos-Group activity

UNIT 6: Resume Writing and Cover Letter 3 periods

Pre activity: answer the questions- jotting down biographical information- sample resumes- tips, Dos
and Don’ts- model resumes- practice exercises on Resume writing

UNIT 7: Interview Skills 9 periods

Pre –while-post activities: - things to do at three stages – respond to notifications- know the
information about the organisation-practice FAQs - preparation of good/ suitable C V, Body
language, tips for success in interviews, model / mock interviews.

UNIT 8: Presentation Skills 9 periods

210
Preparatory work: observe pictures and answer questions- different kinds of presentations- PPTs,
Flash cards, Posters, Charts. - tips to prepare aids, slide show, model PPTs, - checklist on pre, while
and post presentations.

Mapping Course Outcomes with Programme Outcomes:

PO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CO POs 1 to 5 are applications of Engineering Principles, 1,2,3,4 1,2,3,4

can’t be directly mapped to Communication Skills

CO –PO Mapping

Cognitive levels as per

Bloom’s Taxonomy
Cos / Unit
CO Course Outcome POs mapping R/U/A/An(Remembering
Mapped
/ Understanding /
Applying/ Analyising)

CO 1 Listen and comprehend Unit 1 6,7 R/U/A

listening inputs related to
different genres effectively

CO2 Communicate effectively in 3,4,5,7,8 6,7 R/U/A/An

interpersonal interactions,
interviews, group
discussions and
presentations

CO3 Acquire employability skills: 6,7 6,7 R/U/A/An

job hunting, resume
writing, attending
interviews

CO4 Practise appropriate body 2, 3, 6,7 R/U/A

language and professional 4,5,7,8
etiquette

ASSESSMENT

C23-Common-408: English Communication Skills Lab

211
  The assessment for C23-Common 408 : ‘English Communication Skills’ is on par with all other
practical subjects comprising 40 marks for Internal assessment and 60 marks for External
examination attaining the final total of 100 Marks.
 The Internal Assessment can be conducted in the form of Assignments in all the 8 Units. One
or Two assignments can be conducted in each Unit, awarding 10 marks for each assignment
and the total marks can be averaged to 40 marks as suggested below.
 These assignments should focus mostly on LISTENING and SPEAKING skills rather than
writing. However, for the practice sake, students can write down their assignments in a
separate note book to enable them speak/present in the end exam fluently. The students
should submit these assignment note books to the teacher.
 Questioning styles vary from Unit to Unit as different skills are assessed in each Unit with
specific parameters as given in the workbook.
 Listening skills can be tested by playing different Audio/ Video clips ( appropriate in content
and language, preferably without subtitles) and test their skill of listening comprehension .
Follow pre-while-post stages of listening activity and students should answer general,
specific, inferential, vocabulary questions.
 Personal profile, describing a place/a thing/ a person/ an event / a picture, JAM,
presentations, Direct interaction with the teacher/ examiner are the topics for individual
speaking skills.
 Role plays, GD and Interview skills should be made as group activities and the teacher
assesses various skills of the students as given in the workbook.
 Teacher should maintain a record of the following Assessment sheet ( one for each student)
to award Internal marks.

Calculating Internal marks through Assignments :

Name of the Student: PIN: Branch: Academic Year:

S. Title of the Unit Assignment 1: Assignment 2: Total Marks in

each Unit (Average
No. 10 Marks 10 Marks for 10 Marks )

1 Listening Skills

2 Workplace etiquette

3 Introducing Oneself

4 Short Presentations (JAM)

5 Group Discussion

6 Resume & Cover Letter

7 Interview Skills

212
 8 Presentation Skills

Marks Scored Ex: 65

Total No. of Units 8

Internal Assessment : (65/8 ) X4 = 32.5 33 ( for 40 Marks)

Average for 40 Marks

End Exam Model paper: C23-Common-408 : Communication Skills Lab

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Guidelines to prepare the question paper of the Lab End exam for 60 marks:

I. Listening Skills:

Students listen to the audio / watch the video clip ( without subtitles) and answer the questions
supplied to them in advance; observe the three stages of the Listening activity.
: 10 Marks

II. Individual Speaking skills:

a) Speak for a minute (JAM) on the given topic, can be allotted through chits/lots: 10 M. b)
Individual speaking skills on any given topic ….descriptions / role play etc: 10 Marks

c) Direct Interaction/ dialogue with the examiner to test his/her speaking skills : 10 M.

III. Pair / Group Speaking Activities. : 20 Marks

a) Role Plays / dialogue making

b) Group Discussion

c) Interview skills

Note: If the students are more in number and the time is not sufficient to conduct the Viva for all the
students in a single spell, the examiner can also adapt the blended mode of exam. A few significant
questions can be tested orally and one or two questions can be answered in writing. ( Ex: Resume,
cover letter, FAQs in Interview skills etc.) along with the answers of Listening Test.

Aspects to be evaluated to test speaking skills

S.No Language Aspects Organising Aspects Body Language

aspects

213
 1 Content: Quality, clarity and Coherence, cohesion of Postures
relevance of ideas
relevant ideas

2 Fluency Proper beginning, topic Gestures,

sentence, expansion/details,
conclusion

3 Vocabulary Using proper Linkers Eye contact

4 Pronunciation Avoid repetitions, clichés, fillers Audibility, pitch,

Permissible pauses

5 Grammar ( Syntax, Other Permissible

semantics) body movements

POWER ELECTRONICS LABORATORY

Course Course title No. Of Total No. Marks Marks

code periods/week of for FA for SA

214
 periods

POWER ELECTRONICS
EE-409 3 45 40 60
LABORATORY

S.No
Unit Title No. of Periods CO’S Mapped
.
Characteristics of Power Electronic Devices - 6
1. CO1
SCR, DIAC and TRIAC
Characteristics of Power Transistors – IGBT and 6
2. CO2
Power MOSFET
12
3. Performance of different converter circuits CO3
Speed control of the electrical motors using the
4. 12 CO4
PowerElectronic Devices

5. Power Electronic circuits 9 CO5

Total 45

i) To understand the operation and characteristics of SCR, DIAC, TRIAC, IGBT and
Power MOSFET.

Course ii) To provide a practical exposure to operating principles, design and synthesisof
Objectives different power electronic converters.

iii) To perform the speed control of electric motors by using power electronic
circuits.

Understand the operation of SCR, DIAC and TRIAC, Plot

CO1 EE-409.1
their characteristics.
Understand the operation of IGBT and Power MOSFET,
CO2 EE-409.2
Plot their characteristics.
Course Analyse the performance of different converter
CO3 EE-409.3
outcomes circuits.
Controlling the speed of electrical motors by using
CO4 EE-409.4
power electronic circuits.
Designing of power electronic circuits for practical
CO5 EE-409.5
applications.

LEARNING OUTCOMES

215
1. Characteristics of Power Electronic Devices - SCR, DIAC and TRIAC

1. Plot the Characteristics of SCR

2. Plot the Characteristics of DIAC and TRIAC.

2. Characteristics of Power Transistors – IGBT and Power MOSFET

1. Plot the Characteristics of IGBT.

2. Plot the Characteristics of Power MOSFET.

3. Performance of different converter circuits

1. Perform the experiment on single phase half wave-controlled converter and draw its
waveforms
at different firing angles.
2. Perform the experiment on single phase full wave fully controlled centre tapped converter
and draw
itswaveforms at different firing angles.
3. Perform the experiment on single phase full wave fully controlled bridge converter and draw
its waveforms at different firing angles.

4. Speed control of the electrical motors using the Power Electronic Devices

1. Perform speed Control of DC motor by using single phase bridge converter.

2. Perform speed Control of 1-phase AC induction motor using AC voltage controller.

5. Power Electronic circuits

1. Illumination control circuit using TRIAC and DIAC.

2. Ceiling fan regulator circuit using TRIAC.

HYPONATED COURSE CONTENTS

1. Characteristics of Power Electronic Devices - SCR, DIAC and TRIAC

Plot the Characteristics of SCR, DIAC and TRIAC.

2. Characteristics of Power Transistors – IGBT and Power MOSFET

Plot the Characteristics of IGBT and Power MOSFET.

3. Performance of different converter circuits

Single phase half wave controlled converter, single phase full wave fully controlledconverter and
single phase full wave fully controlled bridge converter.

216
 4. Speed control of the electrical motors using the Power Electronic Devices

Speed Control of DC motor by using single phase bridge converter and speed Control of 1-phase AC
induction motor using AC voltage controller.

5. Power Electronic circuits

Illumination control circuit using TRIAC and DIAC, Ceiling fan regulator circuit using TRIAC.

Competencies & Key competencies to be achieved by the student

S.
Experiment Title Competencies Key competencies
NO.
Identify the different Power electronic
devices available in the laboratory like SCR,
DIAC,TRIAC, IGBT and Power MOSFET.
Draw the symbols of the above devices.
Identify the different terminals. Identify the different
i) Characteristics of SCR,
Draw the necessary circuit diagram and terminals; Make the
DIAC and TRIAC
1 identify the apparatus required connections of the
ii)Characteristics of IGBT
circuit as per the
and Power MOSFET Make the connections of the circuit as per circuit diagram.
the circuit diagram
Record the different values of voltage and
current
Plot the characteristics on a graph sheet
Draw the circuit diagram for the single phase
half wave controlled converter
Identify the different components and
apparatus required for the circuit
Make the necessary connections as per the
i) single phase half wave circuit diagram with resistive load.
converter ii) single phase Verify the waveforms in the CRO at different Verify the
full wave fully controlled firing angles waveforms in the
2 converter iii) single
Change the R- load with R-L load and CRO at different
phase full wave fully
observe the waveforms at different firing firing angles
controlled bridge
angles
converter
Implement the same for single phase full
wave fully controlled converter with R load
and R-L load
Implement the same for single phase full
wave fully controlled bridge converter with R
load and R-L load
3 i) speed Control of DC Draw the circuit diagram for the speed change the triggering
motor by using single control of the DC motor using the single angles. Draw the
phase bridge converter phase bridge convertor graph between

217
 Identify the different apparatus required
from the circuit diagram
Make the necessary connections according
ii) speed Control of 1- to the circuit
phase AC induction Change the triggering angles and Note down Speed Vs Triggering
motor using AC voltage the readings of the speed of the DC motor Angles
controller
Plot the graph Speed Vs Triggering Angles
Implement the same procedure for speed
control of single phase AC induction motor
using AC voltage controller
Draw the circuit diagram for Illumination
control circuit using TRIAC and DIAC
Identify the different apparatus required
from the circuit diagram i)change the firing
i) Illumination control
angles and observe
circuit using TRIAC and Make the necessary connections according
the illumination of
4 DIAC ii) Ceiling fan to the circuit
the lamp
regulator circuit using Change the triggering angles and Note down ii) observe the speed
TRIAC. the readings of voltage across the load. Note of the ceiling fan
down the firing angles
Implement the same procedure for Ceiling
fan regulator circuit using TRIAC

218
 HYBRID POWER SYSTEMS LABORATORY

Total
Course No. of no. of Marks Marks
code Course title periods/week periods for FA for SA

HYBRID POWER SYSTEMS

EE-410 03 45 20 30
LABORATORY

No. of
S.No. Unit Title CO’S Mapped
Periods

1. Identify various switchgear equipment and 3 CO1

write their specifications

2. Dismantle MCCB/ELCB and identify various 3 CO1

parts
3. Test fuse, MCB and electromagnetic over- 6 CO2
current relay by performing the load test
CO1
Test the working of the single phasing 3
4.
preventer using a three phase induction
motor
CO1
5. Perform plug setting and Time setting in 3
induction type electromagnetic relay

Knowledge on electrical load survey in institution 6 CO2

6. campus/hostel building and
electrical/mechanical workshop

7. Knowledge on different maintenance works such 6 CO2

as Earth Pit, Distribution Transformer yard.

8. Fire extinguishers used for different fire 6 CO2

accidents with demonstration
9. Visit to any Industry or any power station and 9 CO3
Electrical Sub substation
45
TOTAL

Course Objectives:
219
 (i) To acquire knowledge on different switchgear equipment used in electrical
power systems.
Course (ii) To perform the required load survey, load tests and able to judge its
Objectives performance.
(iii)To explore the practical knowledge in industries by visits.

Course outcomes:

CO Identify and testing of different switch gear

EE-410.1
1 equipment

Course CO Gain knowledge about electrical load survey,

EE-410.2
outcomes 2 maintenance works and safety apparatus

Co relates the theoretical knowledge with real

CO
EE-410.3 life practical environment in electrical
3 engineering context.

Learning outcomes

1. Switchgear Equipment

1. Carry out the identification of different electrical switch gear equipment.

2. Test the operation of a miniature circuit breaker (MCB) by connecting to a load.
3. Carry out the testing of single phasing preventer for a three-phase induction motor.
4. Carry out the Plug setting and Time setting in induction type electromagnetic relay by
connecting to a load.

2. Electrical Load survey, maintenance and safety

5. Conduct load survey at your institute main building/hostel and submit a brief report.
6. Conduct load survey of electrical labs/mechanical workshop and submit a brief report.
7. Conduct load survey of your institution class rooms/office/other room and submit a brief
report.
8. Identify the faults in electrical circuit of your institution and perform necessary electrical
maintenance works.
9. Identify the fire-extinguishers to be used for different fire accidents and demonstrate its
operation to extinguish fire.

3. Industrial visits

220
1. Demonstrate different types of insulators and cables used in power system and
understand its applications in power system.
2. Visit any nearby power plant to observe protection systems and submit a brief report on
industrial visit.
3. Visit nearby relevant industry to observe latest trends related to protection of electrical
equipment and submit a brief report on industrial visit.
4. Visit any electrical substation/electrical traction substation to observe different power
system protection schemes for different faults and submit a brief report.

Hyponated Course Contents

1. Switchgear Equipment
Identification of different electrical switch gear equipment – testing of fuse, MCB and
electromagnetic over-current relay by performing the load test - testing the working of single
phasing preventer using a three phase induction motor-Plug setting and Time setting in induction
type electromagnetic relay.

2. Electrical Load survey, maintenance and safety

Electrical load survey in institution campus/hostel building, institution main
building/classrooms/office and electrical/mechanical workshop etc - maintenance works to be
carried out periodically at Earth Pit, Distribution Transformer yard, - Fire extinguishers used for
different fire accidents.

3. Industrial visits
Visiting to any Industry or any power station - Visiting to any Electrical Sub substation.

Competencies & Key competencies to be achieved by the student

221
Sl.
Experiment title
No
Competencies Key Competencies

 Identify the various switch  Understand the

gear equipment like fuses, purpose of different
switches, relays, isolators , equipment.
circuit breakers, current  Understand the
Identification of various
transformers, potential usage and operating
switchgear equipment and
1. transformers principle of different
writing their specifications
 Identify specifications of equipment.
various switch gear
equipment used in power
system protection.

Identify MCCB equipment  Knowing safety

Dismantle MCCB precautions in
Identify its various parts dismantling the
2. Identify ELCB equipment MCCB/ELCB
Dismantle MCCB/ELCB and
Dismantle ELCB  Assembling the
identify various parts
Identify its various parts dismantled parts in
their correct
position

 Draw the relevant  Slowly increase

circuit diagram for the load current
performing load test.  Observe the
 Select a fuse of proper operation of relay
rating/MCB of particular while load is
3. Test fuse , MCB and current rating/presetted increasing, at what
electromagnetic over- relay of particular current value, the relay is
current relay by value. starting to operate,
performing the load test  Apply load gradually performs its
until it reaches slightly tripping
above the rated value of mechanism.
fuse/MCB current
rating/above the preset
value of over current relay
 Observe whether fuse
melts or not/ MCB trips or
not/over current relay
operates or not when the

222
 load applied is greater than
the rated current value

 Draw the relevant  Know the

circuit diagram for testing connection of
the working of single single phasing
phasing preventer. preventer in the
 Give three phase supply to supply circuit
the induction motor  Know that single
 Start the running of phasing preventer
induction motor by consists of phase
operating suitable starter failure relay and
 Observe the running of this relay detects
4. Test the working of the
induction motor, note down the single phasing
single phasing preventer
using a three phase
torque developed by the condition and trips
induction motor motor for particular load the circuit breaker
current or contactor in the
 Observe any severe motor control
vibrations are occurring or circuit
not  Observe the
 Observe any abnormal noise or sound of
noise is coming or more motor, torque
heat is developed or any developed,
smoke is releasing or not occurrence of
 Now, suddenly open one severe vibrations
of the lines by removing fuse rotor gets heated,
in any one line or by any draws more
means current from
 Now, observe for any of remaining two
the above mentioned phases.
abnormalities like drawing
more current in remaining
lines, severe vibrations
occurrence, more noise etc.,
 Give normal three phase
supply immediately after
observing the abnormalities

 To understand the  Know that

significance of plug setting operating time of
and time setting in induction relay would be

223
 type electromagnetic relay multiplied with time
 Know about the PSM and setting multiplier in
TSM facilities provided in order to get actual
the induction type time of operation of
Plug setting and Time
electromagnetic relay relay. for example if
setting in induction type
5. to set the values say that time setting
electromagnetic relay
 set PSM for any arbitrary of the relay is 0.1,
value therefore, the
 set time setting actual time of
 to know the setting of operation of the
time of operation of relay relay for PSM 10 is
3x0.1=0.3 sec or
300ms.

 Record the details of total

load and layout of the
Electrical installation.
 Prepare the Electrical
circuit layout.
 List the quantity required
and specifications of
electricalmaterial.
 List the different tools  Draw the
required to execute the Electrical wiring
installationwork. diagram.
 Prepare the work  Estimate the
schedule and identify Materials, tools and
theVendors. labour cost for the
 Estimate the cost of work.
6. Electrical Load Survey material andlabour.
 Identify the
 Execute the Electrical
vendors.
installation.(with
dummy loads)  Execute work
schedules.

 Identify the different locations of  Execute the work with

earth pits in the institution safety precautions
 Know which type of earthing is  Perform the work of
done
earth pit by own
 Know the details of required
quantity and arrangement method  Able to carry out the
of sand, coal to be arranged in maintenance schedule of
earth pit pole and plinth mounted
 Water is to poured at periodical transformer yards
intervals of maintenance to  To be well versed with
maintain the desired earth the usage of megger for
resistance value
measuring insulation
 To observe the layout of
Distribution Transformer yard resistance, rotating the
megger handle with

224
 present in the institution rated speed and giving its
 Keep the complete details of the connections correctly.
items to be inspected in a chart
 Checking of oil leakages,
Maintenance works such bushings, breather, oil level, fuses
etc., is t be done keeping in view of
as Earth Pit, Distribution
7. monthly, quarterly schedules
Transformer yard,  To know about routine DGA
Measurement of Insulation testing of plinth mounted
resistance etc., transformer yard
 To know about the external
inspection. This is to be carried out
regularly and at minimum, at least
quarterly.
 To know the importance of
insulation resistance and how it is
to be measured
 To know the usage of megger in
measuring insulation resistance of
the electrical machinery or system.
 Identification of type
ofExtinguisher
 Study different types of  Identify the type
classes of fires (class A, of fire accident
8. Fire extinguishers used for class B, class C, class D and take
different fire accidents fires) and fire Extinguishers necessaryaction
with demonstration  To know the applications of
different fire extinguishers
 Usage of extinguishers for
particularsituation.

 Draw the layout of

Industry or any power  Understand the
station and any Electrical common rules and
Sub substation to be procedural
visited steps/layouts to be
 Obtain the knowledge of followed while walking
every equipment used in through the industry
substations.  Understand the
 Record the technical various faults occurring
specifications of each frequently and safety
equipment ( Incoming and equipments used.
outgoing feeders, Bus-bar,  Understand the
Lightning arrester, Circuit working culture
breakers, Isolators, /environment of the
Protective relays, Current industry/power
Visit to any Industry or any transformers, Potential
station/substation
power station and any transformers, Metering
9. and Indicating instruments
Electrical Sub substation
used, Distribution
Transformers, Wave
trappers, capacitor banks,

225
 Batteries, Earth
switchesetc. in case of
substations)
 Note the staff structure
and duties of each staff
and day to day activities
carried by staff.
 Record the maintenance
procedures adopted as
per IS code and note
typical earth resistance
values.
 Record the preventive
maintenance schedule of
all industrial
equipment/substation
equipment
 Record the details of
frequent
faults/breakdowns that
had occurred.
 Note the safety
equipments used and
precautions tobe
taken.

 Understand the various

faults occurring
frequently and safety
equipmentsused.

226
227
 V SEMESTER

DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING

SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATIONS
(V SEMESTER)

Instruction
Scheme of Examination
period /week Total
Subject Name of the Period
End
Code Subject Practical/ /year Duration Sessiona Total
Theory Exam
Tutorial (hours) l Marks Marks
Marks

THEORY
Industrial
Management
EE 501 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
&Smart
Technologies

Electric Vehicle
EE-502 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
Technology

EE-503 Power Systems - II 5 - 75 3 20 80 100

EE-504 Digital Electronics & 5 - 75 3 20 80 100

228
 Micro Controllers

Electrical Utilisation
EE-505 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
& Traction

PRACTICAL
MATLAB Practice
EE-506 -
Laboratory 3 45 3 40 60 100

PLC & SCADA

EE-507 - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Laboratory

EE-508 Life Skills - 3 45 3 40 60 100

Digital Electronics &

EE-509 Micro Controllers - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Laboratory

EE-510 Project Work - 3 45 3 40 60 100

TOTAL 24 15 585 30 300 700 1000

NOTE:03 periods per week are allotted to Student Centric Activity (Library, Sports& Games, Clean & Green,
Preparation for placements etc)

INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT & SMART TECHNOLOGIES

Course Course Title No of Total Marks Mark

Code Periods/ Number for FA s for
Week of SA
Periods
Industrial
EE-501 Management 4 60 20 80
& SmartTechnologies

No.of
S.no Unit Title CO’S Mapped
Periods
1 Basics of Industrial Management and 17 CO1
Organisation structure

2 Material management and industrial safety 17 CO2

management

3 Entrepreneurship Development 8 CO3

229
 4 Total Quality Management 8 CO4

5 Smart technologies 10 CO5

Total Periods 60

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

i. To familiarise the concepts of management, ownership styles and

organisationstructures.
COURSE Ii. To get Exposure to organisational behavioural concepts, basics of
OBJECTIVES
Production management and materials management in industries.
Iii. To Understand the modern trends of management inindustries using
Smart technologies and maintaining quality systems.

230
 COURSE OUT COMES:

Understand the concept of management,

CO1 EE-501.1
organizations applied to industry,

Describe the different aspects of production,

C02 EE-501.2 materials and safety management activities at
industries.
COURSE OUT
COMES Describe the role of entrepreneur in economic
C03 EE-501.3
development and in improving the quality of life

Analysing and maintaining the quality standards

CO4 EE-501.4
of the product

CO5 EE-501.5 Understand and applying smart technologies

Learning Objectives

1. Basics of IndustrialManagement and Organisation Structure

1.1 Define industry, commerce (Trade) andbusiness.

1.2 Know the need formanagement.
1.3 Explain the principles of scientificmanagement.
1.4 Differentiate between supervisory, middle and Top-levelmanagement
1.5 Explain the importance of managerial skills (Technical, Human,Conceptual)
1.6 Understand the philosophy and need of organisation structure of anindustry.
1.7 Understand the line, staff and Line & staff (Functional)organisations
1.8 Explain the factors of effectiveorganisation.
1.9State motivationtheories.
1.10 StateMaslow’sHierarchyofneeds.
1.11Explain the process of selection, recruitment, training anddevelopment
1.12Explain types of businessownerships
1.13Explain the meaning and definition of socialresponsibilities
1.14Need for corporate socialresponsibility

2. Material management and industrial safety management

2.1 Define production

2.2 Explain the stages of Production, planning andcontrol.
2.3 Know the basic methods demandforecasting
2.4 Explain Break EvenAnalysis
2.5 Draw PERT/CPM networks.
2.6 Solve the criticalpath in simple project
2.7 Know Functions of Materials Management
2.8 Explain ABCanalysis.
2.9 Define safetystock and reorderlevel.

231
 2.10 Explain the importance of safety at Work place.
2.11 Explain hazard andaccident.
2.12List out different hazards in theIndustry.
2.13 Explain the causes ofaccidents.

3. EntrepreneurshipDevelopment.

3.1 Define the wordentrepreneur.

3.2 Explain the requirements of anentrepreneur.
3.3 Determine the role of entrepreneurs in promoting Small ScaleIndustries.
3.4 Describe the details of self-employmentschemes.
3.5 List out the organisations that help anentrepreneur
3.6 Understand the concept of make in India, Zero defect and zeroeffect
3.7 Understand the importance ofstartups
3.8 Explain the conduct of demand and market surveys
3.9 Prepare feasibility report of any start-up plant/processing industry

4. Total Quality Management.

4.1 Explain the concept ofquality.
4.2 List the quality systems and elements of qualitysystems.
4.3 State the principles of qualityAssurance.
4.4 Understand the basic concepts ofTQM
4.5 Know the Pillars ofTQM
4.6 Explain ISO standards and ISO 9000 series of qualitysystems.
4.7 List the beneficiaries of ISO9000.
4.8 Explain the concepts of ISO14000

5. SmartTechnologies
5.1 Get an overview ofIoT
5.2 Define the termIoT
5.3 Know how IoTwork
5.4 List the key features ofIoT
5.5 List the components of IoT : hardware, software, technology andprotocols
5.6 List the advantages and disadvantages ofIoT
5.7 Smart Energy and the SmartGrid

232
Course Content

1. Basics of IndustrialManagement and Organisation Structure

Introduction - Industry, Commerce and Business - Definition of management - Principles of

scientific management – F.W.Taylor, Nature of management - levels of management -
managerialskills - Organizing - Process of Organizing; Line/Staff and functional Organizations,
Effective Organizing; Motivational Theories; Leadership Models and types of leadership styles
Forms of Business ownerships: Types – Sole proprietorship, Partnership, Joint Stock Companies,
Cooperative types of Organizations; Employee participation in management; Corporate
Socialresponsibility

2. Materialmanagement and industrial safety management

Definition of production PPC - job, batch and mass; production Planning and Control: Demand
forecasting, Break even analysis; CPM and PERT techniques; simple numericalproblems-
Materials in industry, ABC Analysis, Safety stock, re-order level - Importance of Safety at work
places; Causes of accidents-different hazards- different emissions from industries – their effects
on environment – control methods.

3. EntrepreneurshipDevelopment.

Definition of Entrepreneur - Role of Entrepreneur - Concept of Make In India, ZERO defect, Zero
Effect - Concept of Start-up Company - Entrepreneurial Development - Role of SSI, MSME, DICs,
Entrepreneurial development schemes - Institutional support, Market survey and Demand
survey - Preparation of Feasibility studyreports.
4. Total Quality Management:

Introduction to Total Quality Management (TQM)- Concept of quality discussed by B. Crosby W.

Edward, Deming, Joseph M. Juran, Kooru Ishikawa, Genichi Taguchi, Shigco Shingo. Quality
systems – Definitions of the terms used in quality systems like, quality policy, quality
management, quality systems, Stages of development of ISO 9000 series, ISO-14000,

5. Smart Technologies:

Overview of IoT - Define IoT, how IoT work, key features of IoT, components of IoT - hardware,
software, technology and protocols - advantages and disadvantages of IoT - IoT Applications -
Smart Cities, Smart Energy and the Smart Grid, Smart Transportation and Mobility, Smart Home,
Smart Buildings and Infrastructure, Smart Factory and Smart Manufacturing, Smart Health, Food
and Water Tracking and Security, Participatory Sensing, Social Networks and IoT.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Industrial Engineering and Management-by O.PKhanna

2. Production Management- byBuffa.
3. Engineering Economics and Management Science - by Banga &Sharma.
4. Production and Operations Management –S.N.Chary

233
Blue Print

Question CO’S
Marks wise
wise Mapped
No. of Weightage distribution
.No Unit Title distribution
Periods Allocated of weightage
of weightage

R U AP R U AP

1 Basics of Industrial 17 6 23 2 3
Management and 29 CO1
Organisation structure

2 Materialmanagemen 17 3 13 10 1 2 1
t and industrial 26 CO2
safety management

3 Entrepreneurship 8 3 13 1 2
16 CO3
Development

4 Total Quality 8 6 10 2 1
16 CO4
Management

5 Smart technologies 10 23 3 20 1 2 CO5

Total 60 110 21 79 10 7 10 1

R - Remember; U - Understanding; Ap - Application; An – Analysing

Mdel Papers: Syllabus to be Covered for Unit Tests

Unit Test Learning Outcomes to be Covered

Unit Test-I From 1.1 to 2.13

Unit Test-II From 3.1 to 5.7

234
 ELECTRIC VEHICLE TECHNOLOGY

No.
TotalN
Course ofperiods Marks Marks
CourseTitle o.of
Code / for FA forSA
Periods
Week

EE-502 ELECTRIC VEHICLE 5 75 20 80

TECHNOLOGY

COURSEOUTCOMESMAPPING

CO’s
S.No UnitTitl No.ofperiods
Mapped
es
1. Environmental impact, History and Electric 17 CO1
vehicle Types
2. Hybrid Electric Vehicle 13 CO2
3. Energy Storages 17 CO3
4 Charging techniques and Battery 13 CO4
Management system
5. ElectricalDrives and Braking of 15 CO5
electricmotors
Total 75

i).To understand the concept of electric vehicles and Hybrid Electric Vehicle.
COURSEOBJ
ii).To understand the different types of energy storage system and Charging
ECTIVES
techniques for Electric vehicles .
iii).To understand about Electrical drives for Electric vehicles andbraking of
electricmotors.

Understand the Impacts of Conventional Vehicles

CO1 EE502.1
on the Society and Different Types of electric
vehicles.
CO2 EE502.2 Understand the architecture of different hybrid
COURSEOU vehicles
TCOMES Demonstrate the concepts of energy storage and
CO3 EE502.3
energy management in electric vehicles.
CO4 EE502.4 AnalyzevariousCharging techniques in electric
vehicles
CO5 EE502.5 Analyzing the different types of electric drives and
different types of electric braking

235
LEARNINGOUTCOMES

1. Environmental impact, History and Electric vehicle Types

1.1 List different pollutants produced due to IC engine vehicle (ICEV) and state their effect on
human health.
1.2 State historical journey of electric vehicle.
1.3 Define Electric vehicle and state the need of electric vehicle.
1.4 Briefly explain the problems of Electric vehicles.
1.5 List the Advantages and disadvantages of electric vehicles.
1.6 Compare Battery Electric Vehicle (BEV) & conventional vehicles.
1.7 Draw the block diagram of electric vehicles and explain the major components.
1.8 Classification of electric vehicles according to the source of power as BEV, HEV , PHEV and
FCEV.
1.9 Explain Battery Electric Vehicle (BEV) with a neat block diagram.
1.10 Explain Hybrid electric Vehicle (HEV) with a neat block diagram.
1.11 Explain Plug-in Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV) with a neat block diagram.
1.12 Explain Fuel Cell Electric Vehicle (FCEV) with a neat block diagram.

2. Hybrid Electric Vehicle

2.1 What is hybrid electric vehicle and state its necessity.

2.2 Classification of hybrid vehicles.
2.3 Explain series hybrid electric vehicle with a neat block diagram.
2.4 State the advantages and disadvantages of series hybrid system.
2.5 Explain the different power flow control modes of a series hybrid system with the help of
block diagrams
2.6 Explain parallel hybrid electric vehicle with a neat block diagram.
2.7 Advantages and disadvantages of parallel hybrid system.
2.8 Explain the different power flow control modes of a parallel hybrid system with the help of
block diagrams
2.9 Explain series-parallel hybrid electric vehicle with a neat block diagram.
2.10 List the impacts of EVs/HEVs on the power grid, environment and economy.

236
3. Energy Storages
3.1 State cell and battery
3.2 Classify cells as Primary and Secondary cells
3.3 Classify storage cell as Lead Acid Battery, Nickel based batteries, Sodium based batteries,
Lithium based batteries – Li-ion & Li-poly,
3.4 Define the terms related to batteries (i) Battery Capacity (ii) Specific Energy Density (iii)
State Of Charge (iv) State Of Discharge (v) Cycle Life (vi) Efficiency.
3.5 List main Requirements of EV batteries.
3.6 Explain Nickel -Cadmium battery system with a neat sketch.
3.7 Explain Lithium-Ion (Li-Ion) battery system with a neat sketch.
3.8 List different alternative energy storage devices for EVs as Ultracapacitor, flywheel, Fuel
cell.
3.9 Explain Ultracapacitor storage system with a neat sketch.
3.10 Explain flywheel storage system with a neat sketch.
3.11 Explain Fuel cell storage system with a neat sketch.
3.12 List Advantages and disadvantages of (i) Ultracapacitor (ii) flywheel (iii) Fuel cell .

4. Charging techniques and Battery Management system

4.1 List the basic requirements for charging system as Safety , Reliability , User-friendliness ,
Power levels and charging times , Communication , Standardization.
4.2 List the Battery charging techniques as Constant voltage, Constant current, Trickle Charging,
Battery swapping techniques, Conductive DC Charging, Conductive Ac charging, Inductive
charging or Wireless charging.
4.3 State the Constant voltage, Constant current and Trickle Charging methods.
4.4 Explain about Battery swapping techniques in Electric vehicles.
4.5 Explain about Conductive DC Charging in Electric vehicles.
4.6 Explain about Conductive AC charging in Electric vehicles.
4.7 Explain about Inductive charging or Wireless charging in Electric vehicles.
4.8 List the advantages and disadvantages of Wireless charging.
4.9 Explain the concept of V2G Technology (Vehicle-to-Grid).
4.10 List types of (i) AC connectors (ii) DC connectors.
4.11 Need of battery management system.
4.12 Explain the Block diagram of Battery Management system (BMS).

237
 5. ElectricalDrives and Braking of electricmotors

5.1 Define an Electric Drive and explain the concept of electric drive.

5.2 List the advantages of Electric Drives.

5.3 Draw the block diagram of an Electric drive and state the function of each block.

5.4 List the factors governing the selection of electric drive.

5.5 Classify the drives based on (i) Operation (ii) Application

5.6 List the Major requirements of Electric vehicle motor drive.

5.7 Explain Brushless DC (BLDC) motor with a neat sketch.

5.8 Explain Switched Reluctance motor with a neat sketch.

5.9 State the advantages of electric braking over other methods of braking.

5.10 List different methods of electric braking.

5.11 Explain the methods of plugging, Rheostatic and Regenerative braking.

5.12 List the advantages of Regenerative Braking System.

HYPONATEDCOURSECONTENTS

1. Environmental impact, History and Electric vehicle Types

Pollutants produced due to IC engine vehicle (ICEV) and their effect on human health, Historical
journey of electric vehicle ,Need of electric vehicles , Problems of Electric vehicles, major
components in electric vehicles, Classification of electric vehicles Battery, Electric Vehicle
(BEV) ,Hybrid electric Vehicle (HEV) Plug-in Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV) ,Fuel Cell Electric Vehicle
(FCEV)

2. Hybrid Electric Vehicle

History of hybrid electric vehicle, Classification of hybrid vehicles, block diagram of series hybrid
electric vehicle, power flow control modes of a series hybrid system , block diagram of parallel
hybrid electric vehicle ,power flow control modes of a parallel hybrid system , block diagram of
series parallel hybrid electric vehicle, power flow control modes for a series hybrid vehicle, impacts
of EVs/HEVs on the power grid, environment and economy.

238
3. Energy Storages

cell and battery ,Classify cells , Battery parameters : Battery Capacity , Specific Energy Density ,
State Of Charge , State Of Discharge , ,Cycle Life, Efficiency, main Requirements of EV
batteries ,Nickel -Cadmium battery system ,Lithium-Ion (Li-Ion) battery system alternative energy
storage devices for EVs as Ultracapacitor, flywheel, Fuel cell , Advantages and disadvantages of
Ultracapacitor, flywheel, Fuel cell

4. Charging techniques and Battery Management system

Basic Requirements for Charging System as Safety ,Reliability , User-friendliness , Power levels and
charging times , Communication , Standardization Battery charging techniques as Constant voltage,
Constant current , Trickle Charging, Battery swapping techniques, Conductive DC Charging,
Conductive Ac charging , Inductive charging or Wireless charging , V2G Technology (Vehicle-to-
Grid ) , types of AC connectors ,types of DC connectors, Battery Management system (BMS)

5. ElectricalDrives and Braking of electricmotors

Electric Drive, advantages of Electric Drives, block diagram of an Electric drive, factors governing the
selection of electric drive, Classify the drives, Major requirements of Electric vehicle motor drive,
(Brushless DC )BLDC motor ,Switched Reluctance motor, advantages of electric braking ,methods of
electric braking, plugging, Rheostatic and Regenerative braking, Advantages of Regenerative Braking
System

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Iqbal Hussein, Electric and Hybrid Vehicles: Design Fundamentals, CRC Press, 2003.
2. Mehrdad Ehsani, Yimi Gao, Sebastian E. Gay, Ali Emadi, Modern Electric, Hybrid Electric and Fuel Cell
Vehicles: Fundamentals, Theory and Design, CRC Press, 2004.
3. James Larminie, John Lowry, Electric Vehicle Technology Explained, Wiley, 2003.tbook /
Refences.
4. Sandeep Dhameja, “Electric Vehicle Battery Systems”, Newnes, 2001
5. Prof. Ahok Jhunjhunwala, IITM – Fumdamentals of Electrical Vehicles (MPTEL VIDEOS)

239
BLUEPRINT

Question
Marks wise
wise CO’S
No. of Weightage distribution
S.No Unit Title distribution Mapped
Periods Allocated of weightage
of weightage

R U AP R U AP

Environmental impact, 17
1 26 6 20 2 2 CO1
History and Electric
vehicle Types
2 13 16 3 13 1 2 CO2
Hybrid Electric Vehicle
3 17 26 6 20 2 2 CO3
Energy Storages
Charging techniques 13
4 16 6 10 2 1 CO4
and Battery
Management system
ElectricalDrives and 15
5 Braking of 26 6 20 2 2 CO5
electricmotors
Total 75 110 27 83 9 9

ModelPapers:SyllabustobeCoveredforUnitTests

UnitTest LearningOutcomestobeCov
ered
UnitTest-I From1.1to3.4
UnitTest-II From3.5to5.12

240
 POWER SYSTEMS – II

Total
Course No.of no. Marks Marks
Course title
code periods/week of for FA forSA
periods

EE-503 POWER SYSTEMS – II 5 75 20 80

No.of CO’S
S.no Unit Title Periods Mapped

1 Transmission lines 20 CO1

Line structures for transmission and Underground

2 25 CO2
cables

3 Substations and Distribution 15 CO3

5 Protection of Transmission lines 7 CO4

6 Modern Trends in power systems 8 CO5

Total Periods 75

i. I) To understand the concept of transmission anddistribution

ii. ii) To Analyse different methods to solve transmission and distribution
problems
iii. iii) To acquaint knowledge of substation equipment, cables and Distribution
Course systems
Objectives iv. iv) To summarize key forces driving transformation in the power sector around the
world

241
 Describe the concepts of power transmission,
CO1
EE-503.1 distribution systems and HVDC transmission
systems

CO2 Explain different structures, insulators, laying of

EE-503.2 lines including calculation of Sag and evaluation
Course outcomes of underground cables

CO3 Explain various substations and basic concepts

EE-503.3
of distribution

CO4 Understand basic concepts of transmission line

EE-503.4
protection

CO5 Enhance the knowledge of the studentswith the

EE-503.5 recent trends in emerging powersystem
operation

LEARNING OUTCOMES

1. Transmission Lines

1.1 State the need of transmission lines and distributionlines

1.2 Explain A.C and D.C transmission supplysystems and state its advantages and disadvantages
1.3 State the various supply systems.
1.4 Compare the supply systems based on the conductor material required for overhead linesand
undergroundcables for the following systems:
i) DC – 2 wiresystem
ii) AC - 1 ph 2 wiresystem
iii) AC - 3 ph 3 wiresystem
1.5 Explain the effects of supply frequency on Transmission lines
1.6 State the effects of using higher transmission voltageon
(i) Lineefficiency (ii)Voltage drop iii)Line loss
(iv)Active &reactivePower (v)Volume of conductor material
( vi)Cost of-transformers, insulators, switchgear, supportsetc.
1.7 State the empirical formula for determining the systemvoltage
1.8 State the relative merits and demerits for the following conductors;
a) Solid b)Stranded c)Hollow d) Bundledconductors
1.9 Explain the current distortioneffects
(i) Skineffect(ii) Proximityeffect (iii) Spirality effect
1.10 Give expression for inductance of 1- phase system and 3-phase system
1.11 Give the expressions for capacitance of1 phase system and 3-phase system
1.12 State the need for transposition of overheadlines and explain its effects.
1.13 Define short, medium and longlines.
1.14 Define`regulation’and derive the approximate formula for percentage regulation.
1.15 Explain short transmission lines

242
1.16 Solve simple problemsonregulation and efficiency for shortline
1.17 Explain (i) Nominal T-method (ii) Nominal π –method for a medium transmission lines
and solve simple problems.
1.18 State `Ferranti’effect
1.19 Define Corona, State the factors affecting it and list the methods of reducing corona
1.20 Explain the concept and applications of hot linetechnique
1.21State basic concepts of HVDCtransmission
1.22 List the types ofHVDC transmission systems.
1.23 State the advantages and disadvantages of HVDCtransmission

2. Line structures and Underground Cables

2.1 State the main components of overheadlines

2.2 State the requirements of linesupports and List the types of linesupports
2.3. List the common conductor spacing and ground clearances adopted for 66 kV, 33kV, 11 kV
and LT line
2.4 Define`sag’ and state the factors affecting thesag
2.5 Derive an equation for the approximate method of calculating sag when the supports are at
the samelevel (a) instillair (b) with the effect of wind andice and solve problems.
2.6 State the disadvantages of loose spans(sag more than prescribedvalue)
2.7 State the purpose of insulators and its requirements.
2.8 State applications of the followinginsulators.
(i) Pintype (ii)Straintype (iii)Suspensiontype (iv)Shackletype
2.9 Comparison pin type insulator and suspension typeinsulators.
2.10 Define theterms ( i) Flashover (ii)Puncture (iii)String-efficiency
2.11 Solve problems on distribution of voltage acrossstring and stringefficiency
2.12List the methods of improving stringefficiency
2.13 State the need for arcing horns and guardrings
2.14 List causes of failure of insulators in transmission and distributionlines
2.15 Definecables and explain the general construction of cables.
2.16 Compare overhead lines with undergroundcables
2.17Classify the cables basedon
(i) Number ofconductors (ii) Voltage (iii) Insulation and leadsheathing
(iv) The methods of improving the dielectricstress
2.18 Derive an equation for the insulation resistance of acable
2.19 Solve problems on insulationresistance.

3. Substations and Distribution

3.1 Explain the need forsubstations

3.2 State the merits of indoor substation and outdoor substation
3.3 Statethe purpose ofthe following equipment used insubstation.
(i) Busbars (ii) Insulators (iii)Transformers
(iv) Switchgear (v) Indicating and Meteringequipment (vi) Protectiverelays
(vii) Lightningarrestors (viii) C a b l e s (ix) Firefightingequipment
3.5 State the need for auxiliarysupply in Substations

243
 3.6 Draw the schematic diagram of 33kV / 11kVsubstation and label the parts.
3.7 Draw the schematic diagram of 220kV / 132kVsubstation and label the parts.
3.8Define Feeder, distributors and servicemains
3.9 Explain radial and ring-main distribution systems and state their advantages and
disadvantages
4. Protection of Transmission Lines

4.1 State the necessity of bus-bar protection, causes of bus-bar faults.

4.2 Describe the transmission line protection.
4.3 Explain the protection of transmission lines using distance relays.
4.4 Explain pilot wires

5. Modern trends in powersystems

5.1 Define Smart Grid and state itsneed

5.2 Explain the working of SMARTGRID
5.3 Define Micro Grid and explain its operation
5.4 Define FACTS(Flexible AC transmission systems) and state itsapplications
5.5 State the Basic concept of WiTricity (wireless power transmission)
5.6 Define distributed generation (Distributed energy resources).

HYPONATEDCOURSE CONTENTS

1. Transmission Lines

Need for transmission lines-Transmission supply systems, Relative advantages and disadvantages of
AC & DC Transmission, Choice of frequency, Choice of voltage, Effect of voltage, Empirical formula
for determining the system voltage-Types of conductor-Solid-Stranded-Hollow- Bundled conductors
-Relative merits of different types of conductors-Transmission parameters: Resistance, Inductance
capacitance-skin effect, proximity effect, spirality effect- inductance of Round and Parallel
Conductors ,Transposition of O.H. lines-Effect of transposition on Inductance calculations in
transposed lines, capacitance in round and parallel conductors -Regulation and efficiency-
Approximate formula for Regulation-Short line calculation of-Efficiency-Regulation-Sending end
voltage-sending end p.f. for the given receiving end conditions -Regulation-Sending end voltage-
sending end p.f. for the given receiving end conditions in medium transmission lines using Nominal
pie method-Nominal T method -Vector diagrams in the above methods- -Ferranti’s effect- Corona in
transmission lines -Effects of corona –methods of reducing corona-Hot line technique - concept
andapplication-High voltage DC Transmission: Basic Concepts and Types of HVDC transmission-
Advantages and disadvantages of HVDCtransmission.

2. Line structures and Cables:

Requirements of line supports-Types of lines supports- Conductors spacing and ground clearance -
lines spaces-Approximate ground clearance- Sag, Factors affecting sag, calculating sag.
Disadvantages of loose span, Insulators, Requirements of insulators , Materials used , Types of
Insulators, Voltage distribution across string of suspension Insulators, Flashover, Puncture, string
efficiency, improving string efficiency, , Arcing horns and guard rings, Causes for failure ofinsulators-

244
Cables, Comparison between O.H. Lines and underground cables, Classification of cables, General
construction of cables, Insulation resistance of cables and problems.

3. Sub-stations and Distribution

Definition and classification of sub-stations, Relative merits of indoor and outdoor sub- stations
equipment in sub-stations Bus-bars, Insulators, Switch gear, Transformer, Protective relays, Meters,
Lightning arrestors, Cables, Fire fighting equipment-Schematic diagrams- Feeders, distributors and
service mains, Classification of Distribution systems- Radial and Ring system of Distribution.

4. Protection of Transmission Lines andFeeders,

Transmission line protection –Busbar protection-transmission line protection using distance relays. -
Pilot wires
5. Modern trends in powersystems

Smart Grid – Micro Grid – FACTS(Flexible AC transmission systems) – Witricity (Wireless power
Transmission), DistributedGeneration

Reference Books:

1. V.K. Mehta -Principle of Powersystems

2. S.L. Uppal - Electricalpower
3. Sony, Gupta & Bhattnagar -Text book of Elect.Power
4. CL Wadhwa -Electrical power Systems - New Age International(P)limited.
5. KR Padiyar - HVDC Power Transmission system Technology.

Learning Outcomes to be Covered

From 1.1 to 2.14

From 2.15 to 5.6

Syllabus to be Covered for Unit Tests

245
 Blue print:

Weight Marks wise Question wise

ageAllo distribution distribution
S.No Chapter title No. of cated ofweightage CO’s
ofweightage
period Mapped
s
R U Ap An R U AP AN

1 Transmission 20 29 2
6 3 20 2 1 CO1
lines

Line
2
Structures
and 25 29 6 13 10 2 1 2 CO2
Underground
cables

3
Substations
and 15 26 3 23 0 1 3 0 CO3
Distribution

4
Protection of
Transmission 7 13 3 10 0 1 1 0 CO4
Lines

5
Modern
Trends in 13 0
8 0 13 0 0 2 CO5
Power
System

Total 75 110 18 62 30 6 8 4

246
 DIGITAL ELECTRONICS AND MICROCONTROLLERS

No.of Total
CourseCo periods No.ofPeriod Marksfor Marksfo
de CourseTitle FA rSA
/Week s

DIGITAL ELECTRONICS AND

EE-504 5 75 20 80
MICRO CONTROLLERS

COURSE OUTCOMES MAPPING

No. of CO’s
S.No Unit Title
periods Mapped

1. Basics of Digital Electronics 10 CO1

2. Combinational Logic circuits 17 CO2

3. Sequential Logic Circuits 15 CO3

4 8051 Microcontroller 15 CO4

5. 8051 instruction set and programming 18 CO5

Total 75

i)To introduce students to the basic theory of digital electronics, their

COURSE practical applications.
OBJECTIVE ii) To familiarize students to the principle of operation, design and
S synthesis of different digital electronic circuits.
iii) To provide strong foundation for further study of digital electronic
circuits and systems
iv) To understood different applications microcontrollers

247
 Understand number systems, basic operation and
CO1 EE505.1 compare performance of various digital electronic
circuits.

Design and analyse digital electronic circuits and

CO2 EE505.2 learn to select suitable circuits by assessing the
COURSE requirements of application fields.
OUTCOME Identify the critical areas in application levels and
S derive typical alternative solutions, select suitable
CO3 EE505.3
digital electronic circuits to control industry grade
apparatus.

Select 8051 microcontroller for given application and

CO4 EE505.4
develop assembly program for a given application

Describe 8051 microcontrollers as per requirement

CO5 EE505.5
and develop a simple real time application.

LEARNING OUTCOMES

1. Basics Of Digital Electronics

1.1 Explain Binary, Octal, Hexadecimal number systems and compare them with Decimal
system.
1.2 Perform binary addition, subtraction, Multiplication and Division.
1.3 Explain about BCD.
1.4 Write 1‘s complement and 2‘s complement numbers for a given binary number
1.5 Perform subtraction of binary numbers in 2‘s complement method.
1.6 Explain the importance of parity Bit.
1.7 State different postulates and De-Morgan‘s theorems in Boolean algebra.
1.8 Explain AND, OR, NOT, NAND, NOR and EX-OR gates with truth table.
1.9 Realize AND, OR, NOT operations using NAND, NOR gates.
1.10 Classify digital logic families.
1.11 Give IC numbers for different digital Logic gates.

2. Combinational Logic Circuits

2.1 Give the concept of combinational logic circuits.

2.2 Draw the Half adder circuit and verify its functionality using truth table.
2.3 Realize a Half-adder using NAND gates only.
2.4 Draw the full adder circuit and explain its operation with truth table.
2.5 Realize full-adder using two Half-adders and an OR – gate and write truth table
2.6 Draw and explain a 4 Bit parallel adder using full – adders.
2.7 Explain the working of a serial adder with a Block diagram.
2.8 Draw and explain the operation of 4 X 1 Multiplexers

248
2.9 Draw and explain the operation of 1 to 4 demultiplexer.
2.10 Draw and explain 3 X 8 decoder.
2.11 List any three applications of multiplexers and decoders.
2.12 Draw and explain One-bit digital comparator.

3. Sequential Logic Circuits

3.1 Give the idea of Sequential logic circuits.

3.2 Explain NAND and NOR latches with truth tables
3.3 State the necessity of clock and give the concept of level clocking and edge triggering,
3.4 Draw and explain clocked SR flip flop with preset and clear inputs.
3.5 Construct level clocked JK flip flop using S-R flip-flop and explain with truth table
3.6 Write the truth tables of edge triggered D and T flip flops and draw their symbols.
3.7 List the applications of flip flops.
3.8 Define modulus of a counter
3.9 Explain with block diagrams and timing diagrams
(i) 4-bit asynchronous counter
(ii) 4-bit synchronous counter.
3.10 State the need for a Register and list the types of registers.
3.11 Draw and explain the working of 4 bit shift left and shift right registers
3.12 Explain the working of ring counter and list its applications
3.13 State memory read operation, write operation, access time, memory capacity,
address lines and word length.
3.14 Distinguish between (a) EEPROM and UVEPROM (b) static RAM and dynamic RAM

4. Micro controller
4.1 Explain the concept of Micro controllers.
4.2 Compare Embedded with External memory devices.
4.3 List the three commonly used Commercial Microcontroller Device families.
4.4 Draw the block diagram of a microcontroller and explain the function of each block.
4.5 Explain the register structure of 8051.
4.6 Explain the functions of various special function registers.
4.7 Draw the pin diagram of 8051 micro controller and specify the purpose of each pin.
4.8 Explain internal memory, external memory and ports of 8051.
4.9 List interrupts in 8051

5. Instruction set and Programming

5.1 State the need for an instruction set.
5.2 Explain the instruction format of 8051.
5.3 Explain fetch cycle, execution cycle and instruction cycle.
5.4 Define the terms machine language, assembly language, and mnemonics.
5.5 Differentiate between machine level and assembly level programming.
5.6 List the major groups in the instruction set along with examples.

249
5.7 Explain the terms operation code, operand and illustrate these terms by writing an
instruction.
5.8 Explain the data manipulation functions data transfer, arithmetic, logic and branching.
5.9 Explain the addressing modes of 8051.
5.10 Explain data transfer instructions of 8051.
5.11 Explain the arithmetic instructions and recognize the flags that are set or reset for
given data conditions.
5.12 Explain the logic instructions and recognize the flags that are set or reset for given
data conditions.
5.13 Explain unconditional and conditional jump and how flags are used to change the
sequence of program.
5.14 Define subroutine and explain its use.
5.15 Write program to perform
(i) Single byte & Multi byte addition
(ii) Summing-up of given N numbers
(iii) Multiplication of two 8-bit numbers using MUL instruction

Note : 1. This Subject is to be taught by Electronics & Communication Engg. faculty

2. Paper setting and paper evaluation is also to be done by Electronics &
Communication Engg Faculty.

HYPONATED COURSE CONTENTS

1. Basics Of Digital Electronics

Binary, Octal. Hexadecimal number systems- Logic gates : AND, OR, NOT, NAND, NOR, Exclusive-OR-
Boolean algebra, Boolean expressions – De-Morgan‘s Theorems - Characteristics of digital circuits .

2. Combinational Logic Circuits

Implementation of arithmetic circuits, Half adder, Full adder, Serial and parallel Binary adder.
Parallel adder/subtractor, Multiplexer, demultiplexer, decoder

3. Sequential Logic Circuits

Principle of flip-flops operation, Concept of edge triggering, level triggering, RS, D, JK, T, flip-flops -
Applications of flip flops,. Binary counter- ripple counter, synchronous counter, up-down counter-
Shift Registers – ring counter and its applications- Memories-terminology related to memories,
RAM, ROM, EEPROM, UVEPROM, static RAM, dynamic RAM

4. Micro Controllers
Block diagram of 8051- Pin out diagram of 8051, registers, interrupts.

250
5. Instruction Set And Programming

Instruction set of 8051, instruction format, fetch cycle, execution cycle, instruction cycle,
machine cycle, timing diagrams, classification of instructions, addressing modes- Groups of
instructions, Opcode, operand - Data transfer, subroutines– Assembly level programming.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Digital Computer Electronics by Malvino and leach TMH

2. Modern Digital Electronics By RP Jain TMH
3. Digital Electronics Tokhem TMH
4. Digital Design by Morris Mano, PHI
5. Kenneth J.Ayala. - 8051 Micro controller

BLUE PRINT

Markswise Questionwise
No. Weigh Distribution of Distribution of
S. CO’s
Chapter / of tage Weightage Weightage
N Mappe
Unit Title peri Alloca
o A A d
ods ted R U R U Ap An
p n

Basics of
1 Digital 10 16 3 3 10 1 1 1 CO1
Electronics

Combinational
2 17 26 3 23 0 1 3 0 CO2
Logic circuits

Sequential
3 15 26 3 23 0 1 3 0 CO3
Logic Circuits

8051
4 Microcontroll 15 16 3 13 0 1 2 0 CO4
er

8051
instruction set
5 18 26 3 3 20 1 1 2 CO5
and
programming

Total 75 110 15 65 30 5 10 3

251
Model Papers: Syllabus to be Covered for Unit Tests

Unit Test Learning Outcomes to be Covered

Unit Test-I From 1.1 to 3.9

Unit Test-II From 3.10 to 5.17

252
 ELECTRICAL UTILIZATION AND TRACTION

No. of
Course Total No. Marks for Marks for
Course Title periods
code of periods FA SA
/week

ELECTRICAL UTILIZATION
EE-505 5 75 20 80
AND TRACTION

S.No Unit Title No. of periods CO’s Mapped

1 Electric Lighting 17 CO1

2 Electric Heating 14 CO2

3 Energy saving devices 12 CO3

4 Electric Traction 22 CO4

5 Traction SupplySystems 10 CO5

Total 75

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

i) Understand about terminology regarding illumination, understand

about various lamps, Able to design simple lighting schemes.

ii) Understand about different Electric Heating Methods, Ability to

Course Objectives
identify a heating scheme for a given application.

iii) Understand different schemes of traction, its main equipments

Course Outcomes:

Course Outcomes CO1 EE-505-1 Design lighting schemes for a given application

Ability to identify the type of Electric heating

CO2 EE-505-2
suitable for any specific application

Ability to draw Automatic Temperature and

CO3 EE-505-3
Illumination control circuits.

CO4 EE-505-4 Understand the basic principle of electric

253
 tractionincluding speed– time curves of different
traction services and traction equipment

Analyzethe operation of traction supply systems

CO5 EE-505-5
and train lighting systems

Learning Objectives:

1. Electric Lighting
1.1. Define the following terms related to electric lighting.
a) Plane and solid angles, b) luminous flux, c) Luminous intensity,
d) Lumen Illumination e) Candle power, f) Polar curve,
g) Brightness, h) MHCP, i) MSCP,
j) MHSCP k) Wave length, l) Glare
1.2. Explain the production of lightby
a)Excitation b) Ionisation c)Fluorescence and d) Phosphorescence
1.3. List the types of lamps used for illumination at different situations suchas
a) Domesticb) Industrialc) Decorationd) Advertisementse) Street lighting schemes
1.4. State the requirements of good lighting
1.5. List the lamp fittings used in domestic and industrial applications
1.6. State and explain the laws of Illumination
1.7. Solve problems on Illumination
1.8. Define the following terms
a) Utilisation factor b) Depreciation factor c) Waste light factor
d) Reflection factor e) Reduction factor f) Absorption factor
g) Luminous efficiency h) Space height ratio i) Specific energy consumption
1.9. Design a simple lighting scheme for drawing hall

2. Electric Heating
2.1. State the advantages of electricheating
2.2. List the requirements of good heating material and state the materials employed for heating
2.3. Explain the following with legible sketch and state its industrial applications
a) Direct resistance heating b) Indirect resistance heating
2.4. Explain the following with legible sketch and state its industrial applications
a) Direct arc furnace b) Indirect arc furnace
2.5. Explain the following with legible sketch and state its industrial applications
a) Core type Induction furnace b) Coreless type Induction furnace
2.6. State the principle of dielectricheating and list the industrial applications of the dielectric
heating

3. Energy saving Devices

3.1 State the need of power savingdevices
3.2 Draw Automatic temperature control circuits for (coolers, geysers, air conditioners and iron
boxes)

254
3.3 DrawAutomaticilluminationcontrolcircuitsusingLDR’s
3.4 List the advantages of Compact Fluorescent Lamps (CFL)
3.5 Explain the operating principle of Light Emitting Diode (LED)
3.6 List the advantages of LED lamps over other types of lamps
3.7 Compare LED lamps with Tungsten filament lamps

4. Electric Traction
4.1 Describe different methods of track electrification
4.2. List the types of traction services and sketch the speed-time curves
4.3. State each stage of the speed-time curve with appropriate speeds
4.4. Define Maximum speed, average speed and scheduled speed
4.5. List the factors affecting the scheduled speed
4.6. Sketch the simplified speed-time curves and state their practical importance
4.7. Derive the expression for maximum speed, acceleration and retardation for the following speed
time curves and solve simple problems on it
a) Trapezoidal speed time curve b) Quadrilateral speed time curve
4.8. Explain the tractive effort
4.9. Derive the expression for tractive effort for acceleration to overcome gravity pull and train
resistance and solve problems.
4.10. Explain the mechanics of transfer of power from motor to driving wheel
4.11. Define `Coefficient of adhesion’ and list the factors affecting the coefficient of adhesion
4.12. Solve problems on calculation of number of axels required
4.13. State the methods of improving the coefficient of adhesion
4.14. Define specific energy consumption and list the factors affecting it
4.15. List the important Overhead Equipments (OHE) used in Traction
4.16. State the important requirements of traction motor
4.17. Explain the suitability of different motors (D.C., 1-Ø A.C, 3-Ø A.C., Composite & Kando
systems) for traction
4.18. State the need for Booster Transformer in Traction

5. Traction Supply Systems

5.1. Describe the following major Equipment at tractionSubstation
a) Transformer b) Circuit Breaker c) Interrupter
5.2. State the importance of location and spacing of Substation
5.3. Explain End on Generation
5.4. Explain Mid on Generation
5.5. Explain Head on Generation
5.6. State the requirements of Train lighting
5.7. Mention the requirements of railway coach air conditioning

HYPONATED COURSE CONTENT

255
1. Electric Lighting

Important terms and definitions of lighting - Plane and solid angles, luminous flux, Luminous
intensity, Lumen Illumination, Candle power, Polar curve, Brightness, MHCP, MSCP, MHSCP, Wave
length and Glare – Principle of production of light by Excitation, Ionisation, Fluorescence and
Phosphorescence – Types of lamps – Requirements of good lighting – Different types of lamp
fittings – Laws of Illumination – important terms used in designing of simple lighting scheme –
Problems.

2. Electric Heating

Advantages of electric heating - requirements of good heating material - materials generally

employed for Electric Heating, resistance heating - direct and indirect types - applications - Electric
arc furnaces - direct and indirect types - applications - Induction furnace heating - core and coreless
type - applications - Dielectric heating - principle – applications

3. Energy saving Devices

Need of power saving devices - Automatic temperature control circuits- Automatic illumination
control circuits using LDR’s- Advantages of CF Lamps –Operating Principle of LED lamp - Advantages
of LED lamps over other types of lamps- Compare LED lamps with tungsten filament lamps.

4. Electric Traction

Single-phase A.C. and Composite systems -Types of services (main line, suburban , Metro and
urban) - speed-time curves for the above services - Maximum speed, average speed and scheduled
speed - Factors affecting the scheduled speed - Simplified speed-time curves & its practical
importance - Expression for maximum speed, acceleration and retardation for Trapezoidal &
Quadrilateral speed time curves - numerical examples - Tractive effort & its derivation – Mechanism
of transfer of power from motor to driving wheel - Coefficient of adhesion - factors affecting the
coefficient of adhesion - problems on calculation of number of axles required - methods of
improving the coefficient of adhesion - specific energy consumption - factors affecting specific
energy consumption - Overhead Equipments (OHE) - State the important requirements of traction
motor - suitability of different motors (D.C., 1-Ø A.C, 3-Ø A.C., Composite & Kando systems for
traction – Need of Booster Transformer.

5. Traction Supply Systems

Major Equipment at traction Substation – Importance of Location and Spacing of Substations - End
on Generation - Mid on Generation - Head on Generation - Requirements of Train lighting -
requirements of railway coach air conditioning.

REFERENCES

256
 1. J B Gupta – Utilisation of Electric Power and Electric Traction – Katson Books
2. R.K.Gang - Utilisation ofElectricenergy
3. H.Partab - Art and Science ofelectricpower – Dhanpat Rai & Co
4. K.B.Bhatia – Study of electrical Appliances and devices – Khanna Publications
5. R.K.Rajput - Utilisation of Electric Power – Parag Enterprises

Blue Print:

Marks wise Question wise

Weightag CO’S
No. of distribution of distribution of
S.No Unit Title e Mapped
Periods weightage weightage
Allocated
R U AP R U AP

1 Electric Lighting 17 26 06 10 10 02 01 01 CO1

2 Electric Heating 14 24 03 21 - 01 3.5 - CO2

Energy saving
3 12 13 03 10 - 01 01 - CO3
devices

Electric Traction
4 – Properties and 22 29 03 13 13 01 02 02 CO4
Equipment

Traction supply
systems and
5 10 18 03 15 - 01 1.5 - CO5
Train lighting
systems

Total 75 110 18 69 23 06 09 03

R-Remembering; U-Understanding; AP-Application

Syllabus to be covered for Unit Tests

Unit Test Learning Outcomes to be Covered

Unit Test - 1 From 1.1 to 3.4

Unit Test – 2 From 3.5 to 5.7

257
 MATLAB PRACTRICE LABORATORY

No. of
Total No. Marks for Marks for
Course code Course Title periods /
of periods FA SA
week

EE-506 MATLAB PRACTRICE 3 45 20 80

LABORATORY

COURSE OUTCOMES MAPPING

S.No Major Topics No. of periods CO’s Mapped

1 Familiarization with MATLAB 09 CO1

2 Simulation of DC Circuits 06 CO2

3 Simulation of AC Circuits 09 CO3

4 Simulation of Power Electronic Converter 12 CO4

circuits

5 Simulation of DC and AC motor Drives 09 CO5

Total 45

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

i) Familiarize with the MATLAB software

Course Objectives ii)Simulate the responses in DC, AC and Power Electronic Converter
Circuits

iii) Simulate the responses in DC and AC motor Drives

Course Outcomes:

Course Outcomes Ability to use command window and save files.

CO1 EE-506-1 Understands various blocks available in Simscape/SIM
Power systems

Ability to find desired response in DC Circuits through

CO2 EE-506-2
MATLAB software

CO3 EE-506-3 Ability to find desired response in AC Circuits through

MATLAB software

258
 Ability to find desired response in power electronics
CO4 EE-506-4
Circuits through MATLAB software

Understand the Voltage control method in speed

CO5 EE-506-5 control of DC and AC motor Drives through software
simulation

LEARNING OUTCOMES

1. Familiarization with MATLAB software

1.1. Introduction to command window and perform simple math calculations
1.2. Introduction to Simscape/SIM Power systems
1.3. Working with different blocks of Simscape/SIM Power systems

2. Simulation of DC Circuits
2.1. Verify Thevenin’s Theorem in a simple DC Circuit using SIMULINK
2.2. Verify Norton’s Theorem in a simple DC Circuit using SIMULINK

3. Simulation of AC Circuits
3.1. Verify Thevenin’s Theorem in a simple AC Circuit using SIMULINK
3.2. Verify Norton’s Theorem in a simple AC Circuit using SIMULINK

4. Simulation of Power Electronic Converter circuits

4.1. Simulation of Single phase full wave converter circuit with R and RL loads
4.2. Simulation of Three phase full wave converter circuit with R load
4.3. Simulation of single phase bridge inverter circuit

5. Simulation of DC and AC motor Drives

5.1. Simulation of speed control of BLDC motor using single phase full wave rectifier
5.2. Simulation of speed control of PMSM motor using single phase full wave rectifier
5.3. Simulation of speed control of Induction Motor using Three phase AC Voltage controller.

HYPONATED COURSE CONTENT

259
1. Familiarization with MATLAB software
Introduction to command window - perform simple math calculations (addition, multiplication,
matrix formation) – Procedure to save Matlab files - Simscape/SIM Power systems – Introduction –
Familiarization with different blocks available in Simscape/SIM Power systems

2. Simulation of DC Circuits
Verification of Thevenin’s and Norton’s Theorem in a simple DC Circuit using SIMULINK

3. Simulation of AC Circuits
Verification of Thevenin’s and Norton’s Theorem in a simple AC Circuit using SIMULINK

4. Simulation of Power Electronic Converter circuits

Simulation - Single phase full wave converter circuit with R and RL loads - Three phase full wave
converter circuit with R load - single phase bridge inverter circuit

5. Simulation of DC and AC motor Drives

Simulation of speed control - BLDC motor using single phase full wave rectifier - PMSM motor using
single phase full wave rectifier - Induction Motor using Three phase AC Voltage controller

Competencies & Key competencies to be achieved by the student

Sl.No Experiment Competencies Key Competencies

. Title

1 Familiarization  Opening of new command window  perform simple math

with MATLAB  Understand about command window and calculations by using
workspace command window
software  Able to perform simple mathematical  Familiarization with
calculations different blocks available in
 Able to perform matrix operations Simscape/SIM Power
 Understanding the procedure to save mat systems
lab files
 Procedure to open new file in Simulink
 Understand about different tabs in
Simulink
 To know about different blocks in
Simulink library browser
 To draw simple circuits by using different
blocks in Simulink library browser
 understand the functional block ‘scope’
and able to use it
 able to save the work done in simulink
2 Simulation of  Opening of new file in Simulink  Identification of required DC
DC Circuits  Adding of all electrical components electrical components from
required from Simulink library browser to Simulink library browser
form a desired DC circuit to verify  Drawing the desired circuit
Thevenin’s & Norton’s theorems in Simulink
 Give appropriate values to all electric  Interpreting the results

260
 components obtained through scope
 Adding ‘scope’ to view response
 Press the run icon to process the circuit
and the response will be viewed in scope
 Save the work done in simulink
3 Simulation of  Opening of new file in Simulink  Identification of required DC
AC Circuits  Adding of all electrical components electrical components from
required from Simulink library browser to Simulink library browser
form a desired AC circuit to verify  Drawing the desired circuit
Thevenin’s & Norton’s theorems in Simulink
 Give appropriate values to all electric  Interpreting the results
components obtained through scope
 Adding ‘scope’ to view response
 Press the run icon to process the circuit
and the response will be viewed in scope
 Save the work done in simulink
4 Simulation of  Opening of new file in Simulink  Identification of required
Power  Adding the components required for Power electronic devices
single phase and three phase full wave from Simulink library
Electronic rectifier for R load. browser
Converter  Adding the components for gate  Drawing of Single phase and
circuits triggering pulses three phase full wave
 Able to change the firing angle converter circuit with R and
 Press the run icon to process the circuit RL loads.
and the response will be viewed in scope  Analyze the waveforms for
 Save the work done in simulink different triggering angles

5 Simulation of  Opening of new file in Simulink  Identification of required

DC and AC  Adding the components required for Power electronic devices
single phase full wave rectifier and three and motors from Simulink
motor Drives phase AC Voltage controller. library browser
 Identifying the BLDC, PMSM and  Drawing of speed control
Induction motors in simulink library circuit to BLDC, PMSM and
browser and adding to simulink Induction motors in simulink
 Press the run icon to process the circuit  Analyze the response for
and the response will be viewed in scope different triggering angles
 Save the work done in simulink

PLC AND SCADA LABORATORY

Course Course title No. Of Total No. Marks Marks

code periods/week of

261
 periods for FA for SA

PLC and SCADA

EE-507 3 45 40 60
LABORATORY

S.No No. of
Unit Title CO’S Mapped
. Periods
Basics of PLC 6
1. CO1

Ladder Diagrams for logic gates, timers and counters 6

2. CO2

Ladder Diagrams for domestic applications 12

3. CO3

Ladder Diagrams for industrial applications 12

4. CO4

Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition(SCADA) 9

5. CO5

Total 45

i) To acquire the knowledge for PLC programming and operating.

ii) To develop ladder diagrams for domestic and industrial applications.

Course iii) Apply PLC Timers and Counters for the control of industrialprocesses and
Objectives todevelop a coil and contact control to operate analog PLC operations.

iv) To understand the fundamentals of SCADA and to design programs of

automated applications.

Familiarise automation, its importance, expectations

from automation andapplications in industry. Analyze
CO1 EE-507.1 the working of PLC, I/O modules of PLC, Programming
languages and instructions of PLC.

Design and writing ladder diagrams for logic gates,

CO2 EE-507.2
Course timers and counters.
outcomes Designing a small automated ladder diagrams for
CO3 EE-507.3
domestic applications.
Designing a small automated ladder diagrams for
CO4 EE-507.4
industrial applications.
Understand the fundamental of SCADA systems,
CO5 EE-507.5 design of ON andOFF switch in SCADA,design
programs of automated applications in SCADA.

262
LEARNING OUTCOMES

1. Basics of PLC

1. Demonstrate PLC architecture

2. Working with various tools available in PLC software
3. Preparation of ladder diagram, uploading of code to PLC and running the code on PLC
4. Ladder diagram for ON/OFF inputs to produce ON/OFF outputs.

2. Ladder Diagrams for logic gates, timers and counters

1. Execute ladder diagram for Logical Gates – AND gate, OR gate, NOT gate, NAND gate, NOR
gate, EX-OR gate and EX-NOR gate
2. Execute the following Boolean expressions
• A BC + AB
• A BC + C B + A CB
3. Execute ladder diagram to run the motor for a specified time using timers.
4. Execute the ladder diagram for blinking the LED until a key is pressed using timer.
5. Execute the ladder diagram for starting the motor after pressing the push button for three
times using counters.

3. Ladder Diagrams for domestic applications

1 Execute ladder diagram for interfacing of lamp and button for ON / OFF operation
2 Execute ladder diagram for delayed operation of lamp by using PUSH button.
3 Execute ladder diagram by multiple push button operation with delayed lamp for ON/OFF
operation.
4 Execute ladder diagram for Stair Case Lighting
5 Execute ladder diagram for sensing of temperature of the given liquid.

4. Ladder Diagrams for industrial applications

1 Execute ladder diagram for DOL starter

2 Execute ladder diagram for Star-Delta starter
3 Execute ladder diagram for PMDC Motor Speed Controller
4 Execute ladder diagram for Traffic Light Controller
5 Execute ladder diagram for rotating stepper motor in forward and reverse direction at
constant speed.

5. Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition(SCADA)

263
1. Interface SCADA with PLC and perform read/ command transfer operation.
2. Design of ON and OFF switch in SCADA
3. Execute Parameter reading of PLC in SCADA.
4. Operate the PLC inputs through the switch symbol from the computer screen and view the
5. status of the outputs using lamp and motor graphics symbols in the screen.
6. Perform Alarm annunciation using SCADA.
7. Perform Reporting and Trending in SCADA System.
8. Perform temperature sensing using SCADA.

HYPONATED COURSE CONTENTS

1. Basics of PLC

Demonstrate PLC architecture - Working with various tools available in PLC software - Preparation
of ladder diagram - uploading of code to PLC and running the code on PLC

2. Ladder Diagrams for logic gates, timers and counters

Execute ladder diagram for different Logical Gates - ladder diagram using timers & counters

3. Ladder Diagrams for domestic applications

Execute ladder diagram for interfacing of lamp and button for ON / OFF operation - ladder diagram
for delayed operation of lamp by using Push button - ladder diagram by multiple push button
operation with delayed lamp for ON/OFF operation - ladder diagram with combination of counter
and timer for lamp ON/OFF operation - ladder diagram for Stair Case Lighting - ladder diagram for
Temperature Controller.

4. Ladder Diagrams for industrial applications

Execute ladder diagram for DOL starter - ladder diagram for Star-Delta starter - ladder diagram for
PMDC Motor Speed Controller - ladder diagram for Traffic Light Controller - ladder diagram for
rotating stepper motor in forward and reverse direction at constant speed.

5. Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition(SCADA)

Interface SCADA with PLC and perform read/ command transfer operation - Design of ON and
OFF switch in SCADA - Execute Parameter reading of PLC in SCADA - Operate the PLC inputs
through the switch symbol from the computer screen and view the status of the outputs using
lamp and motor graphics symbols in the screen - Perform Alarm annunciation using SCADA -
Perform Reporting and Trending in SCADA System - Perform temperature sensing using SCADA

Competencies & Key competencies to be achieved by the student

264
 S.
Experiment Title Competencies Key competencies
NO.
Identify the PLC trainer kit, the Personal
Computer and Load PLC software
Observe the input and output ports of the
PLC
Make the interfacing between the PC and
the PLC.
Prepare the appropriate ladder diagrams
for different logic gates(AND, OR, NOT,
NOR,NAND) i) Test the ladder
(i) Demonstrate PLC Save the ladder diagram with relevant file logic with logic gate
architecture and Ladder names examples
diagram (ii) Execute Ladder ii) Test the ladder
Execute each ladder diagram program and
1 diagrams for different logic with
check for errors
Logical Gates (iii) Execute Timer/Counter
Ladder diagrams using Rectify errors if any then save and again instructions in
timers & counters execute the program ladder diagrams
Download the Ladder Diagram program into
the PLC
Run each program and check its output
logic with relevant inputs.
Prepare simple ladder diagrams using
timers and counters instructions
Execute ,Run and check the output logic for
each program
Identify the PLC trainer kit, the Personal
Computer and Load PLC software

Observe the input and output ports of the

Execute Ladder diagrams
PLC
with model applications (i)
ladder diagram for Make the interfacing between the PC and
interfacing of lamp and the PLC.
button for ON / OFF
operation (ii) ladder Prepare the appropriate ladder diagrams
diagram for delayed for lamp ON/OFF operation
operation of lamp by using Execute the Ladder
Push button (iii) ladder Save the ladder diagram with relevant file Diagram programs
2
diagram by multiple push names and observe the
button operation with performance
Execute each ladder diagram program and
delayed lamp for ON/OFF
check for errors
operation(iv) ladder
diagram with combination Rectify errors if any then save and again
of counter and timer for execute the program
lamp ON/OFF operation ( v)
ladder diagram for Stair Download the Ladder Diagram program into
case Lighting vi) ladder the PLC
diagram for sensing of
temperature of the given Run each program and check its output
liquid logic with relevant inputs.

265
 Identify the different available model
Execute Ladder diagrams application kits in the lab
with model applications (i)
ladder diagram for DOL
Draw the ladder diagrams for the given
starter (ii) ladder diagram
program
for Star-Delta starter (iii)
ladder diagram for PMDC Execute the ladder
Prepare the ladder diagrams in the
Motor Speed Controller(iv) diagram programs
3 Computer, save and execute the program
ladder diagram for Traffic and observe the
Light Controller (v) ladder Make proper connections of the model performance
diagram for rotating application at the output port of PLC and
stepper motor in forward download its relevant ladder diagram
and reverse direction at program in PLC
constant Run the ladder diagram program and
speed. observe the outputs with the model
applications

Make the Interfacing between SCADA and

(i) Execute Parameter PLC, perform read/ command transfer
reading of PLC in SCADA (ii) operation
the PLC inputs through the
switch symbol from the
Operate the buttons
computer screen and view
in SCADA and
the status of the outputs Develop switch symbols from the computer
4 observe the outputs
using lamp and motor screen in SCADA to operate the PLC inputs
on the computer
graphics symbols in the
screen
screen (iii) Alarm
annunciation using SCADA
(iv) Reporting and Trending
in SCADA System (v) Observe the output in the computer screen
temperature sensing using
SCADA

LIFE SKILLS

Course Course title No. Of Total No. Marks Marks

code periods/week of for FA for SA

266
 periods

EE-508 LIFE SKILLS 3 45 40 60

Course Title : Life Skills Course code : C23- Common-508

{ Common to all Branches}

Year/ Semester : V/ VI Semester Total periods : 45

Type of Course : Practical Max Marks : 100

{ Sessional 40 + External 60 }

Course Objectives: The students shall

- understand the relevance of life skills in both personal and professional lives

- practise life skills complementarily in life-management to lead a happy and successful life

Course Outcomes:The students shall

CO1: exhibit right attitude and be adaptable in adverse and diverse situations.

CO2: set appropriate goals and achieve them through proper planning, time management and self-
motivation

CO3: solve diverse real-life and professional problems with critical thinking and creativity for a stress-
free life.

CO4: be an ideal team player and manifest as a leader.

Course Delivery:

Text book: “Life Skills” – by State Board of Technical Education and Training, AP

Sl no Unit Teaching
Hours

1 Attitude 4

2 Adaptability 4

3 Goal Setting 4

4 Motivation 4

267
 5 Time Management 4

6 Critical thinking 4

7 Creativity 4

8 Problem Solving 5

9 Team work 4

10 Leadership 4

11 Stress Management 4

Total 45

Course Content:

UNIT I:Attitude matters!

Preparatory activity-Role play; Generating word bank; Types of attitude. Read the passage and
answer the related questions, read the story and discuss issues raised; Express opinions on the given
topic and fill the grid with relevant words.

UNIT 2: Adaptability… makes life easy!

Pair work-Study the given pictures and understand adaptability -read the anecdote and discuss, read
the story and answer the questions, role play

UNIT 3: Goal Setting… life without a goal is a rudderless boat!

Short term goals and long term goals-SMART features, observe the pictures and answer questions-
matching- read the passage and answer questions-filling the grid.

UNIT 4: Motivation… triggers success!

Types of motivation-difference between motivation and inspiration- matching different personalities
with traits - dialogue followed by questions - writing a paragraph based on the passage.

UNIT 5: Time Management … the need of the hour!

Effective Time Management- Time quadrant - Group task on management of time- Time wasters-fill
in the grid, read the story and answer the questions- prioritising tasks.

UNIT 6: Critical Thinking… Logic is the key!

Preparatory activity-read the passage and answer the questions- differentiate between facts and
assumptions- components of critical thinking- complete the sets of analogies- choose the odd one
out- true or false statements- decide which of the conclusions are logical.

UNIT 7: Creativity…. The essential YOU!!

268
Definition- Pre-activity-read the anecdote and answer the questions- matching celebrities with their
fields of specialisation- think of creative uses of objects- think creatively in the given situations.

UNIT 8: Problem Solving… there is always a way out!

Preparatory activity-read the story and answer the questions- discuss the given problem and come
out with three alternative solutions- group activity to select the best solution among available
alternatives- discuss the problem and plan to analyse it.

UNIT 9: Team Work… Together we are better!

Advantages of team work- Characteristics of a team player- Activity-Observe the pictures and classify
them into two groups- team game - read the story and answer the questions- fill in the grid.

UNIT 10 : Leadership… the making of a leader!

Characteristics of effective leadership- styles of leadership- Activity-read the dialogue and answer
the questions- identify the people in the picture and describe them- discuss leadership qualities of
the given leaders- filling the grid- read the quotes and write the name of the leader.

UNIT 11: Stress Management … live life to the full !!

Types of stress- Strategies for Stress Management- Activity-read the passage and answer the
questions, read the situation and write a paragraph about how to manage stress.

Mapping Course Outcomes with Program Outcomes

P 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

C POs 1 to 5 are applications of Engineering Principles, can’t 1,2,3,4 1,2,3,4

directly be mapped to Life Skills
O

Cos- POs Mapping :

CO Course Outcome CO Unit PO mapped Cognitive levels as

Mapped per Bloom’s
Taxonomy

R/U/Ap/An/Ev/Cr

( Remembering /
Understanding/
Applying/Analysing/
Evaluating/
Creating )

269
 CO 1 To exhibit right attitude and All Lessons 6,7 U/Ap/ An
be adaptable to adverse and
diverse situations ( 1 to 11)

CO2 To set appropriate goals and 3,4,5 6,7 U/Ap/An

achieve them through proper
planning, time management
and self-motivation

CO3 To solve diverse real-life and 6,7,8,11 6,7 U/Ap/An/ Ev/ Cr.
professional problems with
critical thinking and creativity
for a stress-free life

CO4 To be an ideal team player 9,10 6,7 U/Ap/An/ Ev

and manifest as a leader

ASSESSMENT

C23-Common-508: Life Skills

 The assessment for C23-Common 508 is on par with all other practical subjects comprising
40 marks for Internal Assessment and 60 marks for External examination attaining the final
total of 100 Marks.
 The Internal Assessment can be conducted in the form of Assignments in all the 11 Units
together, taking the average for 40 marks as suggested below.
 The Assessment sheet provided after each lesson in the workbook can be evaluated as an
assignment (A) for 10 marks. In addition to that, another assignment (B) can be conducted
for 10 marks in each Unit, awarding total average of 10 marks for each Lesson. Finally the
grand total can be averaged for 40 marks as Internal marks.
 The students can present these assignments (B) to the teacher orally and they should also
write down their assignments (B) in a separate note book for practice as they are going to
speak/present in the external examination and submit the same to the teacher.
 The questions for Assignment styles vary from Lesson to Lesson as different skills are
assessed in each Lesson with specific parameters. We can also consider the questions of
assignments given after each lesson in the workbook.
 The assignment questions can also be given based on case studies, personal experiences,
observations, making inferences/ analysis/ forming opinions, solving puzzles, questions on
logical thinking, reasoning, evaluating and writing reviews..etc.

Calculating Internal marks through Assignments

Name of the student: PIN: Branch: Academic Year:

270
 S. Title of the Unit / Lesson Assignment A: Assignment B: Total Marks in
each Unit/ Lesson
No. 10Marks 10 Marks
( Average for
( assessment sheets
after each lesson) 10 Marks)

1 Attitude

2 Adaptability

3 Goal setting

4 Motivation

5 Time Management

6 Critical Thinking

7 Creativity

8 Problem Solving

9 Team work

10 Leadership

11 Stress Management

Marks scored Example: : 90

Total Number of 11
Assignments

Internal Assessment: Example: (90/11) X4=32.7 33

Average for 40 Marks

End Exam Model paper: C23-Common-508 : Life Skills Lab

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Guidelines to
prepare the question paper of the Lab End exam for 60 marks:

I. Define any three of the following terms of Life skills: ( Oral ) – 10 Marks

( From Lessons 1 to 11)

II. Recollect and narrate an incident either from your personal experience or observation where you
have exhibited/ learned about any one of the following life skills. (oral) – 15 Marks.

( From Lessons 1 to 4: Attitude/ Adaptability/Motivation/Goal setting/

271
III. Recollect and narrate an incident either from your personal experience or observation where
you have exhibited/ learned about any one of the following life skills. (oral) – 15Marks.

( From Lessons 5, 9,10,11 : Time Management, Team Work, Leadership, Stress Management )

IV. A question on problem solving skill, using creativity and critical thinking.

( A case study/a problematic situation should be provided by the examiner and the students
should answer it in writing.)

Ex: Analyse the following problematic situation and write down the possible solutions and choose
the best among them using your creativity and critical thinking / How do you solve the following
problem?– ( written ) 20 Marks

( From Lessons 6,7,8: Creativity/ Critical Thinking/ Problem Solving )

Note: The questions I to III can be evaluated through Viva Voce and Q.No. IV should be answered
by the students in writing. The examiner can adapt the blended mode of evaluation ( oral&
written) in view of the more number of students and time constraint.

DIGITAL ELECTRONICS AND MICROCONTROLLERS LABORATORY

No. of Total
Mark Mark
Cours period No. of
Course Title s for s for
e Code s/ Period
FA SA
Week s

DIGITAL ELECTRONICS
272
EE-509 AND 3 45 40 60
MICROCONTROLLERS
LABORATORY
 No. of CO’s
S.No Major Topics
periods Mapped

1. Logic Gates 6 CO1

2. Combinational Logic Circuits 6 CO2

3. Sequential Logic Circuits 9 CO3

4 Basics of Microcontrollers 6 CO4

5 Programming on Microcontrollers 9 CO5

COURSE OUTCOMES MAPPING

i. To understand number representation and conversion between

different representation in digital electronic circuits.
ii. To analyze logic processes and implement logical operations using
COURSE
combinational logic circuits.
OBJECTIVES
iii. To know the importance of different peripheral devices and their
interfacing to microcontrollers.
iv.To know the design aspects of microcontrollers and to write
assembly language programs of microcontrollers for various
applications.

COURSE Understand theory of Boolean Algebra &

CO
OUTCOMES EE-509.1 the underlying features of various number
1
systems.

Apply the concepts of Boolean Algebra for

CO
EE-509.2 the analysis & design of various
2
combinational & sequential logic circuits.

CO EE-509.3 Analyze the sequential logic circuits design

3 both in synchronous and asynchronous

273
 modes for various complex logic and
switching devices.

CO Interpret various peripheral devices to the

EE-509.4
4 microcontrollers.

Write assembly language program for

CO microcontrollers and Design
EE-509.5
5 microcontroller based system for various
applications.

LEARNING OUTCOMES

1. Logic Gates

1.1 Verify the truth tables of basic gates and universal gates.
1.2 Show NAND gate and NOR gate as Universal gates.

2. Combinational Logic Circuits

2.1 Realize a given boolean function and obtain its truth table.
2.2 Construct half adder and full adder and verify the truth tables.
2.3 Verify the function of 74138 decoder IC.
2.4 Verify the working of Multiplexer (Using IC 74153)
2.5 Verify the functional table of 4-bit magnitude comparator 7485 IC.

3. Sequential Logic Circuits

3.1 Construct and verify the truth tables of NAND & NOR latches
3.2 Construct clocked RS FF using NAND gates and Verify its truth table.
3.3 Verify the truth table of JK FF using 7476 IC.
3.4 Construct D and T flip flops using 7476 and verify the truth tables.

4. Basics of Microcontrollers

4.1 Familiarization of 8051 Microcontroller Kit

4.2 Familiarization of 8051 simulator EDSIM 51 (or similar)

5. Programming on Microcontrollers

5.1 Write a program to demonstrate different register addressing techniques on 8051

5.2 Write a program to demonstrate Addition, subtraction, division and multiplication of 8 bit
numbers using immediate data access on 8051.
5.3 Write a program to Add and Subtract 16 bit numbers on 8051.

274
 5.4 Control a RGB led with Arduino.
5.5 Interface an LCD display with Arduino.
5.6 Control a small pump using moisture sensor and Arduino

Note: 1.Thissubjectistobe taughtbyElectronics&CommunicationEngg.Faculty

2.Papersettingandpaperevaluationisalso to be done by Electronics &
CommunicationEnggFaculty.

HYPONATED COURSE CONTENTS

1. Logic Gates

Verify the truth tables of basic gates and universal gates - Show NAND gate and NOR gate as
Universal gates.

2. Combinational Logic Circuits

Realize a given boolean function and obtain its truth table - Construct half adder and full adder and
verify the truth tables - Verify the function of 74138 decoder IC - Verify the working of Multiplexer
(Using IC 74153) - Verify the functional table of 4-bit magnitude comparator 7485 IC.

3. Sequential Logic Circuits

Construct and verify the truth tables of NAND & NOR latches - Construct clocked RS FF using NAND
gates and Verify its truth table - Verify the truth table of JK FF using 7476 IC - Construct D and T flip
flops using 7476 and verify the truth tables.

4. Basics of Microcontrollers

Familiarization of 8051 Microcontroller Kit - Familiarization of 8051 simulator EDSIM 51 (or) similar

5. Programming on Microcontrollers

Write small ALP to demonstrate different register addressing techniques - Write an ALP to
demonstrate Addition, subtraction, division and multiplication of 8 bit numbers using immediate
data access - Write an ALP to Add and Subtract 16 bit numbers – Arduino Programming

Competencies & Key competencies to be achieved by the student

Sl.No Experiment Title Competencies Key Competencies

.

1 Logic Gates  Understand the connection patterns  Connection of devices with

275
 in bread board exact ratings as per circuit
diagram in bread board
 Identifying and constructing circuits
using the basic logic gates (NOT, OR,  Ability to verify truth table
AND, NOR, NAND) and their truth
tables.

 Identifying and constructing circuits

using the compound logic gates
(EXOR, EXNOR) and their truth
tables.
2  Applying fundamental theorems,
associative laws, distributive laws,
commutative laws, and De Morgan’s  Ability to verify truth table
theorems to solve problems.
 . Applying Boolean principles to  Ability to build half adder
perform logic circuit evaluation by and full adder and verify
using truth tables, simplification by the truth tables
Combinational fundamental theorems, and
Logic Circuits simplification by the Karnaugh map
technique.
 Minimizing logic circuits into sum of
products (SOP) and product of sums
(POS) form.
 . Identifying types of encoding,
decoding, multiplexer and de-
multiplexer devices and describing
their functions and uses.
3  Ability to detect and respond to  Ability to detect and
clock signals respond to changes in
 Connection of circuit diagram on kit input signals
with proper input sources  Ability to generate output
 Using CRO to observe frequency signals based on input
Sequential Logic
response waveform patterns signals
Circuits

 Ability to detect and

respond to enable signals

4  Knowledge of microcontroller  Ability to write and debug

architecture and its components assembly language
Basics of
 Ability to write and debug assembly programs
Microcontrollers language programs
 Knowledge of communication
protocols
5 Programming  Understanding of the  Ability to write and debug
microcontroller’s instruction set C and assembly language
on programs
Microcontrollers
 Knowledge of embedded system  Ability to interface with
design principles external devices

 Ability to interface with external

devices

276
 PROJECT WORK

No. of Total
Cours Mark Mark
period No. of
e Course Title s for s for
s/ Period
Code FA SA
Week s

EE-510 PROJECT WORK 3 45 40 60

277
  Enhance the knowledge by field visits
Course Objectives  Provide with the opportunity to synthesize knowledge from
various areas of learning
 Critically and creatively apply it to real life situations

CO1 Organising teamwork.

COURSE CO2 Innovative learning.

OUT COMES CO3 Apply theoretical knowledge to practical work situations.

CO4 Practice technical project reports preparation and presentation.

Learning Outcomes

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

1. Problem solving and Critical Thinking

1.1. Generate Ideas from electrical courses and develop the ideas.
1.2. Gather relevant Information.
1.3. Evaluate Ideas.
1.4. Apply these ideas to a specific task.
1.5. Execute appropriate Laboratory skills
1.6. Draw Appropriate Conclusions

2. Communication
2.1 Communicate effectively.
2.2 Present Ideas Clearly.
2.3 Present Ideas Coherently.
2.4 Report writing.

3. Collaboration
3.1 Discuss the ideas.
3.2 Coordinate with team members
3.3 Team work in accomplishing the task.

4. Independent Learning
4.1 Involves in the group task.
4.2 Analyze the appropriate actions.
4.3 Compares merits and demerits
4.4 Analyze the activities for sustaina

278
4.5 Analyze the activities to ensure ethics

5. Ethics
5.1 Give respect and value to all classmates, educators, colleagues, and others
5.2 Understand the health, safety, and environmental impacts of their work
5.3 Recognize the constraints of limited resources
5.4 Develop sustainable products and processes that protect the health, safety, and prosperity of
future generations
5.5 Maintain integrity in all conduct and publications and give due credit to the contributions of
others

COURSE CONTENT

1.0 Design/Assembling/Analysis/CaseStudy Projects in the areas of Electrical & Electronics

Engineering

Weightage of marks for Assessment of Learning Outcomes of Project work

S.No Item Marks

Internal Marks

Completion of Assigned task in the 40

group/individual to complete the project

End Exam Marks:

1
i) Demonstration of skill relevant to the
project (30)
60
ii) Project Report (20)
iii) Viva Voce (10)

Total marks 100

 End Examination assessment shall be done by HEEES, external examiners and faculty
members who guided the students during project work.

 The external examiner shall be from an industry/organisation/Head of EEE of other

polytechnic/Senior faculty of other polytechnic.

279
280
VI SEMESTER

281
 DIPLOMA IN ELECTRIAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATIONS
VI SEMESTER
INDUSTRIAL TRAINING
Scheme of evaluation
SI.
No Course Title Duration Max. Remarks
. Item Nature Mar
ks

Assessment
1.First of Learning
Assessment at outcomes by
training place/ both the
Industry 120 Pass marks is
faculty and 50% in
(After 12 training assessment
Weeks) Mentor of at training
the industry place/indust
ry (first and
Assessment second
2.Second of Learning assessment
Assessment at outcomes by put
training both the together)
120
place/Industry faculty and
Industria (After 20 training
1 6 months
l Training weeks) Mentor of
the industry

Training
20
Report

Demonstratio
Final
n of any one
Summative 30
of the skills Pass marks is
assessment at
listed in 50% in final
institution
learning summative
level after
outcomes assessment
completion of
training.

Viva Voce 10

TOTAL MARKS 300

282
 INDUSTRIAL TRAINING

Subject Title Subject Code Duration

Industrial Training EE-601 6 months

Time schedule

S.NO Code TOPICS Duration

 Practical training in Industry

 Training Report Preparation
Report Preparation: Title Page, Certificate,
1 EE-601 Acknowledgements, Abstract, Contents(introduction
Six
of Industry, Organization Chart, List of Major
Months
Equipments, List of Processes: Skills Acquired;
Conclusions; Bibliography

Course Objectives and Course Outcomes

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

1.Expose to real time working environment

2. Enhance knowledge and skill already learnt in the institution.

Course Objectives
3. Acquire the required skills of assembling, dismantling, testing,
trouble shooting, observing and supervising in electrical
engineering fields.

CO1 Apply theory to practical work situations

COURSE OUT CO2 Cultivate sense of responsibility and good work habits
COMES
CO3 Exhibit the strength, teamwork spirit and self-confidence

CO4 Gaining knowledge in installations, manufacturing, operations

and maintaining various electrical goods and appliances.

CO5 Writing reports and auditing in electrical projects.

283
Learning Outcomes

The student shall be able to display the following skill sets

1) Demonstration Skills
2) Reading drawings and analysing Specifications
3) Handling Tools/Instruments/Materials/Machines
4) Assembling, dismantling, testing, trouble shooting and maintenance skills.
5) Assess and Control of quality parameters
6) Planning, Organizing, recording and report submission Skills

Scheme of evaluation

SI. Cours Scheme of evaluation

Dura
No e Max.
tion Item Nature
. Title Marks

Assessment of Learning
1.First Assessment
outcomes by both the
at Industry (After 120
faculty and training
12 Weeks)
Mentor of the industry

2.Second Assessment of Learning

Assessment at the outcomes by both the
120
Industry (After 20 faculty and training
weeks)) Mentor of the industry
Industrial
1 6 months Training Report 20
Training

Demonstration of any
one of the skills listed 30
Final Summative
in learning outcomes
assessment at
institution level

Viva Voce 10

TOTAL MARKS 300

284
 Weightage of marks for Assessment of Learning Outcomes during first and second
assessment

Sl.No Learning Outcome Max Marks Marks

Allotted secured
for each
For each
parameter
parameter

1 Demonstration Skills 20

2 Reading drawings and analysing 20

Specifications

3 Handling 20
Tools/Instruments/Materials/machines

4 Assembling, dismantling, testing, trouble 20

shooting and maintenance skills.

5 Assess and Control of quality parameters 15

6 Planning, Organizing, recording and 25

report submission Skills

Total 120

During assessment the performance of the students shall be assessed in those skills in which the
student has been trained and be awarded the marks as per the weightage assigned as above. In case
the student has undergone training in a few skill sets then the total marks obtained shall be raised to
120 marks for the given assessment i.e. either assessment 1 or 2. However the performance of the
student shall be assessed at the most skill sets listed above but not less than three skill sets.

Illustration

If the student has undergone training in only 4 skill sets (namely serial number 1, 3, 4, 5 of above skill
sets) and marks awarded during assessment is 50 out of 80 marks, then the marks of 50 shall be
enhanced to 120 proportionately as (50/80)*120=75.

GUIDELINES FOR INDUSTRIAL TRAINING OF DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

ENGINEERING PROGRAMME:

11. Duration of the training: 6 months.

12. Eligibility: As per SBTET norms
13. Training Area: Students can be trained in APGENCO/APTRANSCO/APDISCOM/Captive Power
plants/Wind power plants,/Solar power plants/Milk
factories/Railways/Roadways/Communication sectors/Television sectors/Public and private

285
 Organizations or industries or companies etc., related to electrical & electronics fields.
14. The Industrial Training shall carry 300 marks and pass marks is 50% in assessment at industry
(first and second assessment put together) and also 50% in final summative assessment at
institution level.
15. Formative assessment at industry level shall be carried out by the representative of the
industry, where the student is undergoing training and the faculty from the concerned section
in the institution.
16. If the student fails to secure 50% marks in industrial assessments put together, the student
should reappear for 6 months industrial training at his/her own expenses.
17. If the student fails to secure 50% marks in final summative assessment at institution level, the
student should reappear for final summative assessment in the subsequent board examination.
18. Final Summative assessment at institution level is done by a committee including 1. Head of
the section (of concerned discipline ONLY), 2. External examiner from an industry and 3.
Faculty member who assessed he student during industrial training as member.
19. During Industrial Training the candidate shall put a minimum of 90% attendance.
20. If the student fails to secure 90% attendance during industrial training, the student should
reappear for 6 months industrial training at his/her own expenses.

Guidelines and responsibilities of the faculty members who are assessing the students
performance during industrial training:

 Shall guide the students in all aspects regarding training.

 Shall create awareness regarding safety measures to be followed in the industry during the training
period, and shall check it scrupulously.
 Shall check the logbook of the students during the time of their visit for the assessment.
 Shall monitor progress at regular intervals and make appropriate suggestions for improvement.
 Shall visit the industry and make first and second assessments as per stipulated schedules.
 Shall assess the skill sets acquired by the students during their assessment.
 Shall award the marks for each skill set as per the marks allotted for that skill set during 1 st and 2nd
assessments
 Shall voluntarily supplement students learning through appropriate materials like photographs,
articles, videos etc.
 Shall act as co-examiner along with other examiners in the final assessment at institution.
 Shall act as liaison between the student and mentor.
 Shall maintain a diary indicating his observation with respect to the progress of students learning in all
three domains (Cognitive, Psychomotor and Affective).

Guidelines to the Training Mentor in the industry:

 Shall train the students in all the skill sets as far as possible.
 Shall assess and award the marks in both the assessments along with the faculty member.
 Shall check and approve the log books of the students.
 Shall approve the attendance of each student at the end of the training period.
 Shall report to the guide about student’s progress, personality development or any misbehavior as
the case may be.
 Every Teacher (including HoD if not holding any FAC) shall be assigned a batch of students of 10 to
15 for industrial training irrespective of student’s placements for training.

286
 Rubrics for assessment
Department of Technical Education
Industrial training assessment

PROFORMA
1. Name of the institution :
2. PIN :
3. Name of the student :
4. Assessment Period (I / II) : FROM: TO:

Completes Complet
Skill Max Marks es the Makes
Precisely the task,
Set Allotted For task, attempt,
completes mistakes
Sl. each Mistake Mistake
SKILL SET the task are absent,
No parameter s are a s are
but not
few many
Precise
Technical Skills
(Manufacturing/Service/N
ame plate details
/Identification of Tools
components etc.,) (20)

(i) Identification of
1 components and tools. 5 5 3 2 1
(ii) Identification of name
5 5 3 2 1
plate details of
machine/equipment. (iii)
Explaining manufacturing 5 5 3 2 1
procedure.
5 5 3 2 1
(iv) Identification of service
requirement.

Reading, Observing,
drawing and analysing
Specifications. (15)

(i) Analysing specifications 5 5 3 2 1

of machine/ equipment.
2 (ii) Drawing circuit 5 5 3 2 1
diagram/schematic
diagram of the
manufacturing process. 5 5 3 2 1
(iii) Observing readings of
various parameters.

287
 Using of Tools/Instruments
/Materials/Machines (20)

3 (i) Use of proper

Tools/Instruments 10 10 7 6 3
(ii) Materials/Machinery 10 10 7 6 3
required for the process

Assembling, dismantling,
testing, repair and
maintenance skills (20)
4 (i) Assembling and 10 10 7 6 3
Dismantling (ii) Testing
(iii) Repair and 5 5 3 2 1
maintenance 5 5 3 3 2

Assess and Control of

quality parameters,
Practice of Safety
measures and Precautions
while handling the
5 Electrical equipment (20)

(i) Assess and control of 10 10 7 6 3

quality parameters.
10 10 7 6 3
(ii) Safety and precautions
for handling the
equipment.

Planning, Organizing,
Recording,
Communicating,
Supervising and report
submission Skills (25)

6 (i) Planning and organizing. 10 10 7 6 4

(ii) Maintenance of records
5 5 3 3 2
in the work place.
(iii) Communication and 5 4 3 2
5
Supervising skill.
(iv) Reporting technical 5 3 3 2
5
issues.

TOTAL MARKS OBTAINED FOR 120

288
NOTE: Mistakes are with reference to Technique, Procedure & precautions, while precision
refers to technique, procedure, precautions, time & result.

(Marks awarded in words: )

Signature of the Training In-charge (Mentor) Signature of the faculty incharge (Guide)

Name Name

Designation Designation

289